NIGERIAN ELECTRICITY SUPPLY AND INSTALLATION STANDARDS

REGULATION 2014
 

REGULATION NO: XXXX 

In exercise of the powers to develop Standards and make Regulations conferred by Sections 81 and 
96(1)  of  the  Electric  Power  Sector  Reform  Act  2005  (Act  No.  6  of  2005)  respectively,  and  all  other 
powers enabling it in that behalf, the Nigerian Electricity Regulatory Commission makes the following 
Regulations for Engineering Designs, Installations, Commissioning and Maintenance of electric power 
systems in the Nigerian Electricity Supply Industry. 

Page 1 of 282 
Table of Contents
 
NIGERIAN ELECTRICITY SUPPLY AND INSTALLATION STANDARDS REGULATION 2014 ............................................1 
1.1  Introduction ........................................................................................................................................... 10 
1.2  Scope ..................................................................................................................................................... 10 
1.3  Normative References ........................................................................................................................... 10 
1.4  Definition of Terms ................................................................................................................................ 16 
1.5  General Provisions ..................................................................................................................................... 21 
1.5.1   Compliance with the Nigerian Electricity Supply and Installation Standards Regulations ................ 21 
1.5.2   Qualification of Engineering Personnel ............................................................................................. 21 
1.5.3  Inspection of Electrical Facilities........................................................................................................ 21 
1.5.4  Documentation and Reporting Obligations ....................................................................................... 21 
1.5.5  Enforcement and Penalty for non‐compliance ................................................................................. 21 
1.5.6   Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) Report ............................................................................... 22 
1.5.7  Amendment or Repeal of NESIS ........................................................................................................ 23 
1.5.8  Constitution of NESIS Review Panel .................................................................................................. 23 
1.5.9  Derogation ......................................................................................................................................... 24 
Chapter 2:  Transmission Substations .............................................................................................................. 26 
2.1  Overview ................................................................................................................................................ 26 
2.2  Civil Works ............................................................................................................................................. 26 
2.2.1  Civil Design ..................................................................................................................................... 28 
2.2.2  Site Preparation ............................................................................................................................. 29 
2.2.3  Property Blockwall Fencing ........................................................................................................... 30 
2.2.4  Substation Control Building ........................................................................................................... 31 
2.2.5  Equipment Plinth ........................................................................................................................... 32 
2.2.6  Water Supply, Sewage & Drainage System ................................................................................... 33 
2.2.7   Drainage ......................................................................................................................................... 33 
2.2.7.1  Design of Drainage: ....................................................................................................................... 33 
2.2.7.2  Slope of Drainage System: ............................................................................................................. 33 
2.2.8  Cable Trench .................................................................................................................................. 34 
2.2.9  Gravelling ....................................................................................................................................... 34 
2.2.10  Landscaping ................................................................................................................................... 34 
2.3  Electromechanical Works ...................................................................................................................... 35 
Page 2 of 282 
 2.3.1  Substation Design .......................................................................................................................... 35 
2.3.2  Equipment Layout.......................................................................................................................... 35 
2.3.3  Bus bar Arrangement .................................................................................................................... 35 
2.3.4  Major Transmission Equipment..................................................................................................... 36 
2.3.5  Secondary Equipment .................................................................................................................... 40 
2.4   SCADA System and Installation ............................................................................................................. 44 
2.4.1  SCADA Control Room ..................................................................................................................... 44 
2.4.2  Remote Terminal Unit (RTUs) ........................................................................................................ 45 
2.4.3  Communications ............................................................................................................................ 45 
2.5   Health, Safety and Environment............................................................................................................ 45 
Chapter 3:  Transmission Lines ......................................................................................................................... 46 
3.1   Right‐of‐Way ......................................................................................................................................... 46 
3.2  Overhead Transmission Conductors ...................................................................................................... 46 
3.2.1  Properties of Electrical Conductors ............................................................................................... 47 
3.2.2  Load on Overhead Transmission Conductors and Safety Factor ................................................... 48 
3.2.3  Jointing and Branching of Electrical Conductors ........................................................................... 48 
3.2.4  Aviation Requirements and Warning Signals: ............................................................................... 49 
3.2  Insulator for Overhead Transmission Lines ........................................................................................... 49 
3.2.1  Mechanical Strength of Insulators for Overhead Transmission Lines ........................................... 49 
3.3  Dielectric Strength of Overhead Transmission Lines ............................................................................. 51 
3.3.1  Clearance between Supporting Structures and Electrical Conductors ......................................... 51 
3.3.2  Dielectric Strength of Overhead Transmission Lines ..................................................................... 51 
3.4  Supporting Structures ............................................................................................................................ 51 
3.4.1  Steel Structural Members of Supporting Structures ..................................................................... 51 
3.4.2  Loads on Supporting Structures and Safety Factor ....................................................................... 55 
3.4.3  Loads on Foundations of Supporting Structures and Safety Factor .............................................. 62 
3.4.4  Reinforcement of Overhead Transmission Lines ............................................................................... 63 
3.5  Regulations for Installation ................................................................................................................... 64 
3.5.1  Clearance between Overhead Ground Wires and Electrical Conductors ...................................... 64 
3.5.2  Height of Overhead Transmission Conductors and Limitation of Span ........................................ 65 
3.5.3  Clearance between Plants and Overhead Transmission Conductors ............................................ 66 
3.5.4  Restrictions in Urban Areas ........................................................................................................... 66 
3.5.5  Regulations for Side‐by‐side Installation and at Adjacency to and Crossing with Other Objects . 68 

Page 3 of 282 
 3.6  Particulars of Installation for Side‐by‐side Use and at Adjacency to and Crossing with Other Objects 69 
3.6.1  Side‐by‐side Use Installation with Other Objects .......................................................................... 69 
3.6.2  Installations at Adjacency to and Crossing with Other Objects .................................................... 73 
3.7  Protection from Lightning and Falling Trees ......................................................................................... 83 
3.7.1  Protection from Lightning ............................................................................................................. 83 
3.7.2  Protection from Falling Trees ........................................................................................................ 83 
3.7.3  Protection from Intrusion .............................................................................................................. 84 
3.7.4  Protection from Mechanical Damage ............................................................................................ 84 
3.7.5  Numbering and Danger Notices .................................................................................................... 84 
3.8  Underground Transmission Lines .......................................................................................................... 85 
3.8.1  Dielectric Strength of Underground Transmission Lines ............................................................... 85 
3.8.2  Cables of Underground Transmission Lines .................................................................................. 85 
3.8.3  Underground Installation of Cables ............................................................................................... 89 
3.8.4  Particulars of Prevention against Underground Electrical Inductive Interference ....................... 92 
3.8.5  Underground Installations at Adjacency to and Crossing with Other Objects .............................. 92 
3.9  Special Transmission Lines .................................................................................................................... 99 
3.9.1  Underwater Transmission Lines .................................................................................................... 99 
3.9.2  Transmission Lines Over Bridges and Others ................................................................................ 99 
Chapter 4:  Injection Substation Installations ................................................................................................ 102 
4.1  Civil Works ........................................................................................................................................... 102 
4.1.1  Civil Design ................................................................................................................................... 102 
4.1.2  Site Preparation ........................................................................................................................... 102 
4.1.3  Control Room Building ................................................................................................................. 105 
4.1.4  Equipment Plinth ......................................................................................................................... 106 
4.2  Electromechanical Works .................................................................................................................... 108 
4.2.1  Substation Design ........................................................................................................................ 108 
4.2.2  Equipment Layout........................................................................................................................ 109 
4.2.3  Busbar/Bay Arrangements .......................................................................................................... 109 
4.2.4  Primary Equipment ...................................................................................................................... 110 
4.2.5  Secondary Equipment .................................................................................................................. 116 
4.3  Health, Safety and Environment.......................................................................................................... 118 
4.3.1  Conveniences and Bathrooms ..................................................................................................... 118 
4.3.2  Water Supply ............................................................................................................................... 118 

Page 4 of 282 
 4.3.3  Emergency and Standby Systems ................................................................................................ 118 
4.3.4  Disposal of Pollutants .................................................................................................................. 119 
4.3.5  Switchyard Illumination ............................................................................................................... 119 
4.3.6  Electrical Hazards ......................................................................................................................... 119 
4.3.7  Fire Fighting and Protection Equipment ...................................................................................... 119 
Chapter 5:  Distribution Network ................................................................................................................... 120 
5.1  General ................................................................................................................................................ 120 
5.1.1  Allowable Voltages for Distribution Network .............................................................................. 121 
5.1.2  Insulation Requirements for Distribution Network ..................................................................... 122 
5.1.3  Earthing of Distribution Network ................................................................................................ 122 
5.1.4  Equipment and Installation Devices for Distribution Network ................................................... 122 
5.2   Overhead Distribution Lines ................................................................................................................ 123 
5.2.1  General ........................................................................................................................................ 123 
5.2.2  Routing of Overhead Lines .......................................................................................................... 123 
5.2.3  Highway Routes ........................................................................................................................... 123 
5.2.4  Overhead Lines with Bare Conductors ........................................................................................ 123 
5.2.5  Vehicular Access .......................................................................................................................... 124 
5.2.6  Line Conductors ........................................................................................................................... 124 
5.2.7  Handling of Electric Supply Lines and Apparatus:‐ ...................................................................... 125 
5.2.8  Strength of Material .................................................................................................................... 125 
5.2.9  Arrangements .............................................................................................................................. 126 
5.2.10  Properties of Distribution Conductors ........................................................................................ 126 
5.2.11  Load Bearing Capacity for Overhead Distribution Lines and Safety Factors ............................... 126 
5.2.12  Jointing Requirements for Overhead Distribution Conductors ................................................... 128 
5.2.13   Dielectric Strength of Insulators of Overhead Distribution Lines ................................................ 128 
5.2.14   Guard Lines, Guard Nets and Protective Devices ....................................................................... 129 
5.2.15   Electric Lines Crossing Waterways .............................................................................................. 129 
5.2.16  Commission’s Decision as Final ................................................................................................... 129 
5.2.17  Proximity to Railway Lines ........................................................................................................... 129 
5.2.18  Proximity to Telecommunication Lines ....................................................................................... 130 
5.2.19  Proximity To Airfield .................................................................................................................... 131 
5.2.20   Proximity to Radio, Television, or Telecommunication Aerials ................................................... 131 
5.3   Basic Clearances for Installation on Distribution Lines ....................................................................... 137 

Page 5 of 282 
 5.4  Service Drop Lines ............................................................................................................................... 140 
5.5  Underground Distribution ................................................................................................................... 149 
5.6  Special Distribution Lines .................................................................................................................... 154 
Chapter 6:  Distribution Substations .............................................................................................................. 157 
6.1  Civil Works ........................................................................................................................................... 157 
6.2  Basic Distribution Substation Components ......................................................................................... 157 
6.2.1  Distribution Transformers ........................................................................................................... 157 
6.2.2  Connection Cables ....................................................................................................................... 157 
6.3  LV Distribution (Feeder Pillar) Panels .................................................................................................. 158 
6.3.1  Structural and Mechanical Specifications ................................................................................... 158 
6.3.2  Electrical Insulations .................................................................................................................... 158 
6.3.3  Metering ...................................................................................................................................... 158 
6.4  Compact Distribution Substation ........................................................................................................ 158 
6.5  Pole Mounted Distribution Substation ................................................................................................ 159 
Chapter 7:  User’s Sites Electrical Installations .............................................................................................. 160 
7.1  General Provisions ............................................................................................................................... 160 
7.2  Indoor Installation ............................................................................................................................... 160 
7.2.1  Electrical Design ........................................................................................................................... 160 
7.2.2  Restriction of Indoor Lines Voltage ............................................................................................. 160 
7.2.3   Indoor Wiring Cables ................................................................................................................... 161 
7.2.4   Utilization and Restriction of Bare Conductors for Indoor Wiring .............................................. 192 
7.2.5  Electrical Conductors Used for Indoor Wiring ............................................................................. 194 
7.2.6   Allowable Current of Indoor Wirings ........................................................................................... 195 
7.2.7  Indoor Wiring Works ................................................................................................................... 197 
7.2.8  Installation of Mains for Electrical Circuits .................................................................................. 200 
7.2.9   Installation of Branch Circuits ...................................................................................................... 201 
7.2.13  Switching Devices at the Indoor Main Lines ................................................................................ 203 
7.2.14   Control of Supply to User Site Installation .................................................................................. 205 
7.2.15  Appliances.................................................................................................................................... 220 
7.2.16   Preventions of Interferences Caused By High Frequency Current, Voltage Flickers And Dips ... 223 
7.2.17  User’s Site Protection and Over Current Circuit Breakers for Electric Motors ............................ 224 
7.2.18  Indoor Electrical Equipment and Appliances ............................................................................... 226 
7.3   Special Installation ............................................................................................................................... 227 

Page 6 of 282 
 7.3.1  Traffic Signals ............................................................................................................................... 227 
7.3.2   Public Street lamps ...................................................................................................................... 228 
Chapter 8:   Protection, Control and Metering .............................................................................................. 230 
8.1  Protection Systems Installations ......................................................................................................... 230 
8.1.1 Transmission Systems Protection ....................................................................................................... 230 
8.2  Power Systems Metering Installations ................................................................................................ 232 
8.3  Digital Events Recorders ...................................................................................................................... 232 
8.4  SCADA Systems Installations ............................................................................................................... 232 
8.4.1  SCADA Control Room ................................................................................................................... 233 
8.4.2  Remote Terminal Unit (RTUs) ...................................................................................................... 233 
8.4.3  Communications .......................................................................................................................... 233 
8.4.4  Geographic Information Systems (GIS) ....................................................................................... 233 
Chapter 9:   Classification of Equipment and Types of Tests ......................................................................... 234 
9.1  Power and Distribution Transformers ................................................................................................. 235 
9.1.2  Continuity Test ............................................................................................................................. 236 
9.1.3  Vector Group ............................................................................................................................... 236 
9.1.4  Ratio Test ..................................................................................................................................... 236 
9.1.5  Magnetic Balance Test ................................................................................................................. 236 
9.1.6  D.C. Winding Resistance Check ................................................................................................... 236 
9.1.7  Insulation Resistance Test ........................................................................................................... 237 
9.1.8   Phasing and Polarity .................................................................................................................... 238 
9.1.9   Continuity Tests ........................................................................................................................... 238 
9.1.10   Vector group ................................................................................................................................ 238 
9.2  Earth Resistance Tests ......................................................................................................................... 239 
9.2.1   Transmission and Distribution Requirements ............................................................................. 239 
9.2.2  Soil Resistance Tests .................................................................................................................... 240 
9.2.3  Current Transformers .................................................................................................................. 240 
9.2.4  Excitation Tests ............................................................................................................................ 240 
9.2.5  Primary Injection/Ratio Tests ...................................................................................................... 240 
9.2.6  Voltage Transformers .................................................................................................................. 240 
9.3  High and Medium Voltage Cables ....................................................................................................... 241 
9.4  Circuit Breakers ................................................................................................................................... 241 
9.5  Lightning Arresters .............................................................................................................................. 242 

Page 7 of 282 
 9.6  Substation D.C Supply (Batteries and Battery Charger System) .......................................................... 244 
9.7  Relays ................................................................................................................................................... 245 
9.7.1  Standards and Specifications ....................................................................................................... 245 
9.7.2  Relay Tests ................................................................................................................................... 246 
9.7.3  Adverse Conditions ...................................................................................................................... 246 
9.7.4  Tests on Relay Circuits ................................................................................................................. 246 
9.7.5  Primary Injection Tests ................................................................................................................ 246 
9.7.6  Secondary Injection Tests ............................................................................................................ 246 
9.7.7  Pick –up Current .......................................................................................................................... 246 
9.7.8  Calibration of Relays .................................................................................................................... 246 
9.7.9  Relay Application Tests ................................................................................................................ 247 
9.7.10  Maintenance ................................................................................................................................ 247 
Chapter 10:  Inspection Checks and Preventive Maintenance ........................................................................ 248 
10.1  Transmission Installation ..................................................................................................................... 248 
10.2  Distribution Installation ....................................................................................................................... 248 
10.3  Consumer Installation.......................................................................................................................... 249 
10.3.1   Inspection Checks of User’s Site Electrical Installations .............................................................. 249 
10.3.2  Testing of Low Voltage Installations ............................................................................................ 250 
Chapter 11:  Earthing ....................................................................................................................................... 254 
11.1  General provisions ............................................................................................................................... 254 
11.7   Earthing in Commercial Premises .................................................................................................... 261 
11.7.1.   Earth leakage ........................................................................................................................... 261 
11.8   Earthing in Industrial Premises ........................................................................................................ 262 
11.9   Earthing in Construction Sites ......................................................................................................... 263 
11.10  Earthing in Mobile Sites ................................................................................................................... 263 
11.11  Stand‐by Generator Installation ...................................................................................................... 263 
11.12  Steel Poles and Street Lighting Columns ......................................................................................... 265 
11.13  Tower Earthing ................................................................................................................................ 266 
11.14  Equipment Earthing ......................................................................................................................... 267 
11.4.1  Substations .................................................................................................................................. 267 
Chapter 12:   Generation ................................................................................................................................... 268 
12.1  Site Requirements ............................................................................................................................... 268 
12.1.1  Site Approval ............................................................................................................................... 268 

Page 8 of 282 
 12.1.2  Documentation ............................................................................................................................ 268 
12.1.3  Geotechnical Investigations ........................................................................................................ 268 
12.1.4  Hydrology .................................................................................................................................... 268 
12.1.5  Water Permit ............................................................................................................................... 268 
12.1.6  Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) ..................................................................................... 268 
12.2  Plant Design ......................................................................................................................................... 269 
12.2.1  Fuel Handling ............................................................................................................................... 269 
12.2.1  Technical Documentation ............................................................................................................ 270 
12.3  Construction of Power Plants .............................................................................................................. 270 
12.3.1  Responsibilities of the Licensee or Contractor ............................................................................ 270 
12.3.2  Responsibilities of the Project Manager ...................................................................................... 270 
12.3.3  Pre‐Requisites For Commencement Of Construction ................................................................. 271 
12.3.4  Pre‐Construction Site Meeting .................................................................................................... 272 
12.3.5  Environmental Health and Safety Induction ............................................................................... 273 
12.3.6  Site Health and Safety Plan.......................................................................................................... 274 
12.3.7  Water Management .................................................................................................................... 275 
12.3.8  Emission and Effluent Limitations ............................................................................................... 276 
12.3.9  Solid Wastes ................................................................................................................................ 278 
12.3.10  Ambient Noise ......................................................................................................................... 278 
12.3.11  Record Keeping ........................................................................................................................ 279 
12.4   Power Evacuation ............................................................................................................................ 280 
12.4.1  Voltage Levels: ............................................................................................................................. 280 
12.4.2   Voltage Variations: ...................................................................................................................... 280 
12.4.3  Frequency Level: .......................................................................................................................... 280 
12.4.4  Frequency Variations: .................................................................................................................. 280 
12.4.5   Technical Criteria for Plant and Apparatus at the Inter ‐ Connection Point ............................... 280 
12.4.6   Performance Requirements for Power Stations: ........................................................................ 281 
12.5  Penalties for Non Compliance. ............................................................................................................ 282 
 

Page 9 of 282 
1.1 Introduction
This introduction does not form part of these Regulations. The Regulations is a compendium of
standards for the design, construction and commissioning of electrical infrastructure in the Nigeria
Electricity Supply Industry approved by the Nigerian Electricity Regulatory Commission to replace the
Electricity Supply (S. I. 5) Regulations and the Electrical Installation Regulations (S.I.6) of 1996 issued
under the repealed Electricity Act. The Commission derived its power to repeal these regulations from
Section 98 of the Electric Power Sector Reform Act 2005. The new regulations is named “Nigeria
Electric Supply and Installation Standards Regulations”

These Regulations include areas on design, construction, and commissioning of the power system in
Nigeria through the value chain of electricity generation, transmission, distribution and utilisation not
covered in Grid Code, Distribution Code, Metering Code and Health & Safety Code as amended.
Fundamentally it covers standards of materials, equipment and process with normative references to
the EPSR Act, NERC technical Codes, IEC standards, and more as enumerated in the Normative
Reference.

A Technical Working Group (TWG-NESIS Regulations) under the leadership of the Nigerian Society of
Engineers (Nigeria Institution of Electrical Electronics Engineers-A Division of the Nigerian Society of
Engineers) was formed with the sole responsibility of producing a draft regulation to replace the S.I.5
and S. I. 6 Regulations. The complete list of membership and organisation represented is in Section
1.5. Four subcommittees of the TWG-NESIS Regulation produced the draft in five sessions over a
period of fifteen months. The subcommittees are Transmission, Distribution, User’s Site and
Generation committees.

1.2 Scope

This document describes the requirements regulating the generation, transmission, distribution, and
user’s site standards, guides, and recommended practices for use in the Nigeria Electricity Supply
Industry (NESI).

1.3 Normative References

The following normative documents contain provisions, which, through reference in this text constitute
provisions of this International Standard. At the time of publication, the editions indicated were valid.
All normative documents are subject to revision, and parties to agreements based on these
International Standards are encouraged to investigate the possibility of applying the most recent
editions of the normative documents indicated below. Members of IEC and ISO maintain registers of
currently valid International Standards.

EPSR Act 2005 (Electric Power Sector Reform Act 2005)

Distribution Code

Grid Code

Metering Code

Page 10 of 282 
Reporting Compliance Regulations 2009

Nigerian Electricity Supply Industry Standards regulation

Nigerian Building Code (NBC)

Nigerian Electricity Regulatory Commission (NERC) Health and Safety Code

IEC 60076 – 1: Power transformers - Part 1 General

IEC 60076 – 2: Power transformers – Part 2: Temperature rise for liquid-immersed transformers

IEC 60076 – 3, Power transformers - Part 3: Insulation levels, dielectric tests and external clearances
in air

IEC 60076 – 4, Power transformers-Part 4: Guide to the lightning impulse and switching impulse
testing-power transformers and reactors

IEC 60076 – 5, Power transformers: Ability to withstand short circuit

IEC 60076 – 6, Power transformers – Part 6: Reactors

IEC 60076 – 7, Power transformers – Part 7: Loading guide for oil immersed power transformers

IEC 60076 – 8, Power transformers – Application guide

IEC 60076 – 10, Power transformers – Part 10-1: Determination of sound levels – Application guide

IEC 60076 – 13, Power transformers – Part 13: Self-protected liquid-filled transformers

IEC 60076 – 14, Power transformers – Part 14: Design and application of liquid-immersed power
transformers using high-temperature insulation materials

NIS IEC 60186: Inductive voltage dividers

IEC60947-1: Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear - Part 1: General rules

IEC 60099-4: Surge Arresters.

IEC 60296: Fluids for electrotechnical applications - Unused mineral insulating oils for transformers
and switchgear

IEC 60044-1: Instrument transformers - Part 1: Current transformers

IEC 60044-2: Instrument transformers - Part 2: Inductive voltage transformers

IEC 60273: Characteristic of indoor and outdoor post insulators for systems with nominal voltages
greater than 1000 V

IEC 60282-2: High-voltage fuses - Part 2: Expulsion fuses

IEC 60289: Reactors

Page 11 of 282 
IEC 60529

IEC 60947: Shunt Reactor

IEEE Standard 1031 – 2011: Reactive Power Compensator

IEC 60255: Electrical relays

IEC 60255: Measuring relays and protection equipment

IEC-61439: Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies - Part 0: Guidance to specifying

assembliesNigerian Communication Commission (NCC) - Specification for communication towers

NIS IEC 61850: Communication networks and systems in substations - ALL PARTS s

IEC 61089: Round wire concentric lay overhead electrical stranded conductors

IEC 60028: International standard of resistance for copper 

IEC 60889: Hard-drawn aluminium wire for overhead line conductors

IEC 60888: Zinc-coated steel wires for stranded conductors

IEC 61232: Aluminium-clad steel wires for electrical purposes

IEC 60104: Aluminium-magnesium-silicon alloy wire for overhead line conductorsIEC 60383-1:
Insulators for overhead lines with a nominal voltage above 1000 V - Part 1: Ceramic or glass insulator
units for a.c. systems - Definitions, test methods and acceptance criteria

IEC 60038: IEC standard voltages

IEC 60840: Power cables with extruded insulation and their accessories for rated voltages above 30
kV (Um = 36 kV) up to 150 kV (Um = 170 kV) - Test methods and requirements

IEC 60502-2:  Power cables with extruded insulation and their accessories for rated voltages from 1
kV (Um = 1,2 kV) up to 30 kV (Um = 36 kV) – Part 2: Cables for rated voltages from 6 kV (Um = 7,2 kV)
up to 30 kV (Um = 36 kV)

IEC 60228: Conductors of insulated cables

NCP 9: National Code of Practice on Earthing

IEC 60364-5-54: Low-voltage electrical installations - Part 5-54: Selection and erection of electrical
equipment - Earthing arrangements and protective BS 8004: Foundations for the Design and
construction of Injection Substation foundations

BS 8110:Concrete Structural works

BS 5950:Structural use of steelwork in building code of practice for design rolled and welded sections

Page 12 of 282 
BS 8007:Code of practice for design of concrete structures for retaining aqueous liquids 

BS 5628:Block Work/Brickwork for the design and Construction of block work/brickwork

IEC 60335-2-76:  Household and similar electrical appliances - Safety - Part 2-76: Particular
requirements for electric fence energizers

NERC Health & Safety Code Version 01

IEC 60694: Common clauses for high-voltage switchgear and controlgear standards.

IEC 60298: High-voltage metal-enclosed switchgear and controlgear

IEC 62271-200: High‐voltage  switchgear  and  controlgear  ‐  Part  200:  AC  metal‐enclosed  switchgear  and 
controlgear for rated voltages above 1 kV and up to and including 52 kV 

IEC 60529: Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)

IEC 62271-100: High‐voltage switchgear and controlgear ‐ Part 100: Alternating current circuit‐breakers 

IEC 60185: Current Transformer

IEC 60186: Voltage Transformer

IEC 60215: Relays

IEC 62271-4: High‐voltage switchgear and controlgear ‐ Part 4: Handling procedures for sulphur hexafluoride 

(SF6) and its mixtures

Nigerian Environmental Laws

IEC 62128-1, 2, 3 - Bypass Isolators-Protective device for electrical safety

IEC 60099 - Lightning or surge arrester devices for protection of all substations, intersection of
overhead lines and underground cables from lightning and switching surges

IEC 61954 Static VAr Compensator installed on medium voltage distribution for power quality
improvement of the network

IEC 61400-Dynamic Voltage Restorers or Series Voltage Booster device installed to mitigate against
voltage sags, spikes, harmonics and in-voltage variations

IEC 60871-Shunt capacitors installed in the Injection Substations-Each capacitor unit is designed,
rated, manufactured, and tested

IEC 60143-1: Series capacitors for power systems ‐ Part 1: General

IEC 62068: Electrical insulating materials and systems ‐ General method of evaluation of electrical endurance 

under repetitive voltage impulses

IEC 61089-Classes and qualities of aluminium conductors applicable in distribution overhead network

Page 13 of 282 
B.S. 125, 1970: for Copper or Copper Equivalent

B.S. 215 Part 1 197-for Aluminium

IEC 60173:  Colours of  the  cores  of  flexible  cables  and  cords:High‐voltage  switchgear  and  controlgear  ‐  Part 
202: High‐voltage/ low‐voltage prefabricated substation

NIS IEC 60228:Conductors of insulated cables

IEC 60079-0: Explosive atmospheres ‐ Part 0: Equipment ‐ General requirements

IEC 60227:Polyvinyl chloride insulated cables of rated voltages up to and including 450/750 V ‐ Part 1: General 
requirements 

IEC 60502: Power cables with extruded insulation and their accessories for rated voltages from 1 kV (Um = 1,2 

kV) up to 30 kV (Um = 36 kV) ‐ ALL PARTS

NIS IEC 60204:Safety of machinery ‐ Electrical equipment of machines ‐ ALL PARTS

NIS IEC 60884: Plugs and socket‐outlets for household and similar purposes ‐ Part 1: General requirements

BS5266-1 -Where indoor lighting is designated for emergency purposes in such places as hospitals,
entertainment venues, schools, industrial premises, hotels amongst others

NIS IEC 60335: : Household and similar electrical appliances

NIS IEC 60974-9:Arc welding equipment ‐ Part 9: Installation and use

NIS IEC 60081: Double‐capped fluorescent lamps ‐ Performance specifications

NIS IEC 61000-3-11: Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) ‐ Part 3‐11: Limits ‐ Limitation of voltage changes, 

voltage fluctuations and flicker in public low‐voltage supply systems ‐ Equipment with rated current ≤ 75 A and 
subject to conditional connection 

IEC 60598-2-3: Luminaires  ‐  Part  2‐3:  Particular  requirements  ‐  Luminaires  for  road  and  street  lightingIEC
60092-306:Electrical installations in ships ‐ Part 306: Equipment ‐ Luminaires and lighting accessories

IEC 60364-7-704: Low‐voltage  electrical  installations ‐  Part  7‐704:  Requirements  for  special  installations  or 
locations ‐ Construction and demolition site installations

IEC 60364-7-705: Low‐voltage  electrical  installations ‐  Part  7‐705:  Requirements  for  special  installations  or 
locations ‐ Agricultural and horticultural premises

IEC 60364-7-701:Low‐voltage  electrical  installations  ‐  Part  7‐701:  Requirements  for  special  installations  or 
locations ‐ Locations containing a bath or shower 

IEC 60364-7-711:Electrical  installations  of  buildings  ‐  Part  7‐711:  Requirements  for  special  installations  or 
locations ‐ Exhibitions, shows and stands 

Page 14 of 282 
IEC 60335-2-75-Households and similar electrical appliances particular requirement for commercial
dispensing appliances and bending machines

IEC 61850:Communication networks and systems in substations ‐ ALL PARTS

IEC 608-70-104 - Communication between Substation Automation System (SAS) and power plant
devices

NIS IEC 60557-Dissolved gas analysis carried out on all transformers periodically

IEC 60726:Dry‐type power transformers

IEC 60044: Instrument transformers

IEC 60044-2 (2000-1): Instrument transformers ‐ Part 2: Inductive voltage transformers

IEC 60502-2: Power cables with extruded insulation and their accessories for rated voltages from 1 kV (Um = 
1,2 kV) up to 30 kV (Um = 36 kV) – Part 2: Cables for rated voltages from 6 kV (Um = 7,2 kV) up to 30 kV (Um = 36 
kV)

IEC 60060: High‐voltage test techniques ‐ ALL PARTS

IEC 60947-1: Low‐voltage switchgear and controlgear ‐ Part 1: General rules

IEC 60947-2: Low‐voltage switchgear and controlgear ‐ Part 2: Circuit‐breakers

IEC 60898: Electrical  accessories  ‐  Circuit‐breakers  for  overcurrent  protection  for  household  and  similar 
installations

IEC 62271-100: High‐voltage switchgear and controlgear ‐ Part 100: Alternating current circuit‐breakers

IEC 62271-200:   High‐voltage  switchgear  and  controlgear  ‐  Part  200:  AC  metal‐enclosed  switchgear  and 
controlgear for rated voltages above 1 kV and up to and including 52 kV  

IEC 60099-5: Surge arresters - Part 5: Selection and application recommendations

IEC 60099 -6: Surge arresters ‐ Part 6: Surge arresters containing both series and parallel gapped structures ‐ 

Rated 52 kV and less 

IEC 60099 -8: Surge  arresters  ‐  Part  8:  Metal‐oxide  surge  arresters  with  external  series  gap  (EGLA)  for 
overhead transmission and distribution lines of a.c. systems above 1 kV  

IEC 62305-1: Protection against lightning - Part 1: General principles

2, 3 & 4-for the design, selection and specification of lightning arresters for use in distribution
networks

IEC60099Surge arresters. Part 3: Artificial pollution testing of surge arresters

Page 15 of 282 
IEC 60099-8Surge arresters - Part 8: Metal-oxide surge arresters with external series gap (EGLA) for
overhead transmission and distribution lines of a.c. systems above 1 kV

IEC 60255-1: Measuring relays and protection equipment - Part 1: Common requirements

IEC 61810-1-Electromechanical relay used on distribution substation switchgears

IEC 60255-Electrostatic relay which are relays that do not have moving parts used

IEC 61810-7: Electromechanical elementary relays - Part 7: Test and measurement procedures

IEC 60364-5-54:  Low-voltage electrical installations - Part 5-54: Selection and erection of electrical
equipment - Earthing arrangements and protective conductors

IEEE 519Guide-for-Harmonic-Control-and-Reactive-Compensation-of-Static-Power-ConvertersBS
7671-2008:Every means of earthing to be selected and erected

1.4 Definition of Terms

 

Word Definition

Annealed Toughened metal or glass by heating and slow cooling

Arcing Horn (Sometimes arc-horns) are projecting conductors used to protect insulators on
high voltage electric power transmission systems from damage
during flashover.

AVC Adaptive VAR Compensator

Bayonet cap Cap (international designation B) with bayonet pins on its shell which engage in
slots in a lamp holder

Buchholz Is a gas and oil operated device installed in the pipe‐work between the top of the 
transformer main tank and the conservator

Captive Generation Generation of electricity for the purpose of consumption by a licensee itself and
not sold to a third party

Catenary a longitudinal cable supporting the contact wire or wires either directly or
indirectly

Cold-rolled -

Consumer means any end‐user of electricity who is a customer of a distribution licensee

that is not an eligible customer and, for purposes of filing a complaint with the
Commission and for any other reason that the Commission may determine, a
person who is temporally disconnected or otherwise without service, provided
that a person who has applied for, but has yet to receive, service shall also be
deemed to be a consumer

Page 16 of 282 
COREN Council for the Regulation of Engineering in Nigeria

CT Current Transformer

D – Iron Mechanical support for low tension overhead lines manufactured and
fabricated in the form of D shape to provide support for the porcelain insulators

Earth mat Earth mat is an earth electrode that is manufactured or fabricated in the form of
a mat.

EPSR Electric Power Sector Reform

Equi-Potential Refers to a region in space where every point in it is at the same potential;
always perpendicular to the electric field

Extraneous Conductive part not forming part of the electrical installation and liable to
introduce an electric potential, generally the electric potential of a local earth

Furan Analysis Test on transformer oil that indicates the degree of depreciation of paper
insulation.

Galvanized Iron or Steel material coated with zinc.

Gantry guy Gantry: A bridge like overhead structure supporting equipment such as a crane
or a tall framework supporting a space rocket prior to launching.

Generating Station means a station for generating electricity, including buildings, plant and
machinery and all accessories used for that purpose and the site to be used for
the station or accessories

GHG’s Greenhouse Gases

Grid Code means instructions, rules, procedures, guidelines, etc., for the operation and
planning of an interconnected power system and accounting requirements
relating thereto

Guy assembly Guy: a steel wire rope or rod, working under tension, connecting a point of a
support to a separate anchor, or connecting two points of the support

Assembly (electric) line: an arrangement of conductors, insulating materials

and accessories for transferring electricity between two points of a system

HMI Human–Machine Interface

IEC International Electrotechnical Commission

Interturn Fault an insulation fault between neighboring turns of the same winding in a coil

Interutility Any transfer of allowances from one utility operating company's account to a
different utility operating company's account, provided the operating companies
are not controlled by the same parent company. Both transferor and transferee

Page 17 of 282 
 accounts can be either general or unit accounts.

Isokeraunic A line on a map that connects places of equal thunderstorm frequency

Kingbolts A vertical iron bolt, by which the forward axle and wheels of a vehicle or the
trucks of a railroad car are connected with the other parts.

Knee Point Voltage is the maximum secondary voltage that the CT will provide to a standard
burden without saturating the transformer

Lateral shearing Shearing: to cut (something).

Lateral: of or pertaining to the side; situated at, proceeding from, or directed to

a side

Licensee means any person who holds a licence issued under Part IV of the EPSR Act
2005;

Lighting Arresters is a device used on electrical power systems and telecommunications systems
to protect the insulation and conductors of the system from the damaging
effects of lightning

LMU/LMDU Line Matching Unit/Line Matching Distribution Unit: is a composite unit

consisting of Drain Coil, Isolation transformer with lightning arrester on its both
the sides, a Tuning Device and an earth switch.

Lugs Metallic device used to terminate flexible of multistrand cables before

connecting it to a terminal or equipment.

Lux SI unit of illuminance (luminance): Illuminance (luminance) produced on a

surface of area 1 square metre by a luminous flux of 1 lumen uniformly
distributed over that surface

LVAC Low Voltage Alternating Current

Marshalling Boxes Marshalling box is a type of box containing auxiliary equipment connected by cables 

to main substation equipment, e.g. power transformers. Such auxiliary equipment 
could be WTI (winding temperature indicator) and OTI (oil temperature indicator) of 
power transformers.

MCB Miniature Circuit Breaker

NBC National Building Code

NCC Nigerian Communications Commission

NIS Nigerian Industrial Standards

Opepe wood A typical West African tree that yields timber that is used in harbor work
because of its resistance to marine borers.

Page 18 of 282 
Person includes an individual, company, partnership or any other association of
individuals, whether incorporated or not;

Pilot Cables a control cable laid in parallel with a power cable and intended for transmitting
signals related to the operation of that cable

Prima facie a Latin expression meaning accepted as correct until proved otherwise

RCC Regional Control Center

SCADA Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition; a computer system for gathering
and analyzing real time data

SCU Substation Control Unit

SF6 Sulphur hexafluoride (SF6) is an inorganic, colorless, odorless, non-flammable,

extremely potent greenhouse gas, which is an excellent electrical insulator.

Switchgear A combination of disconnects switches and breakers used to isolate or connect

equipment in substations.

Synchronism the state in which two time-varying phenomena, time-scales, or signals are
identical

Teleprotection A protection scheme that incorporate protective relays with ability to

communicate with each other to clear fault faster, increase fault sensitivity, and
restore power quicker with fast reliable protect transmission lines with high
speed distance and directional functions.

Termination kits Electrical termination of an electric voltage involves providing a terminator at

the end of a wire or cable to prevent a supply from being fed back from the
end.

Toe compression A steel-toe boot (also known as a safety boot, steel-capped boot or safety
shoe) is a durable boot or shoe that has a protective reinforcement in the toe
which protects the foot from falling objects or compression, usually combined
with a mid sole plate to protect against punctures from below

Tower Footing The ohmic resistance between a transmission-line tower and the earth.
Resistance

Trifurcation The act of splitting into three branches

Vector Group the IEC method of categorizing the high voltage (HV) windings and low voltage
(LV) winding configurations and angular displacement between them of three-
phase transformers.

Vermin pests or nuisance animals, especially those that threaten human society by
spreading diseases.

Page 19 of 282 
Wide Area This is a protection type used to save the system from partial or total blackout
Protection or brownout in operational situations when no particular equipment is faulty or
operated outside its limitations. The situation could appear after the clearance
of a very severe disturbance in a stressed operation situation or after an
extreme load growth. Since it is a protection system, it will operate in such
operational situation when the power systems will breakdown if no protective
actions were taken.

Page 20 of 282 
1.5 General Provisions
1.5.1 Compliance with the Nigerian Electricity Supply and Installation Standards
Regulations
Any person engaged in the generation, transmission, distribution, system operation, and trading in
electricity or in any aspect in the chain of supply of electricity, including but not limited to engineering
designs, installations, commissioning and maintenance of electric power systems for the purpose of
achieving safe and reliable supply, and utilization of electricity in Nigeria, shall comply with the
provisions of the Electric Power Sector Reform (EPSR) Act 2005, The Nigerian Electricity Supply and
Installation Standards (NESIS), license terms and conditions and all other regulations, Codes,
Standards made pursuant to the EPSR Act.

1.5.2 Qualification of Engineering Personnel

The minimum qualification of any person to be engaged or engaged as an Engineering Personnel in
any undertaking, or involved in any aspect of the electricity supply chain shall be any COREN
registrable qualification.

1.5.3 Inspection of Electrical Facilities

1.5.3.1. Any licensee, undertaking or any person involved in the business of generation, transmission,
distribution, trading, system operation, or any aspect of the electricity supply chain in NESI, shall
ensure the regular inspection of electrical facilities within its area of operation in compliance with and
in the manner provided in the "Inspection" provisions of the EPSR Act, NESIS, Distribution Code, Grid
Code, Metering Code and any other regulation, Codes and Standards made pursuant to the EPSR Act
2005.

1.5.3.2. Pursuant to Section 95 of the EPSR Act, the Commission may appoint inspectors to inspect
electrical facilities to ensure safety of operations and compliance with the EPSR Act, NESIS,
Distribution Code, Grid Code, Metering Code and any other regulation, Codes and Standards made
pursuant to the EPSR Act.

1.5.4 Documentation and Reporting Obligations

1.5.4.1. Any licensee or any person in the business of electricity generation, transmission, distribution,
trading, system operation or any other aspect of the electricity supply chain, shall ensure;

(i) The proper documentation of its activities and processes in accordance with the provisions
of the EPSR Act, NESIS, Distribution Code, Grid Code, Metering Code and any other
regulations, Codes, and Standards applicable to it and made pursuant to the EPSR Act.
(ii) Compliance with reporting obligations in the EPSR Act, NESIS, Reporting Compliance
Regulations 2009, Distribution Code, Grid Code, Metering Code and any other regulations,
Codes and Standards applicable to it and made pursuant to the EPSR Act.

1.5.5 Enforcement and Penalty for non‐compliance

Page 21 of 282 
1.5.5.1. Pursuant to Section 75 & 94 (1) of the EPSR Act and without prejudice to the Enforcement
Regulations, any person who contravenes or violates any provisions of the NESIS commits an offence
and is liable on conviction, where no specific penalty is prescribed therefore:

(i) As a first offender to a fine not exceeding N100, 000.00 (One Hundred Thousand Naira)
only or to imprisonment for a period not exceeding 1(one) year or to both fine and
imprisonment; or
(ii) For subsequent convictions to a fine not exceeding N500, 000.00 (Five Hundred Thousand
Naira) or to imprisonment for a period not exceeding 3 (three) years or to both fine and
imprisonment.

1.5.5.2 Any person who;

(i) Fails or refuses to furnish a return or to supply information in the manner or in the time
prescribed or furnishes a false or incomplete return or supplies false or incomplete
information; or
(ii) Delays, obstructs or prevents an inspector appointed by the Commission from carrying out
the inspection; or
(iii) Fails or refuses, without reasonable cause to give information to an inspector when
required to do so by the Inspector, or gives false, misleading or incomplete information;
(iv) Commits an offence and is liable on conviction to imprisonment not exceeding one year or
to a fine not exceeding N100, 000 (One Hundred Thousand Naira).

1.5.5.3. Administrative fines

1.5.5.3.1.Without prejudice to the provisions of the EPSR Act 2005 and notwithstanding the provisions
of other Regulations made pursuant thereto, the Commission may impose administrative fines of not
more than N10, 000.00 (Ten Thousand Naira) per day, on any licensee, other undertaking or any
person involved in the business of electricity generation, transmission, distribution, trading, system
operation or any other aspect of the electricity supply chain, who contravenes or violates any provision
of the NESIS.

1.5.5.3.2. The fine imposed shall be calculated on a daily basis and shall be in force until the violation
or contravention is abated or discontinued.

1.5.5.3.3. Persistent and consistent violations or contravention of the NESIS may;

(i) In the case of a licensee, lead to the suspension or removal of the licensees management
by the Commission;
(ii) In the case of other undertaking, lead to the Commission issuing directives to a licensee to
take over operations of the undertaking.

1.5.6 Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) Report

1.5.6.1. Any licensee or person engaged in the business of electricity generation, transmission,
distribution, trading, system operation, or in any other aspect of the electricity supply chain, shall
always ensure that it has an Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) Report and Certificate from the
Federal Ministry of Environment.

Page 22 of 282 
1.5.6.2. The EIA Certificate shall always be prominently displayed in the principal place of business of
the licensee or person and shall be renewed as and when due.

1.5.7 Amendment or Repeal of NESIS

1.5.7.1. The Commission may on its own or upon the recommendation of the NESIS Review Panel,
amend or repeal in whole or in part, the provisions of NESIS.

1.5.7.2. The Panel may on its own or upon receipt of a request for a review of NESIS from the
respective power industry participants or members of the public through the Chairman of the NESIS
Review Panel, first consider the request for a review before forwarding the request to the Commission
for consideration.

1.5.7.3. In considering the request for a review, the Panel shall consult and expose the proposal to
industry stakeholders and operators for their comments, and the Panel shall provide evidence of this
consultation together with their comments to the Commission in seeking the Commissions consent for
amendment.

1.5.7.4. Upon the consideration of the request for review and or amendment as submitted by the
NESIS Review Panel and other further representations and views made in respect of the proposed
amendment, the Commission shall approve the amendment as requested or in an amended form, or
reject the amendment.

1.5.7.5. The approved amendment shall be published by the Commission.

1.5.8 Constitution of NESIS Review Panel

1.5.8.1. There is hereby established, a review panel to be known as the Nigerian Electricity Supply
and Installation Standards (NESIS) Review Panel which shall be responsible for regular review of the
Standards through consultations, research and other methodologies deemed appropriate from time to
time.

1.5.8.2. Constitution of the NESIS Review Panel shall be as follows:

i. Generation Companies
ii. Transmission Company
iii. Distribution Companies
iv. Trading Companies
v. System operator
vi. Representatives of Consumers
vii. Representatives of COREN
viii. Representative of electric network inspectors
ix. Legal Experts
x. The Commission

1.5.8.3. The panel shall be a standing body to carry out the functions referred to in the NESIS, and
shall be maintained and funded by the Electricity Market.

1.5.8.4. Representation of Membership

Page 23 of 282 
1.5.8.5. Composition of membership of the NESIS Review Panel shall be as follows and each of the
members shall be appointed by their respective industry sector. Each member shall be COREN
registered professional except the two(2) legal experts;

i. Four (4) persons representing Distribution Companies

ii. Three (3) persons representing Generation Companies
iii. Two (2) persons representing the Transmission Company
iv. One (1) person representing the System Operator
v. One (1) person representing Customers
vi. One (1) person representing the Commission (with no voting rights)
xi. Four (4) persons representing COREN affiliated institutions
xii. One (1) person representing Electric Network Inspectors
xiii. Two (2) Legal Experts

1.5.8.6. The Chairman and Secretary of the Review Panel shall be elected by a simple majority of
members present and voting.

1.5.8.7. Functions of the Review Panel

. The Review Panel shall have the following functions amongst others;

i. Maintain and ensure the review of the NESIS.

ii. Keep the NESIS and its operations under review
iii. Review all requests for review submitted to it
iv. Submit to the Commission for consideration, all requests for the review and amendment of
the NESIS from industry stakeholders, operators and the public.
v. Issue guidance in the implementation, performance and interpretation of NESIS when
asked to do so by the Commission, any stakeholder, operator or public.
vi. Establish and maintain joint co-ordination arrangements with any other review panel
established under the EPSR Act or any Regulations, Codes, Standard made pursuant to
the EPSR Act.

1.5.9 Derogation
1.5.9.1. If a licensee or person involved in the business of electricity generation, transmission,
distribution, system operation, trading or in any other aspect of the electricity supply chain, finds that it
is or will be unable to comply with any of the provisions of NESIS, then such licensee, other
undertaking or any person involved in the electricity supply chain, shall comply fully with the processes
for seeking derogation outlined in the " Derogation" provisions of the Grid Code, Distribution Code,
Metering Code, but in particular, if such undertaking is not a licensee, it shall;

i. Without delay, report such inability to comply, to the distribution company within its area of
operation and shall make such reasonable efforts as are required to remedy such non-
compliance as soon as is reasonably practicable.
ii. If such an undertaking is a licensee, it shall without delay, report such inability to comply
with the Commission and shall make such reasonable efforts as are required to remedy
such non-compliance as soon as practicable.

1.5.9.2. A request for derogation shall contain from any provisions of the NESIS shall contain;

Page 24 of 282 
 i. The details of the equipment and connection point in respect of which derogation is sought
and the nature of and extent of non compliance
ii. The provision of licensee or person NESIS, which the licensee or person has stated, it
might not be able to comply with.
iii. The reason for its inability to comply.
iv. The remedial actions and the date by which compliance could be achieved.

1.5.9.3. On receipt of any request for derogation, the Commission shall ensure that consent is not
unreasonably withheld, PROVIDED that the Commission promptly considers the reasonableness of
such a request.

1.5.9.4. In considering a request for derogation, the Commission may contact the licensee or person
for further clarification on the request, or seek further information and additional information or to
discuss changes to the request, and review possible remedial actions to achieve compliance as soon
as reasonably practicable.

1.5.9.5. Any request for derogation to a licensee by other undertaking, shall on application by the
licensee obtain the Commission's consent after consideration of the request by the Commission,
PROVIDED that the licensee makes available to the Commission all relevant documents and
information that will enable it reach a reasonable decision.

Page 25 of 282 
Chapter 2: Transmission Substations
2.1 Overview
These standards outline the Standard Technical Requirements for the construction of civil works and
buildings for the 330/132/33 kV Transmission and Sub-transmission Substations of the National Grid
of Nigeria.

a. All structures, buildings, foundations and layout shall be designed and developed in
accordance with the operational and technical functional requirements of the line and sub-
station facilities.
b. All design and construction including all materials, testing and other procedures shall be
undertaken in accordance with Nigerian Electricity Supply Industry Standards regulation.
c. All aspects of the civil works shall be designed to provide a low maintenance durable end
product suitable for the purpose intended. Particular emphasis shall be placed on security of
the site. Design life for structural elements shall be a minimum of 50 years.
d. The design of buildings and structures shall be in accordance with the requirements of the
Nigerian Building Code (NBC), and shall be carried out in such a manner to ensure that
construction, maintenance and demolition are carried out in a safe manner.
e. Structures shall be designed and built to an approved standard and finishing shall be
aesthetically acceptable.
f. The design of the civil works and the specification of civil materials shall take into account the
environmental impact of all elements. At all times, ’environmentally friendly’ materials shall be
incorporated into the works.
g. There shall be adequate provision made to prevent and limit fire damage including properly
designed and constructed firewalls between Power Transformers. This shall be in accordance
with NERC Health and Safety Code.
h. This regulation shall also be used as a guide for clearances around switchgear and other
equipment. Power and control cables shall be routed and/or segregated such that minimal loss
of control or supplies occurs in the event of fire or damage.
i. If any object of archaeological value is found during excavation the contractor or any third
party shall report to the relevant agency.
j. This regulation shall be read in conjunction with other relevant Regulations and Codes of
Practice published by NERC.
k. In case, there are discrepancies between the requirements stipulated herein and the other
Regulations and Codes of Practice, this regulation shall prevail.
l. The requirements in this standard may be reviewed as new equipment become available, new
technologies being developed or because of new requirements.

2.2 Civil Works

All civil works including layouts, structures, buildings, foundations, drainages and roads
shall be designed and developed to provide a completely functional installation to meet
technical parameters of these standards given in the following clauses:
i. Earth works to make the substation land suitable for installation of supporting
structures and equipment, for erection of control building and related dependencies,

Page 26 of 282 
 with drainage to evacuate water in all conditions and of sufficient size to allow access
to maintenance equip ment and gravelling of switchyard surface.
ii. Fences along the perimeter of the substation for security of the installation, foundations
for equipment pedestals, bus supports and gantry structures for incoming lines and
strain buses.
iii. Concrete cable trenches and imbedded ducts with pulling boxes and cable pits.
iv. Access roads and switchyard maintenance roads, drainage network made of perimeter
trenches, switchyard internal sub soil drainage trenches or pipes.
v. Power transformers and reactors oil containment basin with oil/water separator.
vi. Substation Control building, with sanitary and water supply installations.
vii. Other related works to make a complete installation as may be required.

a. Substation construction project procedure shall include all site data gathering, analysis and
engineering design necessary for the construction namely:
i. Topographical survey
ii. Geotechnical soil investigation
iii. General location drawing with reference coordinates and surrounding
iv. Drawings of earthworks
v. Drainage system with construction details
vi. Access road drawings
vii. Foundation layout drawings with detailed design of each foundation including
calculation brief and bill of armour rods.
viii. Cable trenches layout and details
ix. Fences and access gate
x. Concrete retaining wall with calculation brief and bill of armour rods
xi. Comprehensive architectural drawings of each building and dependency showing
layout, side view, finishing materials, list of main components, sanitary accessories and
carpentry.
xii. Building structure drawings with calculation brief and bill of armour rods
xiii. Building electrical distribution diagram with bill of materials
xiv. Sewage system with piping, septic tank, filtration pit, drainage.
b. Every project, be it a replacement, upgrade or new building, the ground shall be levelled to
provide a flat and stable surface for the foundations.
c. The building shall be made in such a way to withstand prevailing environmental situation.
d. For sites that are exposed to pollution, for example in heavily industrialized areas or exposed
to salt pollution, there shall be a building to install sensitive equipment.
e. Excavation for foundations shall be made and steel reinforcement or piles installed where
necessary, before casting of concrete. This forms the platform on which the equipment shall
be supported or building in which the equipment shall be housed.
f. All brickwork and block work shall be of an approved standard. Internal walls shall be
constructed to give a durable, low maintenance, dust free finish and shall be painted with
smooth masonry paint. The final coat of paint is to be applied after installation of electrical
equipment.
g. All brickwork and block work shall be laid in mortar of appropriate strength for the location and
exposure of the wall, and solid walls of one brick thickness or greater to be cross bonded or
tied together with stainless steel reinforcement or ties.

Page 27 of 282 
 h. Where expansion or contraction joints are incorporated, they shall be constructed with
approved joint filler and finished with appropriate sealant.
i. The building shall be designed to be as ‘energy efficient’ as possible while accommodating the
various cables entries required.
j. Windows shall be provided for daylight conditions or ventilation in substation building and
adequate mechanical ventilation shall be considered according to extant Building Regulations.
k. Emergency exit shall be provided.
l. Substations and switch stations shall preferably be erected above ground but where
necessarily constructed underground there shall be due provision for ventilation and drainage.

2.2.1 Civil Design

a. Site location plan shall indicate the whole of the site and surrounding landscape.

b. General arrangement drawing shall include floor layout and indicating clearances
between and around equipment, plant ingress/egress, emergency egress, fire
segregation, cable entry and outgoing services, elevations, including doors and
natural ventilation.

c. Pedestrian safety barriers shall be provided where the site layout is such that
emergency egress from the substation is towards a vehicular traffic route, and that
these barriers shall be required to be demountable if this were also a plant access
route for the substation.

d. Foundations shall be classified in terms of shallow and deep elements and retaining
structures that distribute loads from structures to the underlying soil.

e. Foundations shall be designed to maintain soil pressures at all depths within the
allowable bearing capacity of the soil and also must limit total and differential
movements to within levels that can be tolerated by the structure.

f. Vehicular crash barrier protection shall be required external to the substation where
the site layout is such that there is a risk of impact from vehicular traffic.

g. Substation design shall be such that sprinkler systems, gas, water, drainage or
other third party service pipes, cables or heating and ventilation ducts are detailed
within, through or under substations.

h. The design and construction shall be robust such that minimum time before
maintenance is reasonably long.

i. General functional requirements such as suitable access for and cover to high and
low voltage cables, security, unauthorized entry including sealed cable entries to
substations containing Indoor Equipment shall be met to prevent below
the ground ingress of moisture, gas and vermin.,

Page 28 of 282 
 j. Structural steelwork shall be hot dipped galvanized, including members, internal to
substation enclosures.

2.2.2 Site Preparation

a. The necessary earth cutting, filling (spreading), levelling, compaction and dressing
to reach the desired formation level, backfilled earth shall be free from harmful salts;
that is, Sulphates, Chlorides and any Organic or Inorganic materials and compacted
to a level in accordance with the provision of the Nigerian Building Code.

b. In ensuring that a safe and hazard free high earth resistivity working area
(switchyard) is observed in surfacing, and growth of weeds and grass within the
working area is prevented, the following shall be duly observed:

i. Restricted distance beyond the last structure and/or equipment

foundation.
ii. Thickness of base layer of lean concrete shall conform to the
requirements of geological survey specifications.

c. Formation Level (FL) of substations shall be fixed minimum 600 mm distance higher
than the surroundings on the basis of the drainage conditions and the Highest Flood
Level in the area.

2.2.2.1 Earth Works

a. All foundations shall be set on undisturbed inorganic strata that provide the required
minimum design safe ground bearing capacity.

b. The bottom of excavated areas shall be trimmed, levelled or graded and well
rammed or otherwise compacted.

c. The construction sequence shall be such that undue exposure of the formation level
to excavations is avoided.

d. Excavations shall be kept free from all water from whatever source, and reinforced
concrete foundations shall incorporate a minimum 50 mm thick layer of blinding
concrete.

2.2.2.2 Access Road

a. All plant and equipment shall be provided with sufficient free space to permit safe
operation and maintenance.
b. Access to plant and apparatus shall be adequate for operational and maintenance
purposes and provision shall be made for escape in the event of fire, and the
escape route shall be designed to be clear of any obstructions.

c. Passageways and the minimum spacing between equipment shall be provided in

accordance with the provisions of relevant safety codes, where as provision shall be

Page 29 of 282 
 made for entry of power, multicore, telephone and pilot cables, water supply and
foul drainage pipes.

d. Sufficient width and depth shall be available for the cable routes such that de-rating
of the cables is kept to a minimum.
e. Ducts from buildings shall normally extend a minimum distance of 500mm from the
external face of the building, but if the access road is immediately adjacent to the
building, then the ducts shall be continued beneath the access road to facilitate
cable installation.

2.2.3 Property Blockwall Fencing

The substation shall be fenced to protect the substation personnel and substation
equipment. Access and locking shall be in accordance with NBC standards. The
following clauses shall apply:

a. Outdoor substations and outdoor switch stations (unless the apparatus is

completely enclosed in a metal casing connected with earth, the said apparatus
also being connected with the system by suitable electric cables) shall be efficiently
protected by fencing not less than 2.5 m in height or other means so as to prevent
access to the electric lines and apparatus therein by any unauthorized person. The
said fencing, if of metal shall be earthed separately from the sub- station earth. All
metallic gates shall be effectively bonded to the fencing;
b. The wall of the substation shall be labelled with an appropriate danger notice, with
the name of the licensee and with the address, and telephone number, of their local
office at which an officer or servant of the licensee will be in attendance:
c. Any metal work accessible from the ground level which normally has to be handled
when the line is alive, (i.e. a switch operating handle), shall be connected to an
earth mat, so situated as to include within its area the whole of the ground on which
the operator would normally stand;
d. Suitable provision shall be made, either by connecting with earth a point of the
system at the lower voltage or otherwise, to guard against danger by reason of the
said system becoming accidentally charged above its normal voltage by leakage
from or contact with the system at the higher voltage.
e. Outdoor substations and outdoor switch stations shall (unless the apparatus is
completely enclosed in a metal casing connected with earth, the said apparatus
also being connected with the system by suitable electric cable) be enclosed within
chain link or woven wire or mild steel unclimbable fencing manufactured in strict
conformity with the appropriate part of the relevant Nigerian Standard not less than
2.5 m in height so as to prevent access to the electric lines and apparatus therein
by any unauthorized person.
In addition to the requirements above for positioning the fence with regard to touch
potential and access and maintenance requirements, the security of the site shall be
considered when designing the layout. The compound fence shall be inset from the
boundary of the site by a minimum distance of 2 m gap to prevent encroachment.

Page 30 of 282 
 2.2.3.1 Chainlink Fencing with Gates (Vehicular/Pedestrian) shall be provided to protect the
Switchyard from intruders within the block wall fencing of the Property

2.2.4 Substation Control Building

Substation control building shall consist of the following:

a. Control/relay room
b. 110V battery room
c. Telecommunication room
d. 50V battery room (communication)
e. Store room
f. Personnel office
g. Conference room (For a 330kV substation)
h. Toilet/bathroom
i. Kitchenette
 

2.2.4.1 Control/ Relay Room

a. The exact layout of the building shall depend on site requirements, including an
assessment of security issues.

a. All rooms shall be appropriately segregated to meet fire protection requirements.

b. Separate external access shall normally be provided to each individual room; and
there shall be no direct connecting doors between rooms. For larger sites the use of
a central ‘lobby’ shall be utilised.

c. On smaller sites the requirements shall be a compact building layout with switch
room, control room, battery, store and rest room. The sites with space restrictions,
other optional layouts approved by NERC shall be adopted.

d. On larger sites with several rooms the provision of a central lobby shall be
considered giving access to control and switch rooms. There shall still be
segregation between rooms with separate entrances from the lobby area, all fitted
with suitable fire doors. If convenient the rest room and kitchenette (where
provided) can also be accessed from the lobby.

2.2.4.2 Control Room

a. The control room shall be designed to accommodate the following equipment as a
minimum:

i. Transformer relay and AVC panels (including space for future units where
appropriate)

ii. Telecontrol panel and outstation

iii. Mimic board (Human Machine Interface)

Page 31 of 282 
 iv. Substation battery

v. Telecontrol battery

vi. Switchgear local control panel

vii. Feeder and bus section relay panels as required

viii. LVAC board

ix. Intruder alarm panel

x. Telephone

xi. Drawer filing cabinet

xii. Safety notice board

xiii. Key cabinet / key safe

xiv. Fire point with extinguishers

xv. Door mat – recessed type for ‘computer’ floors, otherwise standard surface mat with
non-slip backing.

b. Equipment shall be positioned so that there is adequate clearance for installation,

inspection, maintenance and future replacement. Specific minimum distances are
required to the front and rear of control and relay panels,

c. The height of the control room shall usually be the same as the adjacent
switchroom, but as a minimum there shall be 1000mm clearance above the relay /
control panels.

d. Suitable provision shall be made for personnel and equipment access and exit.
Usually one door shall be suitable for all requirements but on some larger sites two
doors may be required. The control room access door must be clearly marked, as
this shall be the normal substation building entry point providing access to the
intruder alarm panel.

e. Floors of control rooms shall be of reinforced concrete, or removable floor panels

supported on pedestals on a concrete sub-floor. Floor panels are to have an
antistatic sheet vinyl finish. A suitable skirting shall be provided around the room
perimeter. Concrete floors are to be finished as stated above.

2.2.5 Equipment Plinth

a. Every foundation preparation shall include an evaluation of soil characteristics and

concrete work.
b. (The foundation shall be constructed of reinforced, air-entrained concrete thick with
chamfered edges on top of the base and footings. In addition, to avoid problems, a

Page 32 of 282 
 civil engineer shall be consulted for guidance on the above matters.) to be
considered.
c. In seismic areas, the stability of the unit with respect to turning over shall be
evaluated, whether placed outside or in a building. Also refer to paragraph 4 & 5 in
civil design subsection above

2.2.6 Water Supply, Sewage & Drainage System

Water Supply & Sewage: Water supply & sewage system shall be designed to meet the
total water requirement of the substations, facilities and emergency reserve for
complete performance of the works. The design and construction of septic tanks and
soak away pits shall have a minimum volume of 6 m3.

2.2.7 Drainage
Where a substation or switch station is situated in any building so that a fire in the
substation or switch station might involve risk to the said building and the said sub-
station or switch station contains oil-immersed transformers or switches involving the
use of oil in a tank receptacle or chamber, provision shall be made for the draining
away or removal of any oil which may leak or escape from the tanks, receptacles or
chambers containing the same; special precautions shall be taken to prevent the
spread of any fire resulting from the ignition of the oil from any cause; and adequate
provision shall be made for the extinguishing of any fire which may occur.

2.2.7.1 Design of Drainage:

For the design of drainage, the rainfall data shall be obtained and the storm water
drainage system including culvert, drains, and slope to accommodate the most intense
rainfall that is likely to occur over the catchment area in one hour period on an average
of once per 10 years.

2.2.7.2 Slope of Drainage System:

a. Invert level of drainage system at outfall point shall be decided in such a way that
any water over flow from water harvesting recharge shafts can easily be discharged
outside the substation boundary wall. For easy drainage of water, minimum slope of
1:1000 shall be provided from the ridge to the nearest drain. The above slope shall
be provided at the top of base layer of cement concrete. The following minimum
slopes & design parameters for drains shall be met:

i. Switchyard shall be sloped to prevent pounding of water and no area left un-
drained;
ii. Pipe drains shall be constructed on both sides of roads and open
trapezoidal drains along switchyard and as per requirement in other areas;
iii. Maximum spacing between two drains shall be less than 100 meter within
the switchyard;

Page 33 of 282 
 iv. Open trapezoidal drains shall have 300 mm bottom width and sides slope of
1:1.5;
v. Longitudinal slope shall range from 1:1000 to 1:2000 depending upon
expected discharge;
vi. Side wall(s) of the drains shall be 25mm above the gravel level & covered
with CI grating;
vii. RCC pipe of class NP-3 (80 mm – 2600 mm) shall be used in normal pipe
drains;
viii. RCC pressure pipe of class NP-4 (80 mm – 2600 mm) shall be used in
culverts where heavy vehicle movement is expected;
ix. Pipe drains shall be connected through manholes within intervals of
maximum 30 m;

2.2.8 Cable Trench

Cable trenches within enclosures housing Indoor Equipment shall have continuous
reinforced concrete bottoms and reinforced concrete or filled masonry sides.

2.2.9 Gravelling

Gravel spreading shall be done in areas presently in the scope of the scheme. No
stone spreading shall be done in the areas kept for future expansion (bays). To hold the
stone (gravel) from spreading out of the gravel filled area, a 115 mm thick and 300 mm
deep toe wall 25 mm above top of gravel shall be provided. All visible portions of toe-
wall shall be plastered and cement painted.

Gravel of size 19 mm to 22 mm shall be used.

2.2.10 Landscaping
a. Any landscaping treatment around substations shall be carefully designed so as not
to create potential security problems.

b. Landscaping should be maintained to ensure perpetuation of design integrity and

intent.

c. Successful accomplishment of this adequate landscaping shall be enhanced by the

following;

i. Watering;
ii. Fertilization;
iii. Approved chemical application;
iv. Pruning and vegetation control;
v. Lawn maintenance;
vi. Plant replacement as needed.

Page 34 of 282 
2.3 Electromechanical Works
2.3.1 Substation Design
a. This section details the general principles to be applied to the design of
Transmission substations, including indoor and outdoor substations.

b. For substations situated in a special environment, special designs for the substation
shall be adopted subject to the approval of the Commission.

c. Transmission substations shall be designed to the same standard, and fully comply
with statutory requirements of NERC and SON.

d. Transmission substations shall be planned having in mind the future loading and
development of the area.

e. Many of the requirements shall be associated with the safety of the operational
personnel, the public and the equipment. Priority shall be given to safety, the
maximum number and type of plant to be accommodated, and personnel access
and equipment access (including power cables).

2.3.2 Equipment Layout

a. Substation equipment layout plans shall be submitted for the approval of the
relevant authority.

b. Standard (or typical) substation site or layout plans submitted shall be approved by
the Surveyor General or the relevant Authority.

c. Equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

2.3.3 Bus bar Arrangement

a. Support structure for plant and equipment including bus bars shall be constructed
from galvanized steel, reinforced concrete or aluminium. Structures shall be
designed to accommodate all normal vertical and horizontal loads plus additional
loadings associated with wind and electrical fault conditions.

b. Different types of busbar arrangements to be employed shall be based on the

voltage, reliability of the supply, flexibility in transmitting power and cost.

S/N Bus Description Switching Scheme

1. 132kV Double bus scheme or double main
and transfer bus scheme

2. 330kV Breaker and a half scheme

c. The other factors to be considered in designing the busbars arrangements shall

include:
i. Simplicity in the design
ii. Maintenance of different elements without interruption in the power supply
iii. Future expansion feasibility

Page 35 of 282 
 iv. Economical in cost of installation and operation
The minimum bus-bar capacity (ampacity) for 330 kV & 132 kV sides shall be 4000 and
3000 Amps respectively.

2.3.4 Major Transmission Equipment

2.3.4.1 Transformers
a. Power Transformers:
i. 330 / 132 kV Transformers shall be 2-winding or auto-transformers of rating
90 - 300 MVA with 33 kV tertiary winding of 22.5 -75 MVA active capacity
and On Load Tap Changer (OLTC) with + 4x1.25%/ -12x1.25% range.
Vector group shall be YNy0d11 in the case of 2-winding transformers,
YNynd1 and

ii. 132 kV / 33 kV Transformers shall be transformers of rating 30 MVA and

above with On Load Tap Changer (OLTC) with +4x1.25/ -12x1.25% range.
Vector group shall be YNd11.
.
b. Transformers to be used in the transmission network shall have maximum loss
profile as detailed in the table below:

S. N Description No Load Load Auxiliary Total

losses (KW) losses losses (KW) Losses
(KW) (KW)
1 330/132KV, 86 482 16 584
300MVA
2 330/132KV, 43 241 10 586
150MVA
3 330/132KV, 28 233 11 272
100MVA
4 330/132KV, 28 233 11 272
90MVA
5 132/33KV,
60MVA
6 132/33KV,
30MVA

a. When planning, a location shall be selected to comply with all relevant safety codes
such that there shall be no interference with the normal movement of personnel,
equipment, and material. The location shall not expose the transformer to possible
damage from cranes, trucks, or moving equipment. Other site considerations shall
require closer analysis.
b. The following hereunder, shall be observed to ensure that transformer produces a
the lowest possible sound level in line with the provisions of NERC Health & Safety
Code on noise level:
i. Connections to primary and secondary terminals made with flexible
connectors,
ii. All transit bolts and shipping braces are loosened so the unit shall float on
rubber isolation pads,
iii. All enclosure hardware is tightened so panels do not vibrate.

Page 36 of 282 
 c. Transformers shall be adequately grounded. Grounding is necessary to remove
static charges that may accumulate and also is needed as a protection should the
transformer windings accidentally come in contact with the core or enclosure (or
tank for wet types).
d. All grounding or bonding systems shall meet the provisions of relevant codes and
standards.
e. The power transformer and any supporting structures shall be adequately packaged
and sealed against water ingress.
f. The power transformer shall conform in all respect to highest standards of
engineering design, workmanship and latest revision of IEC 60076, and
workmanship, maintainability standards relevant to the areas listed below:
S/No.g. Subject Standard
i. Power transformers – IEC 60076 – 1
Part 1: General
ii. Power transformers – IEC 60076 – 2
Part 2: Temperature rise for liquid-immersed transformers
iii. Power transformers – IEC 60076 – 3
Part 3:
Insulation levels, dielectric tests and external clearances in air
iv. Power transformers – IEC 60076 – 4
Part 4:
Guide to the lightning impulse and
switching impulse testing –
Power transformers and reactors
v. Power transformers – IEC 69976 – 5
Part 5:
Ability to withstand short circuit
vi. Power transformers – IEC 60076 – 6
Part 6: Reactors
vii. Power transformers – IEC 60076 – 7
Part 7: Loading guide for oil-immersed power transformers

viii. Power transformers – IEC 60076 – 8

Application guide
ix. Power transformers – IEC 60076 – 10
Part 10-1:
Determination of sound levels –
Application guide
x. Power transformers – IEC 60076 – 13
Part 13:
Self-protected liquid-filled transformers
xi. Power transformers – IEC 60076 – 14
Part 14: Design and application of liquid-immersed power
transformers using
high-temperature insulation materials

h. The power transformer may be overloaded during emergency up to 150% of its

continuous rating in accordance with IEC 60076-1
i. The power transformer tap changer (on-load) shall be suitable to compensate for
system voltage variation of ±5% maintaining at nominal tap position 330/132/33kV
voltage ratio
j. Vector group of the three-winding power transformer shall be YN,a0,d11 in
accordance with IEC 60076 – 1, for two- winding power transformers, the vector
shall be YNd11 and YNd1
k. The design of the power transformer shall take into consideration the suppression
of odd harmonic voltages especially the 3rd, 5th and 7th harmonics.
Page 37 of 282 
 l. The power transformer core shall be constructed using high grade, non-ageing, cold
rolled grain oriented silicon steel laminations or superior material.

2.3.4.1.1 Mobile Transformers

Subject to relevant parts of 2.3.4.1.1, mobile transformers must conform to the

provisions of IEC 60076 and shall carry their own auxiliary equipment.

2.3.4.1.2 Earthing Transformers/Reactors

The 33 kV earthing reactor will be used in conjunction with the 132/33 kV power
transformer dedicated to the Supply of distribution feeders. The earthing reactor will
provide grounding and earth current return to the 33 kV network. The 33 kV earthing
transformer will be used in conjunction with the 330/132/33 kV autotransformers to
supply the substation auxiliary services loads from the tertiary winding.

2.3.4.1.3 Capacitive Voltage Transformers (CVTs)

Capacitor Voltage Transformers (CVTs) used for instrumentation and protection of

power system equipment shall conform to the following Standards: NIS/ IEC60186,
60694 and 60947-1.

The number of secondary cores (protection or metering), accuracy class and burden
shall be in accordance with the requirements of the protection system. The accuracy
class for metering core shall be equal to or better than the accuracy class of the meter
specified in the Metering Code

2.3.4.1.4 Current Transformers (CTs)

Current Transformers used for instrumentation and protection of power system

equipment shall conform to the following Standards: NIS/IEC60186, 60694 and 60947-
1. 

The rated currents and ratios, the number of secondary cores (protection or metering),
accuracy class, burden, secondary winding resistance, knee point voltage and
excitation current shall be in accordance with the requirements of the protection
system. The accuracy class for metering core shall be equal to or better than the
accuracy class of the meter specified in the Metering Code

2.3.4.1.5 Station Service Transformers

The 33 kV substation service transformers will be supplying the substation auxiliary

services loads from the main substation 33 kV bus bar where available. In substations
without 33kV busbar other means of supplying the auxiliary station loads shall be used.
This includes, not restricted to earthing transformers.

Page 38 of 282 
2.3.4.1.6 Combined CTs and VTs

Combined CTs and VTs shall be deployed where there is constraint of space and shall
conform to the applicable standards for Current and Voltage Transformers.

2.3.4.2 Switch Gears

2.3.4.2.1 Circuit Breakers:

Interrupting medium of circuit breakers shall be SF6. Circuit breakers of 132KV and 330
kV voltage class shall be suitable both for single phase and three phases auto-
reclosing. Each circuit breaker shall be provided with 2 nos. of trip coils. Two sets of trip
circuits shall be connected to separate fuse or MCB controlled DC supplies for greater
reliability. The circuit breaker shall have the provision for local manual trip, which shall
be at a position easily accessible to the operating person. Maximum rated break time in
ms for circuit breakers shall be as given below:

Circuit Breaker Breaking Time in ms

S/N
1 330kV 132kV
2 40 100

The circuit breaker specifications shall be in accordance with the following IEC60056,
60947-1, 60694, and 60815.

2.3.4.2.2 Disconnectors /Grounding Switches

Disconnect switches shall be provided as visible means of isolation. Disconnectors for 132 kV
and 330 kV rating shall have provision for remote and manual operation. Earthing switches
shall be provided at appropriate locations to facilitate earthing of outgoing Transmission lines
to enable maintenance. Main blades and earth blades shall be interlocked with both electrical
and mechanical means, which shall be fail-safe. Earthing switches shall be suitable for induced
current switching duty as per relevant standard. Earthing switches shall be suitable for
electrical and manual operation. Only local operation is recommended for earth switches.

2.3.4.2.3 Lightning Arresters

a. Every electric equipment or any support exposed to liability or injury from lightning
shall be effectively protected against such liability by lightning or surge arresters.
b. These shall be fitted with pressure relief devices and diverting ports suitable for
preventing shattering of porcelain housing providing path for the flow of rated
currents in the event of failure of surge arrester. A leakage current monitor with
surge counter shall be provided with each lightning arrester.

All such Surge Arresters to be deployed in the NESI shall comply with the provisions of
IEC 60099-4 on Surge Arresters. The design and dimensioning of the surge arresters
shall take cognisance of the energization of the different lines as well as the lightning
protection of the substation equipment.

2.3.4.3 Reactors

Page 39 of 282 
2.3.4.3.1 Shunt Reactors
Any shunt reactor to be deployed in the NESI shall comply with the following standards:
IEC 60296, 60044, 60273, 60282-2, 60289, 60529 and 60947. 

2.3.4.3.2 Reactive Power Compensators

A Reactive Power Compensator if required shall be deployed to improve transmission
capacity and system stability. It shall be designed, installed and commissioned in
conformity with IEEE Standard 1031 - 2011. When installing Reactive Power
Compensators, they shall be typically placed near high and rapidly varying loads.

2.3.5 Secondary Equipment

2.3.5.1 Interposing Current Transformers

All differential protection schemes shall be stabilized against all through faults and all
external earth fault currents that return through the neutral of the transformer within the
differential zone, and the accuracy class index shall match the instrument safety factor
(ISF) of any instrument to be connected to it.

2.3.5.2 Relays
The relays to be selected shall take into consideration the expected types of failure that
will be experienced and the characteristics of the failure; with the ultimate aim of
causing the defective apparatus or lines to be disconnected and minimize damage and
maintain service continuity to the rest of the system in accordance with IEC Standard
60255

2.3.5.2.1 Distance Protection Relays

All transmission lines from 132 kV upwards shall be protected with Distance Protection
Relays as the Main/Primary protection. Any line of voltage up to 330 kV shall be
protected with double Main/Primary protection schemes and the applicable protective
relays shall be of different makes. Where they are of the same make, they shall be of
different models and must comply with IEC standards. IEC 60255

2.3.5.2.2 Differential Relays

Differential protection schemes, as a fast unit protection shall be applicable as the Main
protection for:

i. Power transformers of 15MVA and above

ii. Short Transmission lines
iii. Bus Bars

All differential relays for these applications shall comply with IEC 60076

2.3.5.2.3 Over Current Relays

All substation equipment shall be protected against excessive current resulting from
short circuit or earth fault by application of overcurrent relay. And the relay shall be
configured to automatically isolate the faulty equipment as back up protection for lines
and transformer.
Page 40 of 282 

 

2.3.5.2.4 Earth Fault Relay

All substation equipment shall be protected by earth leakage current relay. The relay
shall be set such that it is not responsive to minor out of balance current in the phases
as back up protection for lines and transformer.

2.3.5.3 Control Panels

Control panels, including the frames to which they are attached, shall be made of
fireproof material. All types of boxes, cabinets etc. shall generally conform to & be
tested in accordance with IEC-60439, as applicable. All Control cabinets, junction
boxes, Marshalling boxes & terminal boxes shall be dust, water & vermin proof
a. No live conductor shall be exposed on the front of any control panel and the back of
any control panel of which bare live metal is mounted shall be made inaccessible
(except to authorized persons) by means of earthed screens or otherwise.
b. Every door leading to the back of a control panel shall be provided with a spring or
other approved device which shall ensure that the door remains open upon when
not properly shut or locked.
c. An appropriately rated insulating mat or insulating stand shall be provided for the
protection of operators in front of control panels of every control room and
substation. A similar arrangement shall also be provided in the screened-in space at
the rear of every control room and substation control panel (not being of the totally
enclosed iron-clad cubicle type).
d. All panels shall have marked thereon, near each switch, the name of the feeder
controlled by such switch.
e. All control room and substation control panels shall be provided with at least two
different and independent earth connections, connected in parallel, to which all
metal frames, all metal instrument cases (unless otherwise protected) and other
metal parts thereof shall be connected. Means shall be provided to test the earth
electrode resistance of these earth connections individually.
f. The terminal blocks shall be of extendable design, 650 V category, rated to carry
the maximum expected current on the terminals continuously, provided with test
links and isolating facilities wherever required and suitable for connecting the
designed size of conductors on each side
g. Control and instrument leads from the switchboards or from other equipment will be
brought to terminal boxes or control cabinets in conduits. All inter phase and
external connections to equipment or to control cubicles will be made through
terminal blocks having a locking characteristic to prevent cable from escaping from
the terminal clamp unless it is done intentionally.

2.3.5.4 Protection Panel

The fabricated protection panel shall be of adequate dimensions (height, width, and
depth) to conveniently house all protective relays and auxiliary protective devices with
sufficient working space.

Suitable provision shall be made, either by connecting with earth a point of the system
at the lower voltage or otherwise, to guard against danger by reason of the said system

Page 41 of 282 
 becoming accidentally charged above its normal voltage by leakage from or contact
with the system at the higher voltage.

2.3.5.5 Substation Automation and Protection

2.3.5.5.1 General Control Scheme

a. The Substation Automation System (SAS) shall be installed to control and monitor
all the sub-station equipment from remote control centre (RCC) as well as from
local control centre.
i. The SAS shall contain at least the following main functional parts: • Bay
control Intelligence Electronic Devices (IEDs) for control and monitoring. •
Station Human Machine Interface (HMI) • Redundant managed switched
Ethernet • Local Area Network communication infrastructure with hot
standby. • Peripheral equipment like printers, display units, key boards,
Mouse etc.
ii. The SAS shall enable local station control via PC by means of HMI and
control software package, which shall contain an extensive range of SCADA
functions.
iii. The SAS shall include communication gateway, intelligent electronic devices
(IED) for bay control and inter IED communication infrastructure. The
communication gateway shall facilitate the information flow with remote
control centers. The bay level intelligent electronic devices (IED) for
protection and control shall provide the direct connection to the switchgear
without the need of interposing components and perform control, protection,
and monitoring functions.
h. All bay control units shall be connected via fibre optical cable (FOC) with SCU and
the gateway computers, communicating with the latest IEC protocol. For the overall
interlocking within the substation, the BCUs shall communicate with each other and
shall be realised on software bases within the bay control units.
i. The control hierarchy shall consist of the following levels. Provision has to be made
that if one control level is selected all other levels are blocked (priority 4-3-2-1):
i. Level 1: System control from Load Dispatch Centre (LDC)
ii. Level 2: Station control at operator’s console via Station Control Unit
(SCU)
iii. Level 3: Bay control with Bay Control Units (BCU)
iv. Level 4: From the switchgear mechanism box (emergency control).
j. Numerical protection relays utilising microprocessor technology including
measurement processing shall be used for all kind of Main 1 and Main 2 Protection
Systems.
k. All control and protection devices shall be designed to withstand the impulse
voltage and high frequency interference test requirements as specified in IEC
Publication 60255-5 and 60255-4.
l. The detailed application of these secondary equipment are as contained in the
Principle of Protection in chapter 8 of his regulation.

2.3.5.5.2 Protection

Page 42 of 282 
 a. All transformers above 7.5MVA shall be protected by main and back up protection
comprising Bucholz, differential, Restricted Earth fault, overcurrent and standby
earth fault. The tripping contact must be wired to operate the tripping coil of the
primary and secondary circuit breakers fitted adjacent to the transformers.
b. Means shall be provided at the origination of every main circuit to automatically cut
off the supply of energy in the event of-
i. The passage of a current of such magnitude and duration as would be
liable to damage the substation transformer, switchgears or its
associated lines, joints and fittings:
ii. Leakage, of current to earth in excess of the amount permitted by these
regulations.
c. The means provided in compliance with paragraph (1) of this regulation shall be
circuit breakers with appropriate nominal voltage and breaking current ratings
constructed and installed in conformity with the NIS/IEC as shall be capable of
interrupting, without damage to the equipment or danger to the operator.
d. Means shall be provided to isolate the substation equipment from system short-
circuit currents or fault currents likely to be handled under conditions of use to which
they are subjected; and further shall similarly withstand, without damage to the
equipment or danger to the operator, the currents flowing if closure is made on to a
line that is, Switch-On-to- fault (SOT) or circuit which is short circuited.
e. Every Circuit Breaker shall be provided with means to show its status (closed,
open) and the same indication shall be duplicated remotely on the control panel. All
Circuit breaker should be provided with two (2) numbers disconnector switch so that
it can be locked in the "OFF” position to prevent unauthorized interference. During
the time that the device is locked in the "OFF” position the relevant keys for the lock
shall be kept in safe custody in the manner prescribed in the Grid code.
f. The clauses above shall be read in conjunction with the Principles of Protection
contained in Chapter 8.

2.3.5.6 Substation Standby Generator(s) and Mobile Generator sockets

a. All transmission substations shall be provided with standby generators and mobile
generator sockets to provide auxiliary power supply.
b. There shall be adequate interlock and protection on the auxiliary supplies to the
station

2.3.5.7 Battery Banks and Battery Chargers

a. Whenever an apparatus is supplied from secondary batteries, the work of
connecting such apparatus to such batteries shall be done in accordance with the
provisions of this standard.
b. Every battery shall be so arranged that a potential difference exceeding fifty Volts
does not exist between adjacent cells without adequate protections against
electrical hazard, and that each cell shall be readily accessible from the top and
from at least one side.
c. In a lead-sulphuric-acid battery having more than thirty-three cells, and in nickel-iron
alkaline battery having more than fifty-three cells, shall be supported on glass or
vitreous porcelain insulators. Where a battery comprises more than fifty-six lead-

Page 43 of 282 
 sulphuric-acid cells or eight nickel-iron alkaline cells the stands also shall be
insulated.
d. Suitable means shall be provided for controlling the current with which battery is
being charged. Such means shall comprise, as a minimum, an automatic cut-in and
cut-out, or alternatively, a circuit breaker with overload and reverse-current trips.
e. Ventilation system forced or natural shall be maintained to prevent build up of
explosive mixtures. In which case, an alarm system shall be provided against
excess gas accumulation.
f. Eye and body wash apparatus shall be maintained in operable condition.

2.3.5.8 Communication Equipment

Communication equipment shall be provided within the substation and between the
control room and control centers, to adequately take care of the following: -

a. Voice telephony for operational purposes

b. Data- SCADA for operational purposes
c. Protection:
i. Signalling (over-reach, under reach, blocking, inter-tripping)
ii. Functionality – currently differential

2.3.5.6.1 Power Line Carriers (PLC)

When building a transmission substation, communication facilities such as line
matching unit (LMU), capacitor voltage transformer (CVT), Wave Traps) shall be
provided.

The strappings inside the LMU/ LMDU must be connected in the required manner so as
to match with impedance of the coaxial cable (75Ω /125Ω as the case may be).

2.3.5.6.4 Communication Towers and Antennas

Communication towers shall be made self-supporting not to interfere with substation
conducting equipment/installations. Specification for communication towers shall
conform to the provisions of the Nigerian Communication Commission (NCC)
regulations.

2.3.5.6.5 Telephone Exchange

Design, construction and installation shall conform to NIS/IEC on telephone exchange.

2.4 SCADA System and Installation

2.4.1 SCADA Control Room

SCADA Control Room shall be constructed in accordance with NIS/IEC 61850
standard.

Page 44 of 282 
 2.4.2 Remote Terminal Unit (RTUs)
Remote Terminal Unit (RTU), Phase Monitoring Unit (PMU) and Load Dispatch Centre
shall comply with NIS/IEC standard.

2.4.3 Communications
Communication between Intelligent Electronic Devices (IED) shall be in accordance
with IEC 61850 and Communication between Substation Automation System (SAS)
and power plant devices shall comply with IEC 60870-104

2.5 Health, Safety and Environment

Substation construction shall comply with the provisions of the NERC Health and
Safety code, NASREA, NEMA and other relevant authorities. Emphasis shall be given
to the following areas:

a. Conveniences and Bathrooms

b. Water Supply
c. Emergency Measures
d. Disposal of Pollutants
e. Switchyard Illumination
f. Electrical Hazards

Page 45 of 282 
Chapter 3: Transmission Lines
 

GENERAL PROVISIONS

The standards as outlined deals with requirements and compulsory procedures and practices
necessary for overhead transmission line construction in Nigeria power sector. It is designed to
meet service reliability, safe operation and maintenance of transmission lines. Such
transmission lines shall be capable of withstanding expected electrical and climatic loads while
maintaining design consistency between strengths of line components. There shall be a written
approval granted by NERC prior to the construction of transmission lines. The transmission line
shall be designed to meet the following fundamental requirements and shall comply with the
provisions of IEC 60826;

i. Ensure reliable and safe power transmission capability

ii. Reduce the probability of uncontrollable propagation of failures (failure containment)
iii. Ensure safe construction and maintenance conditions

3.1 Right‐of‐Way
The Right Of Way (ROW) width required for Overhead power lines of any voltage level shall be as 
indicated in the table below.  

Table 3.1: Right ‐of ‐Way 

Voltage Levels Right of Way in meters

330kV 50

132kV 30

33kV 11

11kV 11

NB: The Right of Way measurement shall be divided equally from the centre of the line on
either side. For safety reasons, no structures shall be built under the Overhead line Right of
Way. Where such structures are built after the construction of the lines, the licensee shall not
be liable.

3.2 Overhead Transmission Conductors

Conductors used for overhead transmission line construction shall be of rounded wire
concentric lay overhead stranded conductor of the form Aluminium Conductor Steel Reinforced

Page 46 of 282 
(ACRS). The properties of the conductor and appropriate cross sectional area suitable for the
designed electrical load shall be as specified in IEC 61089

3.2.1 Properties of Electrical Conductors

 

a. Minimum Tensile Strength:

Overhead transmission conductors – including overhead ground wires but
excluding the case where they are cables – shall be stranded wires with a
tensile strength no less than 10kN.

b. Bare Conductors:
Bare conductors and overhead ground wires (including overhead ground wires
containing optical fibre cables) that are used for transmission lines shall conform
to the following requirements:
i. Properties of Solid Wires
Solid wires (hard-drawn copper wire, hard-drawn aluminium wire, galvanized
steel wire, aluminum alloy wire, etc.) which compose an electrical conductor,
shall have conductivity and tensile strength not lower than the values specified
in the IEC standards (e.g. IEC60028, 60889, 60888, 61232, and 60104).

The tensile strength of hard-drawn copper wires shall conform to Table 3.1.

Table 3.1 
2
Diameter of solid wire (mm) Tensile strength (N/mm )

No less than 0.4 but no more than 12.0 No less than (462 – 10.8d)

D = Diameter of solid wire (mm)

c. Ii Tensile strength of stranded wire

i. Single stranded wire (electrical conductor composed of solid wires of the
same kind): The tensile strength of a single stranded wire shall be the sum
of the tensile strength of the solid wires.
ii. Composed stranded wire with steel solid wire and other solid wires: The
tensile strength of a stranded wire composed of steel solid wires and other
kinds of solid wires shall be the sum of the total tensile strength of non-steel
solid wires and the total tensile strength of steel wires at 1% elongation.
Page 47 of 282 
3.2.2 Load on Overhead Transmission Conductors and Safety Factor
a. Assumed Load and Safety Factor:
Overhead transmission conductors and overhead ground wires (excluding
cables, the same applies hereafter in this section) shall be installed such
that the tension shall allow for a safety factor specified in (ii) below when
they are subjected to the assumed load specified in (i) below at the average
temperature in the area.
i. Assumed Load: The assumed load for the calculation of tension of
overhead transmission conductors and overhead ground wires shall
be the composite load of the vertical loads and the horizontal loads
specified as follows:
 The vertical load shall be the weight of the electrical
conductor.
 The horizontal load shall be the horizontal wind pressure load
of 790N per m2 of vertical projected area of the electrical
conductor.
ii. Safety Factor: A safety factor of no less than 2.5 shall be applied to
the tensile strength (ultimate tensile strength; breaking strength) of
overhead transmission conductors and overhead ground wires.
b. Prevention of Damage due to Slight Wind Oscillation: Overhead
transmission conductors and overhead ground wires shall be installed so as
not to suffer damage from a slight wind oscillation.

3.2.3 Jointing and Branching of Electrical Conductors

a. Jointing of Bare Conductors
Where bare conductors for overhead transmission lines are jointed with each other
or with insulated conductors or cables, they shall conform to the following
requirements:
i. The electric resistance of a joint shall not exceed that of a length of the used
electrical conductor equal to that of the joint.
ii. The tensile strength of the electrical conductors at a joint shall not be reduced
by more than 5%. However, this requirement shall not apply to cases where
jumper conductors are connected and the tension applied to other electrical
conductors is substantially smaller than the strength of the electrical
conductors.

Page 48 of 282 
 iii. The electrical conductors shall be jointed using jointing sleeves and other
tools

iv. Where copper conductors are jointed with aluminium conductors, bi-metal
couplers or bi-metal line tap shall be used so as not to generate
electrochemical corrosion in the joint. 

b. Jointing of Insulated Conductors

Where insulated conductors for overhead transmission conductors are jointed with
each other or with cables, they shall conform to the provisions of the preceding
Paragraph 1. The joint shall be fully covered with material that has the same
insulating effect as the insulated conductor or with a greater effect, except where
the electrical conductors are jointed using a jointing tool that has the same
insulating effect as the insulator of the electrical conductors or with a greater effect. 
i. Jointing of Overhead Conductors: Where overhead transmission conductors
are jointed with each other, they shall conform to items (a) and (d) of
Paragraph 1 of 3.1.3, and a junction box and other tools shall be used.
ii. Jointing of Overhead Ground Wires: Overhead ground wires (including the
distribution conductors of Single Wire Earth Return (SWER) systems installed
at the top of a steel tower) shall be jointed according to the items (a), (b), and
(c) of Paragraph 1 of 3.1.3.
iii. Branching of Overhead Conductors: Overhead transmission
conductors shall be branched at a supporting point of the
electrical conductors except for such cases where the electrical
conductors are installed so that no tension is applied to the
electrical conductors at the branch point.

3.2.4 Aviation Requirements and Warning Signals:

Day and /or night visual aids and markers for denoting transmission lines or structures
as per requirements of Nigerian Airspace Management Authority (NAMA).

3.2 Insulator for Overhead Transmission Lines

3.2.1 Mechanical Strength of Insulators for Overhead Transmission Lines
a. Assumed Load
The assumed loads to be used for calculating the strength of insulator devices for
overhead transmission lines shall conform to the following requirements: 

Page 49 of 282 
 i. Vertical Load: The vertical load shall be the sum of the weight of electrical
conductors, the weight of insulator devices and the vertical component of
force generated by the assumed maximum tension of the electrical
conductors.
ii. Horizontal Transverse Load: The horizontal transverse load shall be the sum
of the wind pressure loads of electrical conductors and insulator devices and
the horizontal component of load generated by the assumed maximum
tension of the electrical conductors. The wind pressure loads shall be
calculated based on the values listed in Table 3.2.

Table 3.2

2
Wind pressure on vertical projected area (N/m )
Subject to wind pressure
Electrical Multiple conductor * 710
conductor Single conductors 790
Insulator device 1100
* This applies only to cases where two compositional conductors are arranged horizontally and the distance
between such electrical conductors is no more than twenty times their outer diameter.

iii. Assumed Maximum Tension of Transmission Conductors: The assumed

maximum tension of the transmission conductor under the composite load of
the vertical load generated by the weight of the electrical conductor and the
horizontal load generated by the horizontal wind pressure stipulated in Table
3.2 at the average temperature in the area.

b. Safety Factor: A safety factor of no less than 2.5 shall be applied to the insulator
devices for overhead transmission lines. The safety factor mentioned above shall
be obtained as follows:
i. Tension insulator device (Insulator device that anchors electrical conductors).

ii. Suspension insulator device (Insulator device that electrical conductors are
hung from).

iii. Supporting insulator device

Page 50 of 282 
3.3 Dielectric Strength of Overhead Transmission Lines
3.3.1 Clearance between Supporting Structures and Electrical Conductors
The clearance between overhead transmission conductors (excluding cables) and their
supporting structures, cross arms or guys (pole braces) shall not be smaller than the
values shown in Table 3.3 even when the electrical conductor sways by a wind velocity
of about 20m/s. 

Table 3.3 (need for further verification)

Nominal Voltage Clearance
No higher than 33kV *
132kV No less than 70cm
330kV No less than 145cm
*As per Item 1 of Paragraph 3 in subsection 5.2.3.3 (support structures for distribution lines).

3.3.2 Dielectric Strength of Overhead Transmission Lines

a. Dielectric Strength of Insulators
The insulators to be used for overhead transmission lines shall have the dielectric
strength that has been verified in the wet power-frequency voltage test specified in
IEC60383-1 or other tests equivalent to IEC.

b. Dielectric Strength Test

Where the operational voltage to ground is applied between the overhead
transmission line and the ground continuously for ten (10) minutes to test the
dielectric strength (to conform to IEC60038) before the commencement of
operation, the transmission line shall withstand such a test.

c. In case where cables are used for overhead transmission lines, the test shall
conform to subsection 3.8.1.1. below

3.4 Supporting Structures

3.4.1 Steel Structural Members of Supporting Structures
a. Fundamental Properties
Flat steel, shaped steel, steel pipes, steel plates, steel bars and bolts which
compose a steel tower or iron pole used for overhead transmission lines shall be
Page 51 of 282 
 appropriate ones as specified by ISO (International Organization for
Standardization) and SON (Standards Organization of Nigeria). 
b. Thickness of Steel Members
Shaped steel, steel pipes and steel plates to be used for steel tower or iron pole for
overhead transmission lines shall have the thickness and other dimensions specified
below:
i. Minimum thickness of shaped steel to be used as:
a) Main post member of an iron pole (in which a main member of a cross arm is
included; the same shall apply hereafter in this section) shall have the
thickness of 4mm.
b) Main post member of a steel tower shall have the thickness of 5mm.
c) Other structural members shall have the thickness of 3mm.

ii. Minimum thickness of steel pipes to be used as:

a. Main post member of an iron pole shall have the thickness of 2mm.
b. Main post member of a steel tower shall have the thickness of 2.4mm.
c. Other structural members shall have the thickness of 1.6mm.

iii. Slenderness ratio of steel members

The slenderness ratio of a compression member shall be no more than 200 for
those to be used as a main post member and no more than 220 for compression
members other than main post members (excluding those used as auxiliary
members) and no more than 250 for those used as auxiliary members. 

iv. Minimum thickness of steel plates

The thickness shall be no less than 1mm.

c. Strength of Steel Members and Bolts

Steel members and bolts to be used for a steel tower or an iron pole of overhead
transmission lines shall have the strength as specified in Table 3.4.

Page 52 of 282 
 Table 3.4
Classification of strength Strength

Tensile strength When Y ≤ 0.7B Y

When Y > 0.7B 0.7B

Compression strength Y

Flexural strength Y

Shearing strength When Y ≤ 0.7B Y / 3

When Y > 0.7B 0.7B / 3

Bearing strength 1.65Y

Y[K0 – K1{k/( π/(E/Y))} – K2{k/( π/(E/Y))} ]

2
Buckling strength 0 <k< Ʌ

Ʌ ≤ k
2 2
1.5π E / 2.2k

Where
Y: Yield point strength of steel members and bolts
B: Tensile strength of steel members and bolts
 k: Effective slenderness ratio ( = Lk / r )
Lk : Effective buckling length of steel members
r: Turning radius of a steel member cross-section
E: Elastic modulus (20.6 × 102 N/m2)
Ʌ: π

K, K0, K1, K2: Refer to Table 3.5

Page 53 of 282 
 Table 3.5
K K0 K1 K2

Structural members with little decentring (steel pipe, 0.6 1 0 0.352

cruciform, section plate, etc.)
Structural members with a little decentring (angle steel 0.5 0.945 0.0123 0.316
used for a main post member, etc.)
Structural members with significant decentring (angle steel 0.3 0.939 0.424 0
used for a web member with one side flange joint, etc.) (*)
* Note that the buckling strength shall be no more than 0.6Y for structural members with significant decentring.

d. Strength of Reinforced Concrete Pole Components

Components of a reinforced concrete pole for overhead transmission lines shall have
the strength as specified below:
i. Strength of concrete: The strength of concrete at yield point shall be based on the
design standard strength (4-week strength; Fc) of concrete and conform to Table
3.6.

Table 3.6

[×106N/m2]

Compression strength Fc/2

Tensile strength Fc/20

Shearing strength Fc/20 and 0.74+1.5Fc/100

ii. Bond strength of concrete: The bond strength of concrete at yield point shall be
based on the design standard strength (4-week strength; Fc) and conform to
Table 3.7

Table 3.7

[×106N/m2]

Bending monitor Fixative joint

Upper edge round bar Normal round bar
Round 6Fc/100 and no more than 1.32 9Fc/100 and no more 6Fc/100 and no more
bar than 1.99

Page 54 of 282 
 than 1.32

Deformed Fc/10 and no more than 3Fc/20 and no more than Fc/10 and no more than
round bar 1.32+3Fc/75 99+3Fc/50 1.32+3Fc/75

Shaped 3Fc/100 and no more

steel than 0.66

iii. Strength of shaped steel, flat steel and steel bars: The strength of shaped steel,
flat steel, and steel bars at yield point shall conform to Table 3.8.

Table 3.8
2
Yield tensile strength (N/mm ) Yield compression
2
strength (N/mm )

Tubular bar Y and no more than 234 Y and no more than 234

Deformed Diameter ≥ 29mm Y and no more than 294 Y and no more than 294
tubular bar
29mm > Diameter > Y Y
25mm
25mm ≥ Diameter Y and no more than 322 Y and no more than 322

Others Y and no more than 0.7B Y

Y: Strength of material at yield point

B: Tensile strength of material
iv. Strength of bolts: The strength of bolts shall conform to Table 3.4 above.

3.4.2 Loads on Supporting Structures and Safety Factor

3.4.2.1. Types and Combinations of Assumed Loads

Types and combinations of assumed loads to be used for calculating the strength of
supporting structures for overhead transmission lines shall conform to the following
provisions:
a. The loads specified in Table 3.9 shall be used in the combinations shown in Table
3.10 depending on the classification and type of supporting structure.
Table 3.9
Type of Load Contents Symbol
The load applied by the weight of the supporting structure (including cross arms Wt

Vertical load The load applied by the weight of strung wires and insulating devices Wc
If the electrical line has a remarkable vertical angle, the vertical load from the line

Page 55 of 282 
 shall be added
If guys are used (in case of a steel tower, this shall be limited to a temporary Ws
electrical line specified in Paragraph 2 in Article 107), the load by a vertical
component of force generated by tension of the guys shall be added.
Horizontal transverse Wind pressure load applied to the supporting structure (including cross arms) Ht
load

Wind pressure load applied to strung wires and insulator devices Hc

The load by horizontal transverse component of force generated by the assumed Ha
maximum tension of strung wires when the electrical line has a horizontal angle

The load by a torsional force stress generated by cutting strung wires q

Horizontal longitudinal Wind pressure load applied to the supporting structure (including cross arms) H’t
load The load by a horizontal longitudinal component of unbalanced tension of strung P1
wires
The load by a horizontal longitudinal component of unbalanced tension generated P2
by cutting strung wires
The load by a torsional force stress generated by cutting strung wires Q1

Where strung wires mean electrical conductors and overhead ground wires. The same applies
hereafter in this standard.

Table 3.10

Combination of assumed loads

Classification Type of
Load Horizontal Horizontal
of supporting supporting Wind direction Vertical load
condition transverse load longitudinal load
structure structure

Wt Wc Ws Ht Hc Ha q H’t P1 P2 q1

Perpendicular to the
 
electrical line
Class A Wind pressure
All types
reinforced load
Parallel to the
concrete pole 
electrical line

Perpendicular to the
    
Wind pressure electrical line
Class A iron
All types load and
pole
vertical load Parallel to the
   
electrical line

Class B Perpendicular to the

     
reinforced electrical line
Common Assumed
concrete pole
type normal load
Parallel to the
    
electrical line

Class B iron Assumed Perpendicular to the

pole
Anchor type      
normal load electrical line

Page 56 of 282 
 Parallel to the
    
electrical line

Perpendicular to the
      
electrical line
Assumed
Strain type
normal load
Parallel to the
    
electrical line

Perpendicular to the
     
electrical line
Assumed
normal load
Parallel to the
    
electrical line
Common
type
Perpendicular to the
        
electrical line
Assumed
abnormal load
Parallel to the
       
electrical line

Perpendicular to the
     
electrical line
Assumed
normal load
Parallel to the
    
electrical line
Steel tower Anchor type
Perpendicular to the
       
electrical line
Assumed
abnormal load
Parallel to the
      
electrical line

Perpendicular to the
     
electrical line
Assumed
normal load
Parallel to the
    
electrical line
Strain type
Perpendicular to the
       
electrical line
Assumed
abnormal load
Parallel to the
      
electrical line

Note: Circles  indicate the assumed loads to be considered at the same time. The wind direction that brings the bigger
assumed load should be selected.

The supporting structures in Table 3.10 shall have the following types:

i. Anchor type: Supporting the structure for use of anchoring all strung
wires

ii. Strain type: Supporting structure for use of reinforcing the linear parts of
electrical lines or use in a place where there is a large difference in the
span at both sides of the supporting structure

iii. Common type: Supporting Structures, excluding (i) and (ii) above, with
tension type or suspension type insulator devices

Page 57 of 282 
 b. Where strung wires are arranged asymmetrically on the supporting structure,
the assumed vertical eccentric load shall be added to the load in Table 3.10,
and the load by normal torsional load shall also be added for anchor or strain
type.

3.4.2.2 Wind Pressure Load

a. Wind Pressure Values
The wind pressure load used for subsection 3.4.2.1 of this 3.4.2 shall be the
value obtained by calculation based in the wind pressure specified in the
following table 3.11.

i. This shall not apply when calculation is made based on values obtained
by a wind pressure (wind duct) test using a wind at a velocity of not less
than 35m/s.
ii. The wind receiving area shall be the vertical projected area of the
structural member. For cross arms of a concrete pole, an iron pole
except a columnar pole, and steel tower, the wind receiving area shall be
the vertical projected area of the front structures that receive the wind.

Table 3.11

3
Wind pressure to 1m of the
Subject to the wind pressure vertical projected area of the
structural member (N)
Columnar pole 630
Triangle or rhombic pole
1500

Square pole consisting of steel

Iron pole pipes 1180

Supporting
Others 1740 when the web members
structure
overlap in the front and the back
1890 in other cases
Reinforced concrete Columnar pole 630
pole Others 950
Shaped steel tower 2290
Steel tower Steel pipe tower 1350
Single pole Columnar 630

Page 58 of 282 
 pole

Hexagonal or
octagonal 1180
pole

Electrical wires forming multiple conductors (Limited to those

Electrical
in which two compositional conductors are arranged
conductors 710
horizontally and the distance between such electrical
and other
conductors is no more than 20 times their outer diameter)
strung wires
Others 790

Insulator device 1100

Cross arms for an iron pole (limited to a columnar pole) and a reinforced 1260 when it is used as a single
concrete pole member
1740 other cases

b) Wind pressure load at an oblique wind

When the wind blows to the electrical line at an angle of 60o, the wind pressure
load in an assumed normal load of a common type steel tower shall be that
calculated by the wind power pressure load multiplier (in case of a square tower)
in Table 3.12

Table 3.12

The multiplier to the wind pressure

load when the wind blows
Classification of wind pressure load
perpendicular to the electrical line
(in case of a square tower)
Wind pressure Shaped steel tower 1.6
Wind pressure
load to body Steel pipe tower 1.4
load to steel
0.5 (for the wind pressure in the
tower Wind pressure load to cross arm
direction of the electrical line)
Wind pressure load to strung wire 0.75

c. Augmentation of wind pressure by the height

i. Steel tower: The wind pressure of a shaped steel tower or steel pipe
tower that is higher than 40m shall conform to Table 3.13

Table 3.13

Page 59 of 282 
 Shaped steel tower Steel pipe tower
Height
Below 330kV No less than 330kV Below 330kV No less than 330kV
No higher than 50m 2,450 2,610 1,430 1,500

No higher than 60m 2,610 2,760 1,500 1,580

No higher than 70m - 2,920 - 1,660

No higher than 80m - 3,080 - 1,740

ii. Wires and insulators: When a steel tower is higher than 80m, the wind
pressure shall be calculated by increasing the wind velocity
appropriately. (this statement should be Reviewed)

3.4.2.3 Unbalanced Tension

Unbalanced tension used in Paragraph 1 of this Subsection 3.4.2 shall conform to the
following requirements:
a. The unbalanced tension and the torsional force shall conform to Table
3.14

Table 3.14

Classification of Unbalanced tension and torsional force

Type of supporting
supporting
structure Assumed normal load Assumed abnormal load
structure
Steel tower Common type No specification Horizontal longitudinal
Anchor type Horizontal longitudinal component component of force of the
of force of the unbalanced tension unbalanced tension
equal to the assumed maximum generated by cutting strung
tension for each strung wire wires and torsional force
Strain type Horizontal longitudinal component
of force of the unbalanced tension
equal to 1/3 of the assumed
maximum tension for each strung
wire
Class B iron Common type No specification No specification
reinforced Anchor type Horizontal longitudinal component
concrete pole and of force of the unbalanced tension
concrete pole and equal to the assumed maximum
Class B iron pole tension for each strung wire
Strain type Horizontal longitudinal component
of force of the unbalanced tension
equal to 1/3 of the assumed
maximum tension for each strung
wire

Page 60 of 282 
 a. For steel towers, the strung wires shall be cut according to the following
requirements depending on the total number of phases of electrical conductors
(which means phases for each circuit; the same shall apply hereafter).

i. The overhead ground wire shall not be cut at the same time as the electrical
conductors and only one wire shall be cut.

ii. Where the total number of phases of electrical conductors is no more than
twelve (12), one phase that maximizes the stress generated in each
structural member (Two electrical conductors from one phase in case of
multiple conductors for steel towers other than anchor type)

iii. Where the total number of phases of electrical conductors is over twelve
(12) (excluding the case specified in the following item iv.), two phases in
different circuits that maximize the stress generated in each structural
member (Two electrical conductors from one phase in case of multiple
conductors for steel towers other than anchor type)

iv. Where electrical conductors are arranged so that nine or more phases are in
a longitudinal row and two phases are in a transverse row, one of the top six
phases in the longitudinal row (two electrical conductors from one phase in
case of multiple conductors for steel towers other than anchor type) and one
phase from the other phases (two electrical conductors from one phase in
case of multiple conductors for steel towers other than anchor type) that
maximize the stress generated in each structural member.

C The unbalanced tension generated by cutting the strung wire shall be equal to
the assumed maximum tension.
Provided, however, that the unbalanced tension may be 0.6 times the assumed
maximum tension if, depending on the mounting method of strung wire, the supporting
point of the strung wire shifts when the wire is cut or the strung wire slides at the
supporting point.

3.4.2.4 Safety factor of Supporting Structure

The yield strength of the structural members of reinforced concrete poles, iron poles
and steel towers used for overhead transmission lines shall satisfy the safety factor
listed in Table 3.15 for the assumed loads specified in Paragraph 1 to Paragraph 3.

Page 61 of 282 
 Table 3.15

Classification of supporting structure Load condition Safety factor

Class A reinforced concrete pole Wind pressure load 1.65
Class A iron pole Wind pressure load 1.65
Vertical load
Class B reinforced concrete pole Assumed normal load 1.65
Class B iron pole
Steel tower Assumed normal load 1.65
Assumed abnormal load 1.1 (1.65 for cross arms)

3.4.3 Loads on Foundations of Supporting Structures and Safety Factor

3.4.3.1 Loads on the Foundation of a Supporting Structure

The loads applied to the foundation of a supporting structure for overhead transmission
lines shall be calculated from combinations of assumed loads of the supporting
structure specified in the section 3.4.2 and the resultant maximum values shall be the
assumed normal and abnormal loads for the foundation.

3.4.3.2 Safety Factor of the Foundation

The safety factor of the foundation of a supporting structure for overhead transmission
lines shall satisfy the value listed in Table 3.16 for its yield strength.

Table 3.16

Safety factor
Classification of supporting structure
Assumed normal load Assumed abnormal load
Reinforced concrete pole and iron pole 2.0 3.0

Steel tower 2.0 2.5

3.4.3.3 Treatment of the Weight of the Foundation

The weight of the foundation used for calculating the safety factor shall be treated in
accordance with the following provisions:

a. For the foundation subject to a lifting load, two thirds or less of the weight of the
foundation (or weight of the foundation of a steel tower to an abnormal load) may be
included in the lift bearing power.

Page 62 of 282 
 b. For the foundation subject to a compressive load, the weight of the foundation shall
be included in the compressive load.

3.4.4 Reinforcement of Overhead Transmission Lines

3.4.4.1 Class A Reinforced Concrete Poles and Class A iron poles
Where five or more Class A reinforced concrete poles or Class A iron poles used for
overhead transmission lines are installed successfully in a straight portion (including
portions with a horizontal angle of five degrees or less), such poles shall be installed
according to the following requirements:

a. For every five poles or less frequently, guys shall be installed on both sides of wires
in the direction perpendicular to the electrical line. The same shall not apply when
voltage of 33kV or below is used.

b. Where 15 or more of such poles are successively, guys shall be installed on both
sides of wires in the direction of the electrical line for every 15 poles or less.

c. The guys installed according to Item (a) and Item (b) can be used in common with
the guys installed according to the provisions of subsection 3.4.5.1 of section 3.4.5.

3.4.4.2 Class B Reinforced Concrete Poles or Class B Iron poles

Where ten or more Class B reinforced poles and Class B iron poles with suspension
insulator devices are used successively, one iron reinforced concrete pole or iron pole
of strain type shall be installed for every ten poles or less frequently.

3.4.4.3 Steel Tower

Where ten or more steel towers with suspension insulator devices are used
successively, one steel tower with a strain-type suspension insulator or one steel tower
with suspension insulator device shall be used for every ten towers or less frequently.
Such a suspension insulator device shall be designed assuming that the magnitude of
unbalanced tension generated by cutting a strung wire is the value equal to the
assumed maximum tension of the strung wire when the assumed abnormal load is
determined.

3.4.4.4 Reinforcement by Guys

Page 63 of 282 
 a. Guys for Class A reinforced poles, Class A iron poles, Class B reinforced concrete
poles and Class B iron poles used for overhead transmission lines shall be installed
according to Paragraph 1 and 3 of 5.2.3.5

b. Steels towers used for overhead transmission lines shall have no guys that share
the strength of the towers. However, steel towers to be used temporarily within six
months may be equipped with guys. In this case, the guys shall be installed
according to Item (1) of Paragraph 1 of 5.2.3.5-to be coordinated with distribution
group.
 
c. Guys used for reinforced concrete poles, iron poles and steel towers shall conform
to Paragraph 2 in 5.2.3.5

3.5 Regulations for Installation

3.5.1 Clearance between Overhead Ground Wires and Electrical Conductors
Where electric circuits cross at mid-span positions the following conditions shall apply-

a. The circuit of the higher voltage shall always cross over the circuit of the lower
voltage;

b. No circuit shall cross at an angle of less than 30 degrees; and

c. The minimum clearance between the nearest conductors of different circuits at

the point of crossing, including "aerial" earth wire, shall not be less than that tabulated
below PLUS the maximum design sag of the conductor of the lower circuit at the point
of crossing;

Table 3.17

Lower Circuit (Voltage between phases) Upper Circuit (Voltage between phases)
Earth
wire 400
3,300 6,600 11,000 33,000 66,000 132,000 330,000
(415)

Convert (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm)
to
Metres
(m)
Earth wire 30 20 30 30 30 120 60 120 240

400 20 120 120 120 120 120 150 180 270

(415) V

Page 64 of 282 
 3,300V 30 –– –– 120 120 120 150 180 270

6,600V 30 –– –– 120 120 120 150 180 270

11,000V 30 –– –– –– 120 –– 150 180 270

33,000V 30 –– –– –– –– –– 150 180 270

66,000V 60 –– –– –– –– –– 150 210 300

132,000V 120 –– –– –– –– –– –– 240 360

330,000V 240 –– –– –– –– –– –– –– 480

Where the circuit of the higher voltage is fully insulated the minimum clearance
calculated in accordance with 3.5.1c above may be reduced by 50%.

3.5.2 Height of Overhead Transmission Conductors and Limitation of Span

a. The height above ground of any electric line under the most adverse operating
conditions shall not, except with the written authority of NERC, be less than the
height appropriate to the system voltage and situations tabulated in Table 3.18
below.

b. Fully insulated service lines operating at a voltage not exceeding 400Volts may be
terminated on buildings at a height of not less than 2.7 m from ground level
provided that the street clearance at any point of its span is not less than 5.8 m.
Table 3.18

Ground clearance in (m)

Over streets and

Along streets and In positions
System voltage roads and public
roads and other inaccessible to
between open spaces and
places accessible to vehicular traffic not
phases other places of
traffic streets or roads
vehicular traffic
415Volts 5.8 m 5.2 m 5.2 m
415??
3,300 Volts 5.8 m 5.5 m 5.5 m
6,600 Volts 5.8 m 5.5 m 5.5 m
11,000 Volts 5.8 m 5.5 m 5.5 m
33,000 Volts 6.0 m 6.0 m 5.8 m
66,000 Volts 7.0 m 7.0 m 5.8 m
132,000 Volts 7.0 m 7.0 m 5.8 m

Page 65 of 282 
 330,000 Volts 7.0 m 7.0 m 5.8 m
750,000 Volts ?? ?? ??

3.5.3 Clearance between Plants and Overhead Transmission Conductors

The clearance between any overhead transmission conductor and any plant shall not
be less than the value specified in the Table 3.5.3 below. The clearance shall be
secured to provide for the occurrence of such case that the electrical conductor dips at
the maximum design operating temperature or sways in the wind.

Table 3.19
Nominal voltage Vertical Clearance
No higher than 33 kV 2m

The value obtained by adding 6 cm for every 10 kV and fraction thereof

Higher than 33 kV
over 33 kV to 2 m

This shall not apply when overhead transmission lines are installed according to the
following requirements:

a. Overhead transmission conductors with a voltage not higher than 33 kV, for
which insulated conductors are used, shall be installed so as not to contact
plants.

b. Overhead transmission conductors with a voltage not higher than 132 kV, for
which cables are used, shall be installed so as not to contact plants.

Check the ‘plants’ for its definition

3.5.4 Restrictions in Urban Areas

Page 66 of 282 
 No overhead transmission line shall be installed in urban areas or other densely built-
up areas.

The restrictions above shall not apply where the nominal voltage of the overhead
transmission line is not more than 132kV and the electrical conductors are cables or the
installation is carried out according to the following requirements:

a. Strength of electrical conductor

The strength of electrical conductor shall conform to Table 3.20 below.

Table 3.20
Nominal voltage Strength of electrical conductor
No higher than 33kV Stranded wire with a tensile strength no less than 30 kN
Higher than 33kV but no higher
Stranded wire with a tensile strength no less than 40 kN
than 132kV

b. Limitation of Span
The length of span of overhead transmission lines shall conform to Table 3.21
below

Table 3.21
Classification of supporting
Length of span
structure
Class A reinforced concrete pole
No longer than 75 m
or class A iron pole

Class B reinforced concrete pole

No longer than 150 m
or class B iron pole

No longer than 400 m (or no longer than 250m when two or more
Steel tower electrical conductors are arranged horizontally and the distance
between the electrical conductors is less than 4 m)

c. Height of electrical conductor above the ground

The height of overhead transmission conductors above the ground shall be not
less than the value specified in Table 3.22 below. The height shall be secured to
provide for the occurrence of such case that the electrical conductor sag at the
maximum design operating temperature.

Page 67 of 282 
 This shall not apply to overhead transmission lines for a span connecting the
yard of a power plant, substation or similar place to the outside.

Table 3.22
Nominal voltage Height of electrical conductor above the ground
Not higher than 33kV 10.06 m (8 m when insulated conductors are used)
Value obtained by adding 6 cm for each 10kV over 33kV and
Higher than 33kV
fraction thereof to 10.06m

d. Indication of danger

Supporting structures shall be provided with an indication of danger in a location

where it is easily read. This shall not apply when insulated conductors are used
for overhead transmission lines with a nominal voltage less than or equal to
33kV.

e. Definition of an Urban Area or Other Densely Built-up Area

An urban area or other densely built-up area shall be defined according to the
building-to-land ratio specified in Table 3.23

Where the building-to-land ratio means the ratio of (the area covered with
buildings / 50,000 m2 MINUS the area of roads] in the zone (excluding roads)
that is the rectangular area of 50,000 m2 extending for 50 m on both sides of an
overhead transmission line and 500 m in the direction of that line.

Table 3.23
An urban area or other densely built-up area

New transmission conductor (when The building-to-land ratio is no less than 25%.
installed)

Existing transmission conductor The building-to-land ratio is no less than 30%.

3.5.5 Regulations for Side‐by‐side Installation and at Adjacency to and Crossing with Other Objects

3.5.5.1 Alternative provision

a. Where the condition of Clause 3.6.2.1) cannot be met, the line shall be erected
so that the minimum horizontal distance in meters of the nearest conductor in still
air is not less than-

Page 68 of 282 
 (Conductor sag at maximum design temperature PLUS length of suspension
insulator string) PLUS B, where "B" is a constant dependent on the voltage
between phases of the conductors of the line-

415Volts - 11,000 Volts 2.4 meters

33,000 Volts 3.0 meters
132,000 Volts 4.0 meters
330,000 Volts 6.0 meters
Over 330,000 Volts 9.0 meters

b. Where the conductors of the circuit are fully insulated the constant "B" may be
reduced by 50%.

c. In the case of specially designed fully insulated serial cables clearance to

buildings may be reduced at the discretion of the Regulator.

d. No building or other structure shall be erected under or adjacent to an electric

line without adhering to the provisions of this standard.

3.6 Particulars of Installation for Side‐by‐side Use and at Adjacency to

and Crossing with Other Objects
3.6.1 Side‐by‐side Use Installation with Other Objects
All crossings of power lines - road crossings, railway crossings, river crossings,
power line to power line and power line to tele-communication lines and other
objects- shall be done to satisfy requirements of this regulation., Applicable Codes,
Standards, Specifications, the requirements of concerned authorities owning the en-
route utility in respect of safety of its users and security of the Transmission System
as per good industry practice. Necessary clearances, maximum permissible spans
and requirements of mechanical and electrical parameters shall be observed in
respect of all.

3.6.1.1 Installation with Distribution Conductors

a. When overhead transmission conductors with a nominal voltage not higher than
33kV and overhead distribution conductors are installed on the same supporting
structure, the installation shall be carried out in accordance with the following
requirements) to be transferred to distribution
Position of installing electrical conductors on the supporting structure

The electrical conductor with a higher voltage shall be installed above the electrical
conductor with a lower voltage, using separate cross arms.

i. Clearance

Page 69 of 282 
 The clearance between any overhead transmission conductor and any
overhead distribution conductor shall be not shorter than the values specified in
Table 3.24.

ii. Strength of overhead distribution conductors

Overhead distribution conductors shall be any of those specified in the following

items except for cases where cables are used.

a) Those with a tensile strength no less than 5 kN where the span of the
overhead distribution conductor is no longer than 50 m

b) Those with a tensile strength no less than 8 kN where the span of the
overhead distribution conductor is longer than 50 m

b. Overhead transmission conductors with a nominal voltage over 33kV but below
132kV and low-voltage overhead distribution conductors shall not be installed on
the same supporting structure.
When overhead transmission conductors with a nominal voltage over 33kV but
below 132kV and medium-voltage overhead distribution conductors are installed on
the same supporting structure, the installation shall be carried out in accordance
with the following requirements:

i. Position of installing electrical conductors

Overhead transmission conductors shall be installed above overhead

distribution conductors using separate cross arms. This shall not apply
where such overhead distribution conductor is installed together with
overhead distribution conductor for the SWER system.

ii. Strength of overhead transmission conductors

The overhead transmission conductors shall be the stranded wires with a

tensile strength no less than 30 kN excluding the case where they are
cables.

iii. Transmission line strengthening work

Overhead transmission lines shall be installed according to the provisions

for type 2 transmission line strengthening work see Table 3.24 below.

Page 70 of 282 
 iv. Clearance

c. The clearance between any overhead transmission conductor and any overhead
distribution conductor shall be no less than the values specified in Table 3.25 below
.
Table 3.24

Nominal voltage Clearance

Value obtained by adding 6 cm for every 10 kV and fraction thereof

over 33kV to 2.0 m (or 1 m when the overhead transmission
Higher than 33kV
conductor is a cable and the overhead distribution conductor is an
insulated conductor or a cable)

3.6.1.2 Strength of Overhead Transmission Conductor

(Overhead transmission conductors shall be installed according to Item (3) of
Paragraph 1 of 3.6.1.1.

a. Overhead transmission conductors with a nominal voltage higher than 132kV and
overhead distribution conductors shall not be installed on the same supporting
structure excluding the case of the following paragraph.

b. Where any overhead transmission conductor or any overhead distribution conductor

to be connected with any low-voltage electric machine or appliance to be installed
on the supporting structure of the overhead transmission line is installed on the
same supporting structure, the installation shall be carried out according to the
provisions of Item (1) and Item (3) of Paragraph 1 of 3.6.1.1. Also, the clearance
between the overhead transmission conductor and the overhead distribution
conductor shall be no less than the values specified in Table 3.21) to be transferred
to distribution

3.6.1.2 Installation with Telecommunication Conductors

a. The provision of Clause 3.6.2.3b to 3.8.2.6. shall apply where the licensee intends
to place an electric line, other than a service line, in the proximity of over or under
Telecommunications line.

b. Other than in the case of a fully insulated services line all electric lines, except with
the written authority of the relevant statutory body , shall cross over Post and
Telecommunications lines with a minimum clearance, under the most adverse
operating conditions at the point of crossing of :

Page 71 of 282 
 Table 3.25

System Voltage Between Phases Clearance

Not exceeding 400Volts - insulated 0.2 m

Not exceeding 400Volts - un-insulated 0.6 m

Over 400Volts but not exceeding 33,000 Volts 1.8 m

Over 33,000 Volts but not exceeding 132,000 Volts 2.4 m

Over 132,000 Volts but not exceeding 330,000 Volts 4.0 m

Over 330,000 Volts but not exceeding 750,000 Volts 7.0 m

i. So far as may be practicable the licensee shall leave one side of each street
free for telecommunication line and where the street is continuous the licensee's
line shall be kept to the same side of the street for the whole distance.

ii. Except with the permission of the relevant statutory body Posts and
Telecommunications Authorities all overhead lines shall be placed on the
opposite side of the street to that on which any telecommunication lines are
erected, and where the erection or operation of the electric lines necessitates an
alteration of an existing telecommunication line, and such alteration is approved
by the Posts and Telecommunications Authorities, the expense of the alteration
shall be borne by the licensee; provided that where existing telecommunication
lines of the Telecommunications Service Providers Authorities occupy both
sides-of the street that Organization shall bear the cost of putting all
telecommunication lines on the one side of the street or if agreeable to the
licensee, consent to an arrangement for the joint use of poles on both sides of
the street.

iii. Where electric lines are on one side of the street and telecommunication lines
on the other, and service is required to be given from either side to the other, the
licensee and the Posts and Telecommunications Service Provider shall give to
each other reasonable facilities as far as possible to effect supply. Where
possible electric service lines, unless fully insulated, shall pass over
telecommunication service lines otherwise pass under electric lines.

3.6.1.4 Low-Voltage Appliances on Towers

Where any low-voltage machine or appliance to be installed on the supporting structure
of the overhead transmission lines is installed above overhead transmission
conductors, it shall be installed in accordance with the following requirements.

Page 72 of 282 
 Notwithstanding, this shall not apply where the overhead transmission conductors are
cables.

a. The electrical circuit to be connected to a low-voltage machine or appliance

shall not be connected to any other loads.

b. Where the electrical circuit as specified in the preceding item is coupled with
another electrical circuit through a transformer, an insulating transformer shall
be used.

c. One terminal on the loaded side of the insulating transformer as specified in the
preceding item or a neutral point shall be provided with class A earthing work.

d. Metal cases of low-voltage machines and appliances shall be provided with

class D earthing work.

3.6.2 Installations at Adjacency to and Crossing with Other Objects

3.6.2.1 Adjacency to and Crossing with Buildings

A line may be erected over or adjacent to a building provided that-
a. The radial distance in meters from the point of attachment of the suspension
insulator (or conductor if attached to a fixed insulator) of the lowest conductor, to
any part of the building is not less than:

(Conductor sag at maximum design temperature + length of suspension

insulator string)+ A, where A is a constant dependent on the voltage
between phases of the conductors of the line).

400Volts to 11,000 Volts ………………… …. 2.4 meters

33,000 Volts …………………………………... 3.0 meters
132,000 Volts ................................................ 4.0 meters
330,000 Volts ................................................ 6.0 meters
Over 330,000 Volts ........................................ 8.0 meters

b. Where the conductors of the circuit are fully insulated the constant "A" may be
reduced by 50%.

3.6.2.2 Adjacency to and Crossing with the Roads

An overhead conductor may not cross a road at a more acute angle than 45°, unless
special permission is obtained from NERC.
Page 73 of 282 
3.6.2.3 Adjacency to and Crossing with the Waterways
a. The height of an electric line under the most adverse conditions, above the
highest recorded water level, over harbours, rivers and waterways, shall not be
less than that required by the appropriate authorities for physical safety
clearance plus a minimum electrical safety clearance of 3m of 1 m per 78 kV
or phase to neutral voltage of the electric line, whichever is greater.

b. The licensee shall at least within thirty days and not more than ninety days prior
to the placing of such work serve written notice on the appropriate authorities
specifying the intended use of the works, the voltage of operation and such
other information that the authorities may require him to supply.

c. Every notice served in conformity with Clause 3.6.2.3b shall be accompanied by

a plan of suitable scale indicating the site of the crossing, the location of all
supports,
stays, struts, switches, transformers and other apparatus intended to be used.

d. The authorities may within 21 days of the receipt of such a notice of intention
served under Clause 3.6.2.3b serve a counter notice on the licensee

i. Objecting to the siting of the works specifying the reason in the counter
notice; and
ii. Requiring protective features to be fitted, such features to be specified in
the counter notice.

3.6.2.4 Adjacency to and Crossing with Railway Lines

The provision of Clause 3.6.2.3b and 3.8.2.6 shall apply where the licensee intends to
place an electric line, other than a service line, in the proximity of, over or under a
railway line.

a. An overhead conductor may not cross a railway track at a more acute angle
than 60° unless special permission is obtained from the Nigerian Railway
Corporation.

b. Minimum clearances shall be as follows:

i. 132 kV circuits over rail top 7.3 meters
ii. 330 kV circuits: over rail top 8.4 meters ;
iii. Minimum height above rail level of the lowest wire or any portion of a
guard or cradle guard under conditions of maximum sag: 6 meters

c. No supporting structure shall be situated nearer to the centre line of the track
than the total height of the supporting structure plus 2.5 meters.

Page 74 of 282 
 d. When the railway line is in a cutting, the supporting structure must be at a
distance from the edge of the cutting not less than its total height.

3.6.2.5 Adjacency to and Crossing with the Airfields

The provision of Clause 3.6.2.3b and 3.8.2.6 shall apply where the licensee intends to
place an electric line in the proximity of an airfield.
 

3.6.2.6 Adjacency to and Crossing with the Broadcasting Aerials

The provision of Clause 3.6.2.3b and 3.8.2.6 shall apply where the licensee intends to
place an electric line, other than a service line, in the proximity of a radio or television
aerial.

3.6.2.7 Approval in Specific Instances

Notwithstanding the foregoing, where the regulation clearance are so attainable NERC
may, in specific instances, authorize the use of reduced clearances subject to such
additional safety precautions in the form of warning notices, warning lights or crash
bars, as it may deem necessary.

3.6.2.8 Adjacency to and Crossing with Distribution Conductors and Telecommunication

Conductors
Where overhead transmission conductors are installed in primary proximity to overhead
distribution conductors or overhead telecommunication conductors (hereinafter referred
to as "overhead distribution conductors or the like"), they shall be installed in
accordance with the following requirements:

3.6.2.8.1 Primary Proximity of Overhead Transmission Conductors with a Nominal Voltage

no higher than 33kV to Overhead Distribution Conductors or the like
Where overhead transmission conductors are installed in primary proximity to overhead
distribution conductors or overhead telecommunication conductors (hereinafter referred
to as "overhead distribution conductors or the like"), they shall be installed in
accordance with the following requirements:

a. Transmission Line Strengthening Work

Overhead transmission lines shall be installed in accordance with the provisions

specified for type 3 transmission line strengthening work.

b. Clearance

Page 75 of 282 
 i. The clearance shall be as specified below. The clearance shall be secured
to provide for the occurrence of such case that the electrical conductor dips
at the maximum design operating temperature or sways in the wind. (The
same shall apply hereafter in this article.)

ii. The clearance between overhead transmission conductors with a nominal

voltage no higher than 33kV and overhead distribution conductors or the like
or their supporting structures (including guys and pole braces) shall be no
less than the values specified in Table 3.26.

Table 3.26

Clearance (m) Classification of overhead transmission

Object conductor
Insulated
Cable Others
conductor
Cable 0.5 0.5 1
Overhead
distribution Insulated conductor 0.5 1 2
conductor
Others 1 2 2
Overhead telecommunication
conductor or supporting structure
0.5 1 2
of overhead distribution conductor
or the like

iii. The clearance between overhead transmission conductors with a nominal

voltage over 33kV and overhead distribution conductors or the like or their
supporting structures shall be no less than the values obtained by adding 6
cm for every 10 kV and fraction thereof over 33kV to 2 m (or 1 m when the
overhead transmission conductors are cables).

3.6.2.8.2 Secondary Proximity of Overhead Transmission Conductors with a Nominal Voltage

no higher than 33kV to Overhead Distribution Conductors or the like
Where overhead transmission conductors with a nominal voltage no higher than 33kV
are installed in secondary proximity to overhead distribution conductors or the like, they
shall be installed in accordance with the following requirements:

a. Transmission Line Strengthening Work

Overhead transmission lines shall be installed in accordance with the provisions

specified for type 2 transmission line strengthening work.

Page 76 of 282 
b. Clearance

The clearance between overhead transmission conductors and overhead

distribution conductors or the like or their supporting structures (including guys and
pole braces) shall conform to Item (2) of Paragraph 1.

c. Horizontal Clearance

The horizontal clearance between overhead Transmission conductors and

overhead distribution conductors or the like shall be no less than 2 m when both
electrical conductors are motionless. This shall not apply under any of the following
conditions:

i. Where the overhead distribution conductors or the like have a tensile

strength no less than 10 kN or they are cables,

ii. Where the overhead telecommunication conductors are installed with

messenger wires using galvanized steel wires with a diameter no less than 4
mm or with a tensile strength no less than 4 kN, or when the overhead
telecommunication conductors are service wires with spans no longer than
15 m,

iii. Where the vertical clearance between the overhead Transmission

conductors and the overhead distribution conductors or the like is at least 6
m,

iv. Where the overhead Transmission conductors are insulated conductors or

cables.

3.6.2.8.3 Secondary Proximity of Overhead Transmission Conductors with a Nominal Voltage

over 33kV to Overhead Distribution Conductors.
Where overhead transmission conductors with a nominal voltage over 33kV are
installed in secondary proximity to overhead distribution conductors or the like, they
shall be installed in accordance with the following requirements:

a. Transmission Line Strengthening Work

Overhead Transmission lines shall be installed in accordance with the strengthening

work specified in Table 3.27.

Closing distance of overhead

Strengthening work
distribution conductors or the like Page 77 of 282 
 No longer than 50 m Type 2 Transmission line strengthening work
Table 3.27
Over 50 m Type 1 Transmission line strengthening work

b. Clearance

The clearance between overhead Transmission conductors and overhead

distribution conductors or the like or their supporting structures (including guys
and pole braces) shall conform to Item (2) of Paragraph 1.

c. Horizontal clearance

The horizontal clearance between overhead Transmission conductors and

overhead distribution conductors or the like shall be no less than 2 m. This
shall not apply under any of the following conditions:

i. Where the overhead distribution conductors or the like have a tensile

strength no less than 10 kN or they are cables

ii. Where the overhead telecommunication conductors are installed with

messenger wires using galvanized steel wires with a diameter no less than 4
mm or with a tensile strength no less than 4 kN, or when the overhead
telecommunication conductors are service wires with spans no longer than
15 m.

iii. Where the vertical clearance between the overhead Transmission

conductors and the overhead distribution conductors or the like is at least
6m.

iv. Where the overhead Transmission conductors with a normal voltage lower
than 132kV kV are insulated conductors or cables.

3.6.2.8.4 Crossing Over Overhead Distribution Conductors or the like

Where an overhead transmission conductor is installed crossing over an overhead
distribution conductor or the like and when it is installed above an overhead
distribution conductor, the overhead transmission line shall be installed in
accordance with the following requirements:

Page 78 of 282 
a. Transmission Line Strengthening Work

Overhead transmission lines shall be installed according to the strengthening work

specified in Table 3.28

Table 3.28
Closing distance of overhead
Strengthening work
distribution conductors or the like
No longer than 50 m Type 2 transmission line strengthening work
Type 1 transmission line strengthening work
(Note that type 2 transmission line strengthening work will do for
Over 50 m
overhead transmission lines with a nominal voltage no higher
than 33kV.)

b. Clearance

The clearance between overhead transmission conductors and overhead

distribution conductors or the like or their supporting structures (including guys and
pole braces) shall conform to Item (2) of Paragraph 1.

c. Others

The overhead distribution conductor or the like (the uppermost one when there are
two or more located vertically) shall has a tensile strength no less than 10 kN or it is
a cable.

This shall not apply where overhead transmission conductors are insulated
conductors with a nominal voltage no higher than 33kV or cables with a nominal
voltage below 132kV kV.

3.6.2.8.5 Adjacency to and Crossing under Overhead Distribution Conductors

(i) Adjacency under overhead distribution conductors

Overhead transmission conductors shall not be installed below overhead

distribution conductors or the like within a horizontal distance equivalent to the
height of their supporting structures above the ground surface.

(ii) Crossing under overhead distribution conductors or the like

Where overhead transmission conductors are installed across overhead

distribution conductors or the like, the overhead transmission conductors shall
not be lower than the overhead distribution conductors or the like.
Page 79 of 282 
3.6.2.8.6 Adjacency to and Crossing with Special Overhead Distribution Conductors
Where overhead transmission conductors are installed close to or across the low-
voltage overhead distribution conductors connected to low-voltage machines or
appliances specified in Clause 3.6.1.4, the overhead transmission conductors need not
necessarily conform to the provisions of Paragraphs 1 through 4 (excluding the
provisions for clearance).

3.6.2.9 Adjacency to and Crossing with Transmission Conductors

The minimum distance between the nearest conductors of circuits erected on
separate supports such that they run along parallel routes shall be not less than
that required to enable the safe maintenance of either circuit to be carried out
without de-energizing the circuit that is not being maintained, and the horizontal
separation shall be greater than the height of the highest support.

3.6.2.10 Adjacency to and Crossing of Overhead Transmission conductors with other ones
Where overhead transmission conductors are installed close to or across other
overhead transmission conductors, they shall be installed in accordance with the
following requirements:

(1) Transmission line strengthening work

The overhead transmission lines to be installed above or on the side shall be

installed in accordance with type 3 transmission line strengthening work.

(2) Clearance

The clearance shall be as specified below. The clearance shall be secured to

provide for the occurrence of such case that the electrical conductor dips at the
maximum design operating temperature or sways in the wind.

a. The clearance between an overhead transmission conductor and

another overhead transmission conductor shall be no less than the values
specified in Table 3.29 depending on the higher nominal voltage of the two
transmission conductors.

Table 3.29
Page 80 of 282 
 Nominal
Type of electrical conductor Clearance
voltage
One overhead transmission conductor
uses a cable and the other uses an 0.5 m
insulated conductor or cable
No higher
than 33kV Both overhead transmission conductors
1m
use insulated conductors
Others 2m
The value obtained by adding 6 cm for
Both overhead transmission conductors
every 10 kV and fraction thereof over
use cables
33kV to 1 m
Over 33kV
The value obtained by adding 6 cm for
Others every 10 kV and fraction thereof over
33kV to 2 m

b. The clearance between an overhead transmission conductor and a

supporting structure of another overhead transmission conductor shall
be no less than the values specified in Table 3.30.

Table 3.30
Nominal voltage Clearance
2 m (or 1 m when the electrical conductor is an insulated conductor and
No higher than 33kV
0.5 m when it is a cable)
The value obtained by adding 6 cm for every 10 kV and fraction thereof
Over 33kV
over 33kV to 2 m (or 1 m when the electrical conductor is a cable)

3.6.2.10 Adjacency to and Crossing with Other Facilities

1. Primary Proximity

Where overhead transmission conductors are installed in primary proximity to

facilities other than buildings, roads, pedestrian crossing bridges, overhead
telecommunication lines, overhead distribution lines and other overhead
transmission lines (hereafter in this article, referred to as "other facilities"), they
shall be installed in accordance with the following requirements:

(1) Clearance

The clearance shall be as specified below. The clearance shall be secured to

provide for the occurrence of such case that the electrical conductor dips at the
maximum design operating temperature or sways in the wind.

Page 81 of 282 
 a. The clearance between overhead transmission conductors with a
nominal voltage no higher than 33kV and other facilities shall conform to
Table 3.31.

Note that the clearance shall conform to Clause 3.6.2.1 where overhead
transmission conductors are installed above the buildings strong enough under
which people can walk around freely.

Table 3.31
Clearance
The electrical
Classification of other facilities The electrical The electrical
conductor is an
conductor is a conductor is a
insulated
cable bare conductor
conductor

Upper structural Above 2 m or longer 1.2 m or longer

member of below or on 2 m or longer
building 1 m or longer 0.5 m or longer
the side
Part of building other than upper
structural members or facilities 1 m or longer 0.5 m or longer 2 m or longer
other than buildings

b The clearance between overhead transmission conductors with a

nominal voltage over 33kV and other facilities shall be no less than the
value obtained by adding 6 cm for every 10 kV and fraction thereof over
33kV to 2 m (or 1 m when the overhead transmission conductors are
cables and not installed above the upper structural members of
building).

(2) Transmission line strengthening work

The overhead transmission lines shall be installed in accordance with type 3

transmission line strengthening work.

2. Secondary Proximity or Crossing

Where overhead transmission conductors are installed in secondary proximity to

other facilities or they cross above other facilities, they shall be installed in
accordance with the following requirements:

(1) Clearance

The clearance between overhead transmission conductors and other facilities

shall conform to Item (1) of Paragraph 1.

Page 82 of 282 
 (2) Transmission line strengthening work

The overhead transmission lines shall be installed in accordance with type 2

transmission line strengthening work.

3. Adjacency Under Others

Where overhead transmission conductors are installed below and close to other
facilities, the horizontal clearance between the two shall be no less than 3 m, and the
clearance between them shall conform to Table 3.30 above. .

Note that the clearance between overhead transmission conductors and other facilities
need not necessarily exceed 3m when the overhead transmission conductors use
insulated conductors and have a nominal voltage no higher than 33kV or when they
use cables and have a nominal voltage below 132kV.

3.7 Protection from Lightning and Falling Trees

3.7.1 Protection from Lightning
The following measures shall be taken for overhead transmission lines to reduce
flashover by lightning and protect facilities against damage caused by flashover.

a. Overhead ground wires shall be installed for the overhead transmission lines with a
nominal voltage over 33 kV. Note that the distribution lines of SWER systems
installed on the top of a tower can be regarded as overhead ground wires.

b. Arcing horns shall be installed for insulator devices of overhead transmission lines
with a nominal voltage over 33 kV.

c. An armor rod shall be installed at the electrical conductor grasping part of

suspension insulator devices.

3.7.2 Protection from Falling Trees

Overhead transmission lines shall be installed in accordance with any of the following
requirements to protect the facilities against damage caused by a falling tree.

a. Cut trees by the necessary length in an area where the facilities could be damaged
by falling trees.

Page 83 of 282 
 b. Secure the height of electrical conductors so as not to damage the facilities by
falling trees.

3.7.3 Protection from Intrusion

For the purposes of preventing climbing of lattice structure by unauthorized persons,
anti-climbing devices shall be attached to all supports and to all stay wires, where the
stay wires are so arranged as to facilitate unauthorized climbing.

3.7.4 Protection from Mechanical Damage

Where lightning conductors, earthing leads, or other uninsulated conductors are run
down poles they shall be protected by a wooden casing or other insulating material for
a distance of three(3) meters from the ground.

3.7.5 Numbering and Danger Notices

a. All supports shall be numbered with the addition of symbols or alphabetical
letters to identify the line. This falls under line numbering.

b. In the reticulation of a township the supports shall be numbered in accordance

with the grid of the master plan.

c. All supports carrying high voltage conductors shall have danger notices
attached. These danger notices shall be of metal enameled or painted white
and/or conventional with lettering and/or conventional signs in scarlet as
approved by NERC.

d. Where the lines are erected on the side of a road the notice shall be so fixed
that it is plainly visible from the road

Page 84 of 282 
3.8 Underground Transmission Lines
3.8.1 Dielectric Strength of Underground Transmission Lines

3.8.1.1 Dielectric Strength of Underground Transmission Lines

Cables used for underground transmission lines shall have the dielectric strength that
withstands the power frequency voltage, the lightning impulse voltage and the switching
surge voltage that may be imposed on the cables.

Underground transmission lines shall withstand the dielectric strength tests using the
test methods specified in IEC 60840 or IEC 60502-2 "Electrical tests after installation"
depending on the voltage.

3.8.2 Cables of Underground Transmission Lines

3.8.2.1 Properties of Underground Cables

Cables that shall be used for underground transmission lines.

2. Electrical conductor

Electrical conductors of cables shall have the electric resistance specified in IEC 60228
and shall be stranded wires composed of solid wires, such as annealed copper wire,
annealed aluminium wire, hard-drawn aluminium wire and semi hard-drawn aluminium
wire that satisfy the mechanical characteristics specified in Table 3.32..

Table 3.32
Type of solid 2
Diameter of solid wire Tensile strength (N/mm ) Elongation (%)
wire
No less than 0.10, no more than No less than 15.0
0.28
More than 0.28, no more than 0.29 No less than 20.0
Annealed More than 0.29, no more than 0.45 No less than 196, No less than 20.0
copper wire More than 0.45, no more than 0.70 below (462 - 10.8d) No less than 20.0
More than 0.70, no more than 1.6 No less than 25.0
More than 1.6, no more than 7.0 No less than 30.0
More than 7.0, no more than 16.0 No less than 35.0
Annealed No less than 2.0, no more than 5.2 No less than 10.0
No less than 59, below 98
aluminium wire More than 5.2, no more than 7.0 No less than 20.0
No less than 1.2, no more than 1.3 No less than 159 No less than 1.2
More than 1.3, no more than 1.5 No less than 186 No less than 1.2
More than 1.5, no more than 1.7 No less than 186 No less than 1.3
More than 1.7, no more than 2.1 No less than 182 No less than 1.4
Hard-drawn
More than 2.1, no more than 2.4 No less than 176 No less than 1.5
aluminum wire
More than 2.4, no more than 2.7 No less than 169 No less than 1.5
More than 2.7, no more than 3.0 No less than 166 No less than 1.6
More than 3.0, no more than 3.5 No less than 162 No less than 1.7
More than 3.5, no more than 3.8 No less than 162 No less than 1.8
Page 85 of 282 
 More than 3.8, no more than 4.1 No less than 159 No less than 1.9
More than 4.1, no more than 5.2 No less than 159 No less than 2.0
More than 5.2, no more than 6.6 No less than 155 No less than 2.2
No less than 1.2, no more than 1.3 No less than 98, below 159 No less than 1.2
More than 1.3, no more than 1.5 No less than 98, below 186 No less than 1.2
More than 1.5, no more than 1.7 No less than 98, below 186 No less than 1.3
More than 1.7, no more than 2.1 No less than 98, below 183 No less than 1.4
More than 2.1, no more than 2.4 No less than 98, below 176 No less than 1.5
Semi hard-drawn More than 2.4, no more than 2.7 No less than 98, below 169 No less than 1.5
aluminium wire More than 2.7, no more than 3.0 No less than 98, below 166 No less than 1.6
More than 3.0, no more than 3.5 No less than 98, below 162 No less than 1.7
More than 3.5, no more than 3.8 No less than 98, below 162 No less than 1.8
More than 3.8, no more than 4.1 No less than 98, below 159 No less than 1.9
More than 4.1, no more than 5.2 No less than 98, below 159 No less than 2.0
More than 5.2, no more than 6.6 No less than 98, below 155 No less than 2.2
d: diameter of solid wire (mm)
3. Insulator

A cable shall have an insulator that is a butyl rubber compound, an ethylene propylene
rubber compound or a polyethylene compound and have an electric shielding layer
made of metal provided on the insulated conductor, or shall be a lead-covered cable,
aluminium-covered cable or a cable with some other metal cover.

Note that a cable used in an underwater transmission line specified in Clause 3.9.1 of
this regulation (Underwater Transmission Lines) may not necessarily have the electric
shielding layer made of metal.

Deviation from the above shall be subject to the written approval of NERC

3.8.2.2 Jointing of Underground Cables

Cables shall be jointed using a joint box that conforms to the following requirements:

a. The joint box shall not increase the electric resistance of cables.

b. The joint box shall have the dielectric strength equal to or higher than that of cables.

c. The joint box shall have a sufficient mechanical strength.

d. The joint box shall have a corrosion-free structure.

3.8.2.3 Earthing of Underground Cables and Joint Boxes

Class D earthing work shall be provided on metallic members used for covering cables
for underground transmission lines, metallic parts of joint boxes and metallic parts of

Page 86 of 282 
 protecting devices that house the cables (except for cable support hardware). This
shall not apply to the parts where anticorrosion measures are taken.

3.8.2.4 Prevention of Over-voltage for Underground Cables

If a cable of an underground transmission line could be damaged by over-voltage
generated by a lightning impulse from an overhead transmission line or a high-
frequency surge from a switching operation at a power plant or substation, the following
counter measures shall be taken severally or jointly.

a. Protecting an Insulator of a Cable

i. Combination of earthing of a steel tower for overhead transmission lines with

earthing of the termination joint box structure and the metallic sheath of the
cable

ii. Installation of a Surge Arrester

b. Protecting an anti-corrosion layer

i. Installation of parallel earthing wires

ii. Installation of a protecting device for the anti-corrosion

3.8.2.5 Electric Lines Crossing Waterways

a. The height of an electric line under the most adverse conditions, above the highest
recorded water level, over harbours, rivers and waterways, shall not be less than
that required by the appropriate authorities for physical safety clearance plus a
minimum electrical safety clearance of 3m of 1m per 78 kV or phase to neutral
voltage of the electric line, whichever the greater.

b. The licensee shall at least thirty days and not more than ninety days prior to the
placing of such work serve written notice on the appropriate authorities specifying
the intended use of the works, the voltage of operation and such other information
that the authorities may require him to supply.

c. Every notice served in conformity with Section 3.8.2.9.b shall be accompanied by a

plan of suitable scale indicating the site of the crossing, the location of all supports,
stays, struts, switches, transformers and other apparatus intended to be used.

(4) The authorities may within 21 days of the receipt of such a notice of
intention served under clause 3.6.2.3b serve a counter notice on the licensee -
–

Page 87 of 282 
 (a) objecting to the siting of the works specifying the reason in the counter
notice; and
(b) requiring protective features to be fitted, such features to be specified in the
counter notice.

3.8.2.6 NERC's Decision is Final

Where mutual agreement is not reached the matter shall be referred to NERC, whose
decision shall be final.

3.8.2.7 Proximity to Railway Lines

The provision of clause 3.6.2.3b and 3.8.2.6 shall apply where the licensee intends to
place an electric line, other than a service line, in the proximity of, over or under a rail-
way line.

3.8.2.8 Cables
All cables, whether for A.C. or D.C. and for all voltages, shall be insulated as required
and manufactured in accordance with appropriate Nigerian Standard. Where steel
armouring is employed, it shall be effectively earthed and bonded at all joint boxes so
as to be electrically continuous.

3.8.2.9 Trenching and Protection from Damage

a. The cables shall be laid at a depth of not less than 1m below surface level and in
cases where two or more power cables are laid in the same trench a minimum
distance of 300 mm should be maintained between the cables.

b. To prevent the cables being damaged by stones the cables shall be laid in a bed of
sifted soil or sand and to prevent mechanical damage the cables shall be protected
by inter-locked tiles sufficiently wide to give a minimum of 50 mm on each side of
the cable and laid approximately 150 mm above the cables.

c. The cable route shall be indicated at surface level with cable markers at suitable
intervals, particularly at positions where the cable changes direction.

3.8.2.10 Cables Entering the Ground

Where cables enter or leave the ground they shall be protected from a point at least
half a meter below the ground level to a height above ground as may be considered
necessary.

3.8.2.11 Railway Crossings by Underground Cables

All proposals in respect of railway crossings shall be submitted to the Nigeria railway
Corporation in accordance with Clause 3.8.2.7. All cables shall be drawn into non-
metallic pipes, such as earthenware, fibre, asbestos, which must be laid at a minimum
Page 88 of 282 
 depth of 1.3 m below rail level measured to the top of the highest pipe, and shall be
surrounded by not less than 250 mm of concrete. The pipes shall extend at least 300
mm beyond the sleeper ends and be bushed to prevent chafing and ingress of stones.

3.8.2.12 Road crossings by underground cables

Where cables have to cross under roads, they must be drawn into non-metallic pipes
such as fibre or asbestos. These pipes must be laid at a minimum depth of 1m below
surface of the road measured to the top of the highest pipe and cable tiles shall be laid
as in clause 3.8.2.9 ). The end of the pipes should be packed with a suitable bushing to
avoid chafing and the ingress of stones.

3.8.2.13 Proximity to water and petrol pipes

Cables shall not be laid at a distance of less than 1.0 m from pipes carrying water or
petrol.

3.8.2.14 Street boxes

a. The covers of street boxes shall be so secured that they cannot be opened except
by means of a special appliance and the licensee, shall inspect such boxes from
time to time, for the presence of gas and suitable action shall be taken to check the
influx and accumulation of gas.

b. High voltage lines shall not pass through the same street box as other electric lines
unless they are enclosed in a strong metal casing effectively earthed.

c. Street boxes containing high voltage lines shall not contain water, gas or other
service pipes, or electric lines belonging to another licensee.

3.8.3 Underground Installation of Cables

3.8.3.1 Underground Installation of Cables

a. Classification of Underground Installation
A cable of an underground transmission line shall be installed in conduit systems,
culvert systems or direct burial systems.

b. Installation Methods
i. Conduit systems and culvert systems

Conduit and culvert systems shall be installed in accordance with the

following requirements:

(a) These systems shall be rigid and durable and shall not affect other
adjacent buried objects.

Page 89 of 282 
 (b) Where these systems are buried under roads, they shall withstand the
pressure from vehicles or other heavy objects and shall not affect the
strength of the road.

(c) Buried depth shall be as follows:

(i) The buried depth under a road shall be over 1.0 m.

(ii) The buried depth under a sidewalk shall be over 1.0 m.

ii. Direct Burial Systems

Direct burial systems shall be installed in accordance with the following
requirements:

(a) To protect cables against shock, the direct burial systems shall be
installed using any of the following methods:

(i) Lay or nest underground transmission conductors in durable

troughs and other protectors.

(ii) Use cables with durable insulating covers, such as copper bars
and steel pipes, for underground transmission conductors and
install them by covering the top and the side of the underground
transmission cable with durable plates or conduits.

(b) Buried depth shall be as follows:

(i) The buried depth shall be over 1.2 m in a place where there is a
possibility of receiving pressure from vehicles or other heavy
objects.

(ii) The buried depth shall be over 0.6 m in other places.

3.8.3.2 Indication of Buried Cables

Where underground transmission lines are installed using a direct burial system or
conduit system, they shall be marked in accordance with the following requirements:

Page 90 of 282 
 a. The name of the line, the responsible person and the voltage shall be indicated.

b. Such indications shall be given noticeably with intervals of about 10 m. This shall
not apply to restricted areas or places where the position of the electrical
conductors can be recognized clearly.

3.8.3.3 Structure of Conduits, Culverts and Manholes

a. Structure of a Conduit

A conduit shall have the structure that conforms to the following requirements:

i. A conduit shall withstand the pressure of vehicles and other heavy objects.

ii. A conduit shall be structured so that it is difficult for water to enter it.

iii. A conduit shall have the inside diameter that allows cables to be drawn in
and out smoothly and the inner surface shall be flat and smooth.

iv. The radius of curvature of a curve on the conduit and the length of conduit
between manholes shall be such that the tensile strength and the lateral
pressure applied on cables when they are drawn in are less than the
allowable limit.

b. Structure of a Culvert

A culvert shall have the structure that conforms to the following requirements:

i. A culvert shall have the structure that can withstand the pressure of vehicles
and other heavy objects.

ii. A culvert shall be structured so that water can hardly enter into it.

iii. A culvert shall have the form and dimensions that allow smooth installation
and maintenance work of cables. The tolerable bending radius of cable
shall be taken into consideration particularly at bends and branch points of
the culvert.

iv. If necessary, a drain, a ventilator, lighting, scaffolding for going up and down,
a ladder and other facilities shall be installed.

Page 91 of 282 
 c. Structure of a Manhole

A manhole shall have the structure that conforms to the following requirements:

i. A manhole shall have the structure that can withstand the pressure of
vehicles and other heavy objects.

ii. A lid of a manhole shall be such that people other than operators cannot
open it easily.

iii. A manhole shall be structured so that it is difficult for water to enter it and
water entering it can be removed.

iv. Where a manhole has the size of 1.0 m3 or larger and there is a possibility
that explosive or flammable gas may enter it, the manhole shall be equipped
with a device to diffuse the gas.

v. A manhole shall be structured so that cables can be installed, maintained

and kept functional.

vi. If necessary, facilities for going up and down shall be installed in the
gateway.

vii. If there is a possibility that a manhole lid can be moved by a cable accident,
a chain shall be installed on the lid.

3.8.4 Particulars of Prevention against Underground Electrical Inductive Interference

3.8.4.1 Protection of Underground Telecommunication Lines from Electrical Inductive

Interference
Underground transmission lines with a voltage over 33 kV shall be installed at a
sufficient distance from underground telecommunications lines to avoid causing
interference with communications through the underground telecommunication lines as
a result of leakage current or induction.

3.8.5 Underground Installations at Adjacency to and Crossing with Other Objects

3.8.5.1 Adjacency to and Crossing with Underground Telecommunication Lines

Page 92 of 282 
a. Clearance

Where underground transmission conductors are installed close to or across

underground telecommunication conductors, they shall be installed in accordance
with the following requirements:

i. The clearance between the underground transmission conductors and the

underground telecommunication conductors shall be no less than 0.60 m.

ii. When the clearance mentioned above is less than 0.60m, any of the following
counter measures shall be carried out.

i. Durable fireproof barriers shall be provided between the underground

transmission conductors and the underground telecommunication
conductors.

ii. The underground transmission conductors shall be nested in durable pipes

that are non-flammable or are self-extinguishing and fireproof, and the pipes
shall be installed in such a manner so as not to contact the underground
telecommunication conductors directly.

"Self-extinguishing" means materials that flame in fire and extinguish by

themselves when fire is removed. "Fireproof" means the materials that
flame in fire, but do not spread at least. "Non-flammable" means such
materials as concrete, brick, tile, asbestos cement slate, steel, aluminium,
glass, mortar and other materials that have incombustibility no less than that
of these materials. (The same applies hereafter in this standard.)

d. Alternative Measures

Paragraph a. does not apply in any of the following cases:

i. Where underground telecommunication conductors are communications lines

for power maintenance and are optical fibre cables covered with materials
that are non-flammable or are self-extinguishing and fireproof or optical fibre
cables nested in pipes that are non-flammable or are self-extinguishing and
fireproof,

ii. Where underground telecommunication conductors are installed not to

contact the communications lines for power maintenance directly,

Page 93 of 282 
 iii. Where underground telecommunication conductors are optical fibre cables
covered with materials that are non-flammable or are self-extinguishing and
fireproof or optical fibre cables nested in pipes that are non-flammable or are
self-extinguishing and fireproof, and the responsible person has given the
consent to the installation, or

iv. Where underground transmission conductors have a nominal voltage below

132 kV and are installed with the approval of the person responsible for
underground telecommunication conductors, and the clearance between the
two is 0.1m or more.

3.8.5.2 Adjacency to and Crossing with Underground Distribution Lines

Where underground transmission conductors are installed close to or across
underground distribution conductors, the clearance between the two shall not be less
than 0.3m.

This shall not apply in any of the following cases:

a. Where each underground electrical conductor is:

i. Covered with materials that are self-extinguishing and fireproof, or

ii. Nested in durable pipes that are self-extinguishing and fireproof.

b. Where either of those underground electrical conductors is covered with non-

flammable materials

c. Where either of those underground electrical conductors is nested in durable pipes

that are non-flammable

d. Where durable fire-resistant barriers are provided between those underground

electrical conductors

e. Where those electrical conductors are installed close to or across each other in a
manhole

Page 94 of 282 
3.8.5.3 Adjacency to and Crossing with Other Underground Objects
a. Adjacency to and Crossing with Gas Pipes and Oil Pipes

Where underground transmission conductors are installed close to or across

pipes that contain flammable or toxic fluid and the clearance between the two is
no more than 1.0 m, the underground transmission conductors shall be housed
in durable pipes that are non-flammable or are self-extinguishing and fireproof,
and such pipes shall be installed not to contact the pipes containing flammable
or toxic fluid, excluding the case where durable fire-resistant barriers are
provided between the underground electrical conductors and the pipes.

b. Adjacency to and Crossing with Water Pipes

Where underground transmission conductors are installed close to or across

water pipes, steam pipes or the like and the clearance between the two is not
more than 0.30 m, the underground transmission conductors shall be housed in
durable pipes that are non-flammable or are self-extinguishing and fireproof,
excluding the case where durable fire-resistant barriers are provided between
the underground electrical conductors and the pipes. This shall not apply to
such cases where the water pipes, steam pipes or the like are non-flammable or
are covered with non-flammable materials.

c. Placing electric cable below ground with respect to telecommunication

lines

Where telecommunication lines are placed below ground in any street and the
licensee desires to place his works below ground in the same street they shall
be placed on the opposite side of the street to the telecommunication line
unless the Telecommunications Service Provider expressly authorizes in writing
a relaxation of this requirement. Any such relaxation shall be subject to such
conditions as to the provision of minimum separating distance and protective
features which at its discretion he deems it desirable and necessary to impose
for the protection of the telecommunication cable.

d. Exchange of plans

Where it appears that works of the licensee or telecommunication lines have

been placed below ground, the licensee or the Telecommunications service
provider may on Written application require the licensee or the Nigerian
communications Commission (NCC), as the case may be, to furnish a plan of a
suitable scale indicating the nature, course and depth of any existing works
placed below ground. Any request made under the provision of this clause, shall
be complied with within thirty days of the original application. Plans shall be
Page 95 of 282 
 black or coloured lines on a white background having the true and magnetic
north legibly marked.

e. Breaking up streets

i. A licensee shall not break up streets for the purpose of placing new works,
including works in replacement of existing works, unless they shall have
served notice of their intention on the responsible administrative authority for
the repair of any street to be broken in addition to the local authority.

ii. Every notice required to be served under the provision of this clause above
shall be served at least thirty days but not more than ninety days prior to the
date on which it is intended to break up any street or streets, and shall be
accompanied by a plan of a suitable scale indicating the course, nature,
width and depth of all intended excavations and the purpose thereof.

iii. The local authority or the road authority responsible for normal maintenance
of the street or both may within 21 days of receipt of a notice served under
the provisions of clause (e.i) serve a counter notice on the licensees
requiring them to amend the scheme the reason thereof being stated in the
counter notice.

iv. Where no counter notice is served on the licensee as provided for the works
shall be deemed to be approved and it shall be lawful for the licensee to
proceed with the works on the expiration of the term specified in the notice
served under clause (e.i) above.

v. Streets shall only be broken up in strict conformity with the original theme or
any amendment thereof required by counter notice served under Section
(e.iii).

vi. Where the licensees are of the opinion that the requirements of a counter
notice served under clause (e.iii) are unreasonable and they are unable to
reach an amicable settlement with the local authority or the road authority or
both, the matter shall be referred to the NERC whose decision shall be final
and binding on both parties.

f. Licensee liable for reinstatement of streets broken up

The road authority will reinstate any street broken up by the licensee and
charge them the cost of so doing.

i. Location of cable, boxes ., to be agreed

Prior to placing in position in any street, the location of such cables or

other works to be placed below ground, and of any street boxes or works

Page 96 of 282 
 to be placed above ground, shall be approved by the local authority or
where the local authority does not maintain or repair the street, the road
authority.

ii. Protection of a water authority

Where a piped water supply is provided in any area in which the licensee
proposes to place any new works, the water authority not being a local
authority, shall be deemed, for the purposes of this Part to be a local
authority, and the provisions of clauses (e) and f(a) above together with
the following special conditions, shall apply–

(i) on receipt of the notices, required to be served under the provisions of

clause (e), the Water Authority shall within twenty-one (21) days,
furnish a plan of a suitable scale indicating the course, depth and any
other relevant information relative to water mains likely to be affected
by the proposal. Where no plan is furnished by the Water Authority
within the said twenty-one days it shall be deemed that no mains exist

(ii) on receipt of the plan referred to in clause b(i) above hereof the
licensee shall take such steps as may be necessary to ensure that, in
placing their works, the separating distance between the respective
works is either not less than 1m or where this separating distance is
impracticable such lesser distance as may be mutually agreed to in
writing by the respective parties.
(iii) in the event of any differences or dispute an arising between the
parties the matter shall be settled in the manner provided for in clause
e(vi) above

a. Works affecting Telecommunications Service Providers t

(1) Where the licensee intends to place any new high voltage works within 150
meters of any telecommunication or telephone line operated by the
Telecommunications Service Provider, the licensee shall at least thirty days and
not more than ninety days prior to the placing of such works serve written notice
on the Telecommunications service provider specifying the intended use of the
works, the maximum power it is intended to handle, its voltage of operation and
such other information the a Telecommunications service provider may require
the licensee to furnish.

(2) Every notice served in conformity with clause a(1) above shall be
accompanied by a plan of a suitable scale indicating the course, nature and
depth of all intended excavations, switches, transformers, and other apparatus
intended to be used.

Page 97 of 282 
(3) The Telecommunications service provider may within 21 days of the receipt
of a notice of intention served under clause a(1) above hereof serve a counter
notice on the licensee requiring them to-
(a) re-route their works;
(b) provide protective features to be specified in the counter notice between his
works and the intended works;
(c) provide guarding between his works and those of the licensee which
guarding he may itself provide at the expense of the licensee if he so
advises the licensee in the counter notice.

b. Lines of other licensees

The provisions of clause a shall apply where the licensee intends to erect works
in the proximity of other licensee's lines or works and for the purpose of this
clause the Telecommunications service provider shall be deemed to mean
owners of the other undertaking.

c. Lines crossing or erected on railway or navigable waterway

Where it is intended to erect any works along or across whether under or over
any railways or a navigable waterway, notices similar to the provisions of clause
a shall apply for the purpose of this clause.

d. Commissioning of new projects

(1) A licensee shall not bring new projects into use until the projects have been
inspected and if necessary tested by an inspecting engineer to determine
compliance with this Regulation, in particular the earth test results shall comply
with the provisions of National Code of Practice on earthing .

(2) At least fourteen days prior to the date on which it is desired to bring into use
any projects aforesaid, the licensee shall serve notice on the NERC r Services
sending a copy to the area, specifying the date on which the projects or any
part thereof will be completed and ready for inspection. Every such notice shall
be accompanied by-
(a) a plan and description of the projects as erected;
(b) copies of any notices and plans served under the provisions of clauses e,
f(b), a, b, and c.
(c) copies of any counter notices received.

(3) On receipt of a notice under the provisions of clause d(2) above the
inspecting engineer shall inspect the relevant projects and if he is satisfied that
there is compliance with be regulations to certify in writing sending the original
certificate to the licensee and a copy to the NERC , Services: Provided that any
certificate issued under the provisions of this regulation shall not be deemed to
relieve the licensee of any of their obligations under the provisions of the
Principal Act or of these Regulations.

Page 98 of 282 
 (4) On the representations of the licensee that the commissioning of the new
projects is imperative and urgent and cannot be delayed, NERC if he is satisfied
that there is urgency may in tis absolute discretion by writing under tis hand
authorize the licensee to commission the projects prior to inspection:
(a) Provided always that any projects so commission herein Provided for
shall be subjected to inspection and test not later than three months
following the date they were commissioned.
(b) provided further that where the inspection and tests disclose that the
projects do not comply with the requirements of these regulations, any
defects so disclosed shall ht: made good within 21 working days (twenty
one days) of the date of the inspection tailing which the projects shall be
taken out of use and remain unused until the defects are remedied to the
satisfaction of the Inspecting Engineer

3.9 Special Transmission Lines

3.9.1 Underwater Transmission Lines
Underwater transmission lines shall be installed in a place where they will not be
damaged so that they will not be exposed to risk, and shall conform to the following
requirements:

a. Cables shall be used for the electrical conductors.

b. Cables shall be housed in durable pipes or cables armoured with metal wires with a
mechanical strength not less than that of galvanized steel wires with a diameter of 6
mm shall be used for underwater transmission lines.

3.9.2 Transmission Lines Over Bridges and Others

i. Transmission lines installed on the side or on the lower surface of bridges shall be
installed in accordance with the following requirements:

i. Cables shall be used for the electrical conductors.

ii. Cables shall be housed in durable pipes or troughs, or shall be installed so

that nobody can touch the cables.

iii. Class A earthing work shall be provided to the metallic parts of tubes and
other protectors that contain cables, metallic electrical conductor joint boxes,
and metallic members to be used for covering the cables (Class D earthing
work be provided where they are installed so that nobody shall touch them),

Page 99 of 282 
 except where corrosion prevention measures are provided or the electric
resistance to the ground is not more than 10.

iv. Where electrical lines over bridges are installed close to or across other
facilities, the clearance between them shall be not less than the values
specified in Table 3.33.

Table 3.33

Other facilities Clearance

High, medium or low voltage circum-structural conductors,
15cm
telecommunication conductors, water pipes and gas pipes
Other facilities (excluding overhead and rooftop electrical
30cm
conductors)

ii. Particularities of Earthing of Various Classes

i. Earthing arrangements and protective conductors

The earthing electrode, earthing conductor and protecting earthing

conductor shall conform to IEC 60364-5-54 (1980-01) and National Code of
Practice on earthing. The minimum diameter of protective earthing
conductors shall conform to Table 139-2 according to the sectional area of
the phase conductors of the facility.

iii. Classification of Earthing Work

Earthing work shall be classified into Class A, Class B, Class C and Class D,
and each resistance value to earth is listed in Table 57-2.

Table 3.2 Classification of earthing work

Classification of Resistance to
Conditions for easement of resistance value
earthing work earth
Class A 10 or less
In cases where voltage to earth of a low-voltage
230 electrical circuit exceeds 330kV due to power contact
Class B
 or
I* 1
between the medium-voltage electrical circuit and the
low-voltage electrical circuit of the transformer, when an

Page 100 of 282 
 less earth leakage breaker that cuts off the electrical circuit
600
within 1 second is installed,  or less. However, if
I *1
a calculated value becomes less than 5, it shall not
be necessary to obtain resistance less than 5, and if a
calculated value becomes more than 10, it shall not
be necessary to obtain resistance more than 10.
In the case where earthing arises in a low-voltage
electrical circuit, when an earth leakage breaker that
Class C 10 or less acts within 0.5 seconds is installed, the resistance
value shall be 500 or less.
In the case where earthing arises in a low-voltage
electrical circuit, when an earth leakage breaker that
Class D 100 or less
acts within 0.5 seconds is installed, the resistance
value shall be 500 or less.
[Notes]
*1 Single-line earth fault current (I) of an electrical circuit in the medium-voltage side in Class B earthing may conform to
an actual value or either of the following values.

Page 101 of 282 
Chapter 4: Injection Substation Installations
4.1 Civil Works
4.1.1 Civil Design
The Design of civil works for Injection Substations shall be based on the following
specifications: All materials used shall be in accordance with approved engineering
designs and specifications in conformity with relevant extant Nigerian Industrial
Standards and Codes.

Geotechnical Investigations shall be carried out on all Injection Substation sites. The
report of the soil tests shall form the basis for all related civil design works for
Injection Substation construction.

a. Foundations: The Design and construction of Injection Substation foundations

shall be in accordance with BS 8004 Specifications based on the results of
Geotechnical investigations for the site.
b. Concrete Structures: concrete structural works shall be in accordance with BS
8110.
c. Structural Steel Works: The design, fabrication and erection of structural
steelworks shall be in accordance with BS 5950.
d. Water Retaining Structures (Embankment): The Design and construction of
water retaining Structures/embankments shall be in accordance with BS 8007.
e. Block Work/Brickwork: The design and Construction of block work/brickwork
shall be in accordance with the requirements of BS 5628.
f. Sound Insulation: All roof and wall cladding systems including ventilators,
openings, windows, doors, etc., shall be designed and constructed such that the
noise level emissions at the site boundary do not exceed 60 dB.

4.1.2 Site Preparation

The design, site preparation and execution of all related civil works as it affects the
construction of Injection Substations shall be in accordance with the following
guidelines:

4.1.2.1 Earthworks
Earthworks shall include, but is not limited to, the clearing of the site, the supply and
compaction of fill materials, excavation and compaction of backfill materials for
foundation, access road construction, drainage, trenches and final gravelling as
specified in the National Building Code (NBC).

Page 102 of 282 
4.1.2.2 Access Road
Access road to Injection Substation sites shall measure, and not be less than 7.3 m
wide from any adjoining/existing public road with adequate clearance for
manoeuvring of heavy-duty vehicles.

Within substation fencing, roads to be provided for access along with car parking lot
shall have capacity to accommodate a minimum of five cars with adequate
clearance from installed equipment and building. Layout of the roads shall be based
on layout drawing for the substation. Parking areas shall be provided for site
personnel and visitors as per layout drawing. Adequate turning space for vehicles
shall be provided and bend radius shall be set accordingly.

All access roads, up to the control room building, shall be constructed to have a
minimum load-bearing capacity that will support the transportation of heavy-duty
equipment up to 100MT. All access roads shall be provided with paving stones and
clearly demarcated with side kerbs. The roadside kerbs used for the construction of
all access roads shall be of a minimum thickness of 80 mm with compressive
strength of not less than 450 kg/cm2.

4.1.2.4 Property Fencing

All Injection Substations shall be fenced to prevent unauthorized access. The fence
shall be constructed using either galvanized steel chain link or vibrated block work.

All perimeter fencing shall be designed to meet critical loading conditions peculiar to
the site under consideration such as to withstand the prevailing wind speed within
the environment.

4.1.2.5 Galvanized Steel Chain Link

Where the perimeter fence and the entrance gates are made of galvanized steel
chain-link fencing and galvanized steel pipes as may be specified in the General
Specification for materials and workmanship, they shall comply with the provisions of
this regulation. The height of the fence and the gates shall not be less than 2.50 m
vertical with a further 0.5 m extended outwards from the site at 450 on to which 3
numbered rows of barbed wire shall be fixed. The midsections of the fence shall be
kept taut by the introduction of steel stiffeners.

Fence posts shall be of galvanized tubular steel of diameter 50 mm for intermediate

posts and 75 mm for angle and tensioned posts, 3.0 m apart, on the average
centre.. The fence posts shall have concrete foundation projecting 100 mm above

Page 103 of 282 
 the finished laterite level but flushing with the top level of the crush rock. The top of
the concrete foundation of the steel pipes shall be cambered to prevent water
stagnations that might lead to rusting.

The vehicular and pedestrian gates shall be plastic coated chain link with galvanized
steel frames/posts.

The widths of the vehicular and pedestrian gates in fully opened position shall be 5.0
m and 1.0 m respectively.

4.1.2.6 Vibrated Block Wall

Where the perimeter fence and the entrance gates are made of vibrated blocks,
228.6 mm vibrated blocks shall be used for fenced work. The height of the fence and
the gates shall not be less than 1.90 m vertical with a capping and fence wire
finishing. The midsections of the fence shall be maintained with concrete
reinforcement 3.0 m apart on the average centres.

The vehicular and pedestrian gates shall be of plastic coated, galvanized or

enamelled-steel sheet with galvanized steel frames/posts.

The widths of the vehicular and pedestrian gates in fully opened position shall be 5.0
m and 1.0 m respectively.

4.1.2.7 Areas Requiring Fencing

Fencing shall be provided for the following areas:

a. Complete outdoor substation including Power transformer area.

b. Gates shall be provided for men and machines/equipment to be taken into and
out of the substation.

c. Capacitor bank cage, which shall be part of the capacitor bank installed.
Wherever necessary, anti-reptile fixture/arrangement shall be provided along
with fencing.

d. Fencing of auxiliary Substation Transformer.

Page 104 of 282 
4.1.2.8 Electric Fencing
Where Electric Fencing is installed as part of security measures to prevent
unauthorized entry and access into substation premises, it shall be mandatory that
clearly marked Warning Signs be displayed within visible range of not more than six
metres apart on all sides of the perimeter fencing.

The installation of electric fencing shall be in accordance with guidelines on electric

fencing issued by NERC Guidelines on Electric Fences Version 1

4.1.2.9 Electric Fencing Energizer

Where Electric Fencing is installed as part of security measures, to prevent
unauthorized entry and access, the pulse voltage released by the power energizer
shall not in any way cause life threatening injury to unauthorized persons trying to
gain entry or access into substation premises and shall be in accordance with
IEC60335-2-76.

4.1.3 Control Room Building

The control room building design shall take the following into consideration:

a. The suitability of the structure to withstand possible major hazard events as

defined in NERC Health & Safety Code, as amended.
b. The layout and the arrangement of switchgears, tripping units, etc are such
as to ensure effective ergonomic operation of the indoor and outdoors
equipment for normal operations and emergency situations including the
provision of emergency exits. More than one emergency exit shall be
provided for a control room exceeding 10 m in length.

The construction of control room building shall conform with the requirements of the
National Building Code. The structural design and details of the control room
building shall be able to guarantee the following stability conditions:

i. All possible combination of dead and service loads

ii. Wind loads
iii. Natural hazards due to seismic activities and flooding
iv. Fire and thermal loading
Page 105 of 282 
 The minimum floor area for the control room building shall not be less than 200 m2,
which may be increased at the time of detailed engineering design to meet project
requirements.

An open workspace of a minimum of 1.2 m shall be provided between the wall and
the switchgears to allow for movement and access as well as maintenance.

The building design shall also meet the following requirements:

i. Provide for easy access and maintenance of the equipment with,

wherever required, fire resisting and or retarding materials for walls,
ceilings and doors.
ii. Adopt use of materials that shall prevent dust accumulation.
iii. Individual structural members of the building frames shall be
designed for the worst combination of forces such as bending
moments, axial force, shear force and torsion.
iv. Permissible building loading stress shall be in accordance with the
National Building Code.
v. The Control Room building lighting shall be designed in accordance
with the requirements of IEC 60364.
vi. The Control Room building auxiliary services such as Heating,
Ventilation and Air Conditioning Systems, fire prevention, detection
and control systems and all other miscellaneous services shall be
designed in accordance with the requirements specified in the
National Building Code.

4.1.4 Equipment Plinth

The construction of the equipment plinths shall take into consideration the site
geotechnical investigation report and shall be designed to meet the load bearing
capacity that will adequately support the weight of the intended equipment to be
installed in the substation.

In addition, the design and construction of the equipment plinth shall accommodate
the equipment manufacturer’s specifications.

The power transformer plinth shall be of a minimum horizontal distance of 11.2 m

from the control room.

Page 106 of 282 
4.1.4.1 Plinth Filling
Plinth Filling shall be carried out with approved materials in layers not exceeding 150
mm watered and compacted with mechanical compaction machine or hard-tempers
where mechanical compaction is not possible. The compacted surface shall be
properly shaped, trimmed and consolidated.

4.1.4.2 Oil Sump

The oil sump provided shall be of a minimum depth of 1 m and width of 0.6 m.

4.1.5 Drainage
The entire substation area shall be provided with adequate drainage facilities to
prevent flooding and accumulation of water.

Building drains shall be provided for the collection and evacuation of storm water
from the roof and the adjoining facilities. The design of drain collectors shall be
adequate to effectively evacuate storm water from the substation.

4.1.6 Cable Trenches

Cable trenches shall be constructed for use in Injection Substations. The separation
between cables and their depths shall depend on the following factors:

a. Operating Voltages

b. Ambient temperature

c. Cable design temperature

d. Soil Resistivity

e. Heat sources in the vicinity of cables

f. Cable type

g. Method of earthing

h. Load cycle

Cable trenches shall be of a minimum depth of 1.0 m except under the switchgear
where the trench shall be of a depth of 1.2 m and a minimum width of 800 mm for
cable trench and switchgear panels;

Page 107 of 282 
 Manhole capable of permitting bending radius of 3.0 m shall be provided along the
trench route prior to cable entry into the control room.

Trenches must be watertight and must not be connected to the outside drainage
system.

Trench covers must be suitably constructed to support pedestrian traffic. The covers
must be divided into sections of maximum of 1.0 m lengths, each weighing not more
than 20 kg.

The trench cover when laid across the trench shall be flush with the surrounding
floor level.

4.1.7 Security Post(s)

The Security Post shall be constructed in accordance with the requirements
specified in Clause 4.1.1.

4.1.8 Graveling
The Injection Substation active switchyard area shall be demarcated using roadside
kerbs and gravelled with 25 mm aggregate chippings to a minimum depth of 150
mm.

4.1.9 Landscaping
Landscaping shall be carried out in non-active areas of Injection Substation.

Non-active areas within the Injection Substation shall be landscaped for proper
levelling, paving, sloping, consolidation and grassing.

4.2 Electromechanical Works

Electromechanical works to be carried out at the Injection Substation shall include, but not
limited to the following:

4.2.1 Substation Design

Page 108 of 282 
 Substation design shall be carried out in accordance with loading design
parameters, calculations, site survey, engineering design layout, earthing and
bonding requirements, and equipment specification for indoor and or outdoor types.

4.2.2 Equipment Layout

Equipment layout design for Injection Substations shall take into considerations the
type of usage i.e. indoor/outdoor type and shall have enough spacing for operators
to install, operate and move their equipment safely.

Equipment shall be located such that any other equipment may be removed within
the layout with the remaining equipment in service and under load. A passageway of
at least 2500 mm wide shall be allowed for transformers and 1500 mm wide for the
high voltage and low voltage boards.

4.2.2.1 Indoor Switchgears

Indoor switchgears shall be housed in well laid out buildings.

Materials, equipment and methods used in the manufacture of indoor switchgears

shall conform to the requirements of the following standards:

a. Switchgear and control gear – IEC 60694, IEC 60298, IEC 62271-200, IEC
60529.
b. Circuit Breaker; IEC 62271 – 100
c. Isolating and earthing switches – IEC 62271-102
d. Current Transformer – IEC 60185
e. Voltage Transformer – IEC 60186
f. Relays – IEC 60215

The LV and HV switchgear should be located near the door.

A clear passageway of at least 1.0 m wide shall be allowed from each item of
switchgear to the access door.

4.2.3 Busbar/Bay Arrangements

The Injection Substation busbar/bay arrangement shall be of single or double busbar

arrangement constructed with galvanized steel channels or pre-stressed reinforced

Page 109 of 282 
 concrete poles of adequate sizes that shall give adequate ground to line clearance
of not less than 4.2 m.

4.2.4 Primary Equipment

Active switchyard area in the Injection Substation shall have the following primary
equipment installed:

4.2.4.1 Transformers
Transformers to be installed in Injection Substations shall consist of the following:

4.2.4.1.1 Power Transformers

The power transformer shall conform in all respect to highest standards of

engineering design, workmanship and latest revision of relevant standard.

Power transformers to be installed in an Injection Substation shall meet the following

minimum requirements.

i. The standards shall cover the design, engineering, manufacture, testing,

supply, delivery and performance.

ii The range of capacity shall include 2.5 MVA and up to 30 MVA, 33/11 kV.
Nominal voltage

iii The power transformer shall be double copper-wound, three-phase, oil-immersed

with the minimum of ONAN cooling system, and fitted with on-load tap changers for
7.5 MVA transformers and above.

Iv The system operating conditions shall conform with to the provisions of the Grid
Code, and Distribution Code and IEC 60076 (All Parts).

v. The power transformer and any supporting structures shall be

adequately packaged and sealed against water ingress.
vi. The power transformer shall conform with the standards of
engineering design, workmanship, maintainability and the extant
standards relevant to the areas listed below:

Page 110 of 282 
S/No.  Subject  Standard 
i. Power transformers –  IEC 60076 – 1 
Part 1: General 
ii. Power transformers –  IEC 60076 – 2 
Part  2:  Temperature  rise  for  liquid‐immersed 
transformers 
iii. Power transformers –  IEC 60076 – 3 
Part 3: 
Insulation  levels,  dielectric  tests  and  external 
clearances in air 
iv. Power transformers –  IEC 60076 – 4 
Part 4: 
Guide to the lightning impulse and 
switching impulse testing – 
Power transformers and reactors 
v. Power transformers –  IEC 6 60076 – 5 
Part 5: 
Ability to withstand short circuit 
vi. Power transformers –  IEC 60076 – 6 
Part 6: Reactors 
vii. Power transformers –  IEC 60076 – 7 
Part  7:  Loading  guide  for  oil‐immersed  power   
transformers 
viii. Power transformers –  IEC 60076 – 8 
Part 8: Application guide 
ix. Power transformers –  IEC 60076 – 10 
Part 10‐1: 
Determination of sound levels – 
Application guide 
x. Power transformers –  IEC 60076 – 13 
Part 13: 
Self‐protected liquid‐filled transformers 
xi. Power transformers –  IEC 60076 – 14  
Part  14:  Design  and  application  of  liquid‐immersed 
power transformers using 
high‐temperature insulation materials 

The power transformer shall be capable of supplying its rated power continuously under
ambient temperature conditions without the temperature rise of the top oil exceeding
500C. The ambient temperature conditions are as follows:

i. Maximum ambient temperature 500C

ii. Maximum daily average ambient temperature 350C

Page 111 of 282 
The power transformer may be overloaded during emergency up to 150% of its
continuous rating in accordance with IEC 60076-1

The power transformer tap changer (on-load) shall be suitable to compensate for
system voltage variation of ±5% maintained at nominal tap position 33/11kV voltage
ratio.

Vector group of the 11/0.415kV distribution transformers shall be Dyn11 and Dyn1 for
33/11 Kv, 2.5MVA capacity and above in accordance with IEC 60076 – 1.

The power transformer to be installed in an Injection Substation shall be of such

capacity that it has taken into consideration the suppression of harmonic voltages
especially the 3rd, 5th and 7th harmonics.

The power transformer for Injection Substations shall be equipped with bushing current
transformers suitable for protection and metering purposes.

4.2.4.1.2 Voltage Transformers (VTs)

Voltage transformers for Injection Substations shall be of indoor/outdoor, wound type

and shall conform to with the requirements of IEC 61869-3.

The secondary voltage shall be 110 Volts (phase to phase) at an operating

frequency of 50Hz±2.5%.

The voltage transformers shall be suitable for base mounting on steel channel
structure.

Injection Substation voltage transformers shall be tested in accordance with the

provisions of IEC61869-1.

4.2.4.1.3 Current Transformers (CTs)

Current transformers for Injection Substation shall conform to with the requirements
of IEC 61869-1, 2 and suitable for base mounting on steel channel structure.

Double-ratio current transformers may be of the series-parallel primary type and

shall be capable of meeting specified accuracy requirements when operating from
the full secondary winding.

Wound type current transformers, other than bar-type primary, shall be equipped
with primary bypass devices for protecting the windings against high-voltage surges.

Bushing current transformers shall be of the multi-ratio type.

The insulating materials used for the construction of current transformers shall
conform to IEC xxx.

Page 112 of 282 
 Injection Substation current transformers shall be tested in accordance with the
provisions of IEC61869-1, 2.

4.2.4.1.4 Station Service (Auxiliary) Transformers

For Injection Substations, 33/0.415kV station service transformers shall be installed.

The station service transformer shall be of a typical distribution transformer with
adequate capacity to meet the auxiliary load requirements of the station.

The station service transformer shall meet the requirements of IEC60076-1.

The positioning and installation of the station service transformer shall be adequately
provided for in the Injection Substation Layout and minimum safety clearance for
operations and maintenance shall be observed.

4.1.4.2 Switch Gears

The design, manufacture, assemblage, installation, testing and commissioning of all
33kV and 11kV switch gears in an Injection Substation shall conform to the
requirements of IEC 62271 and they shall be capable of continuous operation under
a daily average ambient temperature range from 25oC to 50oC.

4.2.4.2.5 Circuit Breakers

Switchgears for indoor and outdoor operations shall meet the following conditions as
specified below:

4.2.4.2.5.1 Indoor Circuit Breakers

The design, manufacture, assemblage, installation, testing and

commissioning of all 33kV and 11kV indoor switch gears shall allow for high
voltage testing of the extensible busbar section and bays while the other
busbar section and bays are in operation.

All grounding systems, special tools and tackles, operations and

maintenance manuals from Original Equipment Manufacturers (OEMs)
required for erection, operation, testing, maintenance and commissioning of
indoor switch gears for use in Injection Substations shall be provided and
shall be in English Language.

All indoor switchgear for Injection Substations shall be of the extensible metal
clad, compartmentalized, air insulated, and draw out type complying with the
requirements of IEC 62271-200.

A set of three phase-insulated busbars shall be provided for the switchgear,

which shall comply with the requirements of IEC 62271. The busbars shall be
clad with solid insulation. The insulating material used shall be capable of
withstanding the heating effects of the rated short time short-circuit current
without damage or deterioration.

Page 113 of 282 
Non-hygroscopic and non-flammable materials shall be used for the
manufacture of switchgear equipment and apparatus. Insulating materials for
switchgears shall have a high resistance to tracking. Switchgears shall be
installed in Injection Substation building with a cable basement and mounted
on a concrete floor.

4.2.4.2.5.2 Outdoor Circuit Breakers

The design, manufacture, assemblage, installation, testing and

commissioning of all 33kV and11kV outdoor switch gears shall allow for high
voltage testing of the extensible busbar section and bays while the other
busbar section and bays are in operation.

All grounding systems, special tools and tackles, operations and

maintenance manuals from Original Equipment Manufacturers (OEMs)
required for erection, operation, installation, testing, maintenance and
commissioning of outdoor switch gears for use in Injection Substations shall
be provided and shall be in English language.

The mounting height of the Circuit Breaker live part shall not be less than
2.5m measured from the plinth level. The operating characteristics shall
comply with IEC 62271-100, 200.

The circuit breaker arc interrupter unit may be of vacuum, SF6 gas type or
any other approved type based on innovation in technology. The SF6
breakers using the SF6 gas shall be handled in accordance with the
procedures specified in IEC 62271-4.

Circuit breakers manufactured using materials adjudged to be of

environmental concern unfriendly as applicable under the by the Nigeria
Enviromental Laws NASREA shall not be acceptable.

4.2.4.2.5.3 Disconnectors/Grounding Switches

The design and installation of disconnectors and grounding switches shall be

in accordance with the requirements of IEC 62271-102.

Disconnectors/Grounding Switches shall be capable of performing the

functions of opening and grounding of circuits. No re-strike voltage is allowed
under any interrupting conditions.

The main blade and grounding switch contacts shall be self-aligning and self-
wiping contacts. Fixed contacts shall be capable of preventing contact
burning and pitting under fault conditions.

The current-carrying path of disconnectors shall not be through any spring.

The contacts shall maintain continuous positive contact pressure under

Page 114 of 282 
closed conditions. The material used for contacts shall be such that there will
be no irritation of contact metals after 1,200 open/close switching operations.

The blades of Disconnectors and Grounding Switches and Grounding shall

be of good conducting materials or alloy materials for carrying the specified
continuous and short-time currents and shall be connected by welding,
bolted and riveted if attached to castings.

The support or mounting bases of the disconnector switches shall be of

galvanized metal members of sufficient strength and stiffness to prevent
deflection when mounted and operated on support structures.

The operating mechanisms of the disconnectors and grounding switches

shall be capable of effecting a smooth and thoroughly controlled movement
throughout the entire opening and closing cycles. All rods, shafts, pipes
linkages, connectors, operating levers, supports and fittings shall show no
noticeable stress and deflections.

Disconnectors and grounding switches shall be provided with embossed- or

stamped-metal indicators on the vertical operating rod showing when the
switch is open or closed. The indicators shall be approximately 250 mm high
and 30 mm wide, the “closed” indicator painted red and the “open” indicator
painted green. The indicators shall be mounted at normal eye level and
positioned so that the appropriate indicator directly faces the operator when
he is in a normal position for operating the switch.

The non-current carrying part of the disconnectors shall be solidly earthed as

well as the grounding switches.

4.2.4.2.5.4 Bypass Isolators

Protective devices shall be installed for electrical safety in accordance with

the requirements of IEC 62128-1, 2, 3.

Bypass Isolator shall be installed between the main bus and the reserved
bus and / or circuit breakers to allow for safe maintenance without loss of
power to the adjourning circuit.

All protective devices associated with the bypassed circuit breaker must be
transferred to an adjoining circuit breaker in line with the same circuit so as
not to leave the circuit unprotected.

4.2.4.2.5.5 Lightning Arresters

Lightning or surge arrester devices shall be installed to protect all

substations, intersection of overhead lines and underground cables from
lightning and switching surges. The device shall be effectively grounded at its
location in accordance with the requirement of IEC 60099.

Page 115 of 282 
4.2.4.3 Compensators
Compensators such as Static VAR Compensator or Dynamic Voltage Restorer shall
be installed on distribution network to ensure and guarantee the quality of power
supply at locations where the line voltage drop is below the allowable nominal
values.

4.2.4.3.1 Static Voltage Ampere Reactive (VAR) Compensators

Static VAr Compensator shall be installed on medium voltage distribution lines and
at large industrial load points to compensate for reactive power necessary for power
quality improvement of the network in accordance with the requirements of the
Distribution Code and IEC 61954.

4.2.4.3.2 Dynamic Voltage Restorers

Dynamic Voltage Restorers or Series Voltage Booster device shall be installed to
mitigate against voltage sags, spikes, harmonics and in-voltage variations in
accordance with the requirements of IEC 61400.

4.2.4.4 Capacitors
Capacitors shall be installed to compensate the inductance of long distance
transmission / distribution lines where the parameters of the line drop below the
acceptable nominal value as specified in the Grid and Distribution Codes.

4.2.4.4.1 Shunt Capacitors

Shunt capacitors installed in the Injection Substations shall be indoor/ outdoor. Each
capacitor unit shall be designed, rated, manufactured, and tested and shall meet the
requirement of IEC60871.

Shunt capacitor banks shall be properly fenced out with wire gauze chain link and
solidly grounded.

4.2.4.4.2 Series Capacitors

Series Capacitors shall be installed to compensate the inductance of long distance
distribution lines where the parameters of the line drop below the acceptable
nominal value as specified in IEC 60143-1.

4.2.5 Secondary Equipment

Active switchyards area in the injection substation shall have the following
secondary equipment installed: 

4.2.5.1 Interposing Current Transformers

Interposing current transformer are low-tension transformers used to balance the
secondary output from the primary high-tension current transformer for purposes of
providing correct secondary current input for protective relay operations.

Interposing current transformer shall be installed to match the secondary current

rating of the protective relay and the measuring instruments where there are
differences.

Page 116 of 282 
4.2.5.2 Relays
All relays used in Injection Substations shall conform to with the requirements of IEC
60255.  

4.3.5.2.1 Differential Relays

Differential relays to provide differential protection within a restricted zone of the
power network, shall be installed in all injection power transformers installed within a
distribution network from 7.5 MVA and above.

4.3.5.2.2 Overcurrent Relays

Overcurrent relays shall be installed on all feeder lines of a distribution Injection
Substation and transformers to protect the network from overload condition and
overcurrent fault.

4.3.5.2.3 Earth Fault Relays

Earth Fault Relay devices shall be installed on all feeder lines of a distribution
Injection Substation and transformers to protect the network from all earth or ground
fault.

4.3.5.2.4 Buchholz Relays

Buchholz Relay devices installed primarily to protect Injection Substation power
transformers from internal faults that may lead to rapid pressure build up within the
transformer as a result of excessive rise in oil temperature and winding temperature.
It shall be installed on all Injection Substation power transformers.

4.2.5.3 Control Panels

Control panels housing the relays, control and signal devices shall be installed within
the control room of the Injection Substation. Control Panel shall be installed at a
minimum distance of 1.0 m from any obstacle or surrounding walls for easy access,
protection scheme installation and maintenance.

4.2.5.3.1 Display Units

Display units shall be such that it is sufficient to indicate all switchgear status, power
flow on-line, annunciate alarms, protection relay operations, with active visual and
audible alarm systems as part of distribution automation (DA).

4.2.5.3.2 Protection Panels

Protection panel housing all protection auxiliary relays, interposing current
transformer shall be installed at a minimum distance of 1.0 m from any obstacle or
surrounding walls for easy access, protection scheme installation and maintenance.

4.2.5.4 Substation Automation

Substation Automation shall include the installation of Intelligent Electronic Devices
(IED) and appropriate computer software for the protection, control, and metering of
distribution network.

Page 117 of 282 
 Distribution networks shall be designed, operated and maintained to allow for
interoperability of substation automation devices in accordance with the
requirements of IEC 61850.

4.2.5.4.1 Communication Equipment

Effective communication shall be established between each Injection Substation and
the Control Centre of the Distribution Company.

Communication equipment to be installed shall be such that can interface with the
substation IEDs to acquire data to determine the operation status of each IED,
support standard protocol to enable the substation integration and maintenance.

All communication equipment at each Injection Substation shall be capable of

recording and retrieval in accordance with the requirements of the Grid and
Distribution Codes.

All Radio Communication, Communication Towers and Antennas used in Injection

Substations, shall comply with the requirements of the Nigerian Communications
Commission.

4.2.5.5 Battery Banks and Battery Chargers

Battery Banks and Battery Chargers shall be properly stacked and installed in a
separate adjoining room to the control room. Air extractor fan shall be installed
where the battery Banks and Battery Chargers are installed.

4.2.5.6 Statioin Service Transformer

The substation service transformers shall be supplying the substation auxiliary
services loads from the 33 kV incomer.

4.3 Health, Safety and Environment

4.3.1 Conveniences and Bathrooms
Conveniences and Bathrooms shall be provided within the premises of all manned
substations to ensure personal hygiene in accordance with the requirements of the
Nigerian Electricity Health and Safety Code.

4.3.2 Water Supply

Potable water supply shall be made available in all manned substations.

The source of the potable water supply shall be separated from the wastewater
collection point with a minimum distance of 5.0 m.

4.3.3 Emergency and Standby Systems

Equipment for emergency and standby system such as, but not limited to
generators, standby emergency lighting, extinguishers, first aid box, flashlights shall
be provided for the smooth operation and maintenance of Injection Substations.
Page 118 of 282 
 Well marked emergency signs, exits and fire muster points shall be provided in
accordance with the requirements of the Nigerian Electricity Health and Safety
Code.

4.3.3.1 Substation Standby Generator(s) and Mobile Generator Sockets

Substation standby generators or other renewable energy sources shall be of
sufficient capacity to cater for the operation of equipment installed at Injection
Substation with associated extendable socket outlets.

4.3.4 Disposal of Pollutants

Pollutants and their by-products generated in the course of Injection Substation
operation shall be disposed of in accordance with the requirement of applicable
NASREA. Nigeria Environment Laws

4.3.5 Switchyard Illumination

Switchyard illumination shall be designed for normal and emergency lighting
operations.

A minimum illumination level of 100 lux shall be provided within the main switchyard
area.

4.3.6 Electrical Hazards

Substation equipment and associated accessories shall be designed, installed,
operated and maintained to eliminate electrical hazards in accordance with the
requirements of the Nigerian Electricity Health and Safety Code.

4.3.7 Fire Fighting and Protection Equipment

Substations shall be equipped with fire fighting and protection equipment to ensure
the safety of personnel and equipment installed in accordance with the requirements
of the Nigerian Electricity Health and Safety Code.

Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) shall be provided for persons making

authorized entry into substations in accordance with the requirements of the
Nigerian Electricity Health and Safety Code.

Page 119 of 282 
Chapter 5: Distribution Network
5.1 General
Distribution Network Standards and Specifications outline compulsory procedures and
practices necessary for safe workspace for persons working on Nigeria’s distribution
network. It is the responsibility of all persons involved in network operations to ensure that a
safe work method is employed and that statutory requirements are met. In this context, all
electrical works shall be designed to be safe for the electrical conditions likely to be
experienced during service and the physical environment in which they will operate, taking
into account foreseen and unforeseen risks likely to be encountered.

Distribution networks shall consist of;

a. 33 kV networks
b. 11 kV networks
c. 400 V networks and below

a. Materials:

All materials used for electrical works, their components, accessories and support
structures shall be such as to ensure safe operational performance within the
anticipated life span of the installation.

b. Environmental Issues:

The design, construction and installation of electrical works shall take into consideration
environmental issues and concerns, which include but not limited to:
- The promotion of energy efficiency,
- The social impact of new projects, and community concerns,
- The minimization of environmental damage, including visual impacts, tree and
forestry management programmes,
- The consideration of Electromagnetic radiation.
- Erosion prone environment.

c. Thermal Ratings
The thermal capacity of electrical works shall be sufficient to pass the electrical load for
which they are designed, without reduction of electrical and mechanical properties to a
level below that which provides safe operational performance.

d. Short Circuit Ratings

The electricity works shall be of sufficient capacity to pass short circuit currents, which
will enable the correct operation of protective devices so that a fault is cleared without
reduction of electrical and mechanical properties to a level below that which provides
safe operational performance.

Page 120 of 282 
e. Mechanical Loading Conditions
The electrical works shall have sufficient mechanical and structural strength to withstand
anticipated stresses and strains due to environmental and electrical service conditions.

f. Electrical Service Conditions and Physical Environment

In determining the electrical service conditions and the physical environment under
which the electrical works will operate, due and reasonable care shall be given to the
consideration of extremes that may occur, the likelihood of their occurrence and the
associated risks.

g. Prevention of Unauthorized Access

All electrical works with exposed live parts shall be designed and constructed in such a
manner as to prevent unauthorized access to any person as far as is reasonably
practicable.

5.1.1 Allowable Voltages for Distribution Network

The distribution network shall be operated on voltages as defined below:

i. Systems of Supply
The following system standards shall apply–
a. Frequency – The frequency shall operate within a narrow operating
band of ± 0.5% from 50Hz (49.75 – 50.25 Hz); but under System
Stress, the Frequency on the Power System could experience
variations within the limits of 50 Hz ± 2.5% (48.75 – 51.25 Hz).
b. Standard A.C. voltages – shall be 230 V ± 6% between phase
conductor and neutral conductor and 400 Volts ± 6% between
phases conductor; Primary distribution high voltage shall be 33,000
Volts ± 6% and secondary distribution high voltage shall be 11,000
Volts ± 6%;

ii. Standard Types of Supply

a. Two-wire system (single-phase alternating current) at a nominal
voltage not exceeding 230 volts at the user’s main switchboard.
b. Three-phase four-wire alternating current system at a nominal
voltage not exceeding 400 volts between phases
c. The voltage shall be maintained within ±6% of the nominal
voltage at the consumer’s main switchboard. In the case of
complaint by any consumer that the variation in voltage exceeds
the limits specified, or on the instructions of the Inspecting
Engineer, the Distribution licensee shall provide, connect and
maintain a portable recording device to record the voltage profile
between the service line. If the variation thus recorded are
caused within and by the licensee’s system and exceed the
above limits, the licensee shall take immediate steps to resolve
the complaint.

Page 121 of 282 
 d. This regulation shall also apply to Captive Generation Licensee.

iii. Supply Voltage

a. Supply voltage shall not exceed 230 volts at the user’s main
switchboard, and for supply to services exceeding 10 kilowatts
connected load the nominal voltage shall not exceed 400 volts at
such switchboard.
b. The Supply Voltage for industrial purposes may be given at high
voltages either for transformation or for direct supply to motors or any
other agreed voltage between the Distribution Licensee and the user.
This shall be subject to the standard voltage in these regulations
provided that the transforming apparatus and control gear are so
enclosed as to be inaccessible except to authorized persons.

5.1.2 Insulation Requirements for Distribution Network

Distribution Network shall be appropriately insulated to guarantee safety of
equipment and personnel. Insulation materials used shall be capable of withstanding
high insulation value(s) throughout the service life of the equipment or installation.
Provisions of IEC 62068 on insulation of equipment, materials and installation shall
be adhered to.

5.1.3 Earthing of Distribution Network

All electrical installations and network shall be adequately earthed to guarantee
operational safety as specified in the Code of Practice for Earthing (NCP 09).

a. Earthing of metal structures

i. Where lines are operated at high voltages, all metal structures, other
than conductors shall be permanently and effectively connected to
earth electrode(s). For this purpose, a continuous earth wire shall be
provided and connected to earth.
ii. Where any special equipment on a pole includes metal structure
accessible from ground level which normally has to be handled by an
operator when the line is alive (e.g. a switch-operating handle), such
metal structure shall be connected to an earth mat, so situated as to
include within its area the whole of the ground on which the operator
would normally stand.

b. Earthing At Pole - Mounted Substations

For Pole mounted transformer, the electrode used for earthing the steelwork shall be
situated outside the resistance area of the earthed electrode connected to the low
voltage neutral.

5.1.4 Equipment and Installation Devices for Distribution Network

Page 122 of 282 
 All materials, equipment, devices and accessories used directly in construction,
installation and maintenance of distribution network shall constitute electrical
network equipment and installation devices. They shall include but not limited to:

i. Support structures; Metal or Re-enforced concrete Poles, gantry guy, stay

assembly,
ii. Overhead materials; Conductors, insulators, line hardware, accessories,
iii. Underground materials; Cables, termination kits, lugs,
iv. Substation equipment; Transformers, shunt capacitors, arresters, feeder
pillars.

5.2 Overhead Distribution Lines

5.2.1 General
Overhead Distribution Lines shall be constructed with non-insulated and insulated
conductors on supports designed and constructed to:
a. Have insulation appropriate for the nominal voltage,
b. Carry the electrical load currents for which they are designed,
c. Allow the passage of electrical short circuit currents which will enable the
correct operation of protective devices,
d. Ensure they are structurally secure for the environmental and service
conditions for which they are designed,
e. Maintain safe clearances,
f. Ensure that safe operational performance will occur, and
g. Prevent unauthorized access to the electrical works.

5.2.2 Routing of Overhead Lines

Overhead line routes shall be planned bearing in mind the type of use, or
foreseeable use, to which the land is or may be put subject to extant town planning
Laws

5.2.3 Highway Routes

At highways, it is required that a minimum ground clearance of 7.2 m is maintained
in order to accommodate vehicles up to 6.1 m high.

In planning an overhead line likely to cross a major road, it shall be established

whether or not it is a designated highway route or a possible bypass to a highway
route, the Utility shall take into consideration and specify the clearance
appropriately.

5.2.4 Overhead Lines with Bare Conductors

Page 123 of 282 
 Where overhead lines with bare conductors are routed across sites used for public
recreation and work activities other than farming, they shall be protected with cradle
guards.

5.2.4.1 Routing Overhead Lines across Farmlands

A risk assessment shall be carried out and any unacceptable location shall be
avoided. Examples include:
i. Locations where regular loading /unloading activities take place
ii. Fields where potable irrigation pipes are regularly used
iii. Any location identified as being a potential hazard to farm workers

5.2.4.2 Pole Mounted Transformers and Switchgears

i. Live jumpers may be as low as 4.3 m from ground level. Such equipment
shall be placed where accidental contact is adjudged to be unlikely.
ii. Free standing pole mounted transformers shall not be used at locations
considered unsuitable for overhead line and are unlikely to be suitable for low
level exposed live terminals. In event of changing the original use of the
location of a pole mounted transformer, the pole mounted transformer shall
not be retained as free standing transformer unless it is clear that the new
use of the land does not place persons at risk.

5.2.5 Vehicular Access

Overhead lines shall be constructed along routes accessible to a 4-wheel drive
vehicles and a safe access is provided for tall structures. The access shall be
suitable for mobile elevated work platform and ladders with a minimum clearance of
7.2 m

Where bare overhead lines present a risk, the following alternatives shall apply in
order of preference with appropriate insulation
a. Underground Cables
b. Insulated Conductors.

5.2.6 Line Conductors

The conductors used on overhead lines shall include, but not limited to, aluminium
and alloys of aluminium material (essentially AAC, ACSR) designed to withstand the
electrical and mechanical loads over the designed operational life, without failure.
Classes and qualities of aluminium conductors applicable in distribution overhead
network shall comply with the provisions of IEC 61089. Copper line conductors shall
be used for maintenance purposes only where copper lines already exist. Copper
conductors will, however, continue to be required for special purposes such as drop
leads to equipment, earthing.
Page 124 of 282 
 The use of AAC and ACSR on overhead distribution network operating at 11 kV and
above shall be limited to their current and thermal loading capacities in addition to
safety considerations to avoid the consequence of snapping. The minimum cross
sectional area of such conductors shall be 100 mm2.

The recommended conductors are shown in the following table:

AAC to IEC 61089 B.S. 215 Part 1 A.C.S.R.

1970 STRANDING
METRIC CURRENT AREA Al. STEEL
RATING METRIC mm mm
Amps
100mm2 290 50mm2 6/3.35 1/3.35
150mm2 346 100mm2 6/4.72 7/1.57

The size of the neutral conductor shall not be less than that of phase conductor. The
street lighting switch conductor shall be 35mm2 (2.65mm) Aluminium or 25mm2
(7/2.34mm) hard drawn copper.
The PVC insulated conductors shall comply with NIS 359.

5.2.7 Handling of Electric Supply Lines and Apparatus:‐

a. Before any conductor or apparatus is handled, adequate precautions shall be
taken, by earthing or other suitable means to electrically discharge such
conductor or apparatus, and any adjacent conductor or apparatus if there is
danger therefrom.
b. Every person who is working on an electric supply line or apparatus or both
shall be provided with Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) in accordance
with the Nigerian Electricity Health and Safety Code.
c. No person shall work on any live electric supply line or apparatus and no
person shall assist such person on such work, unless he is authorized in that
behalf, and takes the safety measures approved by the regulation in force.
d. Every telecommunication line on supports carrying a high or extra-high
voltage line shall, for the purpose of working thereon, be deemed to be a
high voltage line.

5.2.8 Strength of Material

a. All conductors of overhead lines shall have a minimum breaking strength as

specified in IEC 61089.
b. Where the voltage is low and the span is of less than 15 metres and is on the
owner’s or user’s premises, a conductor having an actual breaking strength
as specified in IEC 61089 may be used.

Page 125 of 282 
5.2.9 Arrangements

In the network where street lighting switch wire is not required, the normal
arrangement of conductors for a three phase, 4-wire line from top to bottom shall be
as follows:

Red Phase No. 1

Yellow Phase No. 2

Blue Phase No. 3

Neutral No. 4

Where street lighting is required, this shall occupy position No. 4 and the neutral
shall be placed in a fifth position below the switch wire. If the switch wire is not to be
erected initially, position No. 4 shall be left vacant. For a single phase, two wire line,
position Nos 3 and 5 shall be used. Two-phase three-wire construction is not
permissible, and shall be avoided in the design of new overhead networks.

In special circumstances, it may be necessary to adopt a horizontal conductor

formation over a short distance in which case the above numbering shall apply from
left to right when looking towards the source of supply.

5.2.10 Properties of Distribution Conductors

Distribution conductors shall consist of standard bare conductors of round strands

helically laid about a core in one or more layers. The core shall consist of a single
strand identical to the outer strands and are of the same diameter in a homogeneous
conductor as in – All Aluminium conductor (AAC), hard drawn copper (CU), or all All
Aluminium alloy conductors (AAAC).

In non-homogenous conductor as in Aluminium Conductor Steel Reinforced (ACSR),

Aluminium conductor Aluminium alloy reinforced (ACAAR), the strands in the core
may or may not be of the same diameter.

The rated breaking strength of the conductors shall be capable of withstanding the
mechanical loading without undue sagging within acceptable temperature limits and
other adverse weather and environmental conditions they shall be subjected to
during their service years.

5.2.11 Load Bearing Capacity for Overhead Distribution Lines and Safety Factors

Overhead distribution lines shall have capacity capable of withstanding loading due
to;
Page 126 of 282 
 i. Designed current capacity within its temperature threshold
ii. Weather conditions such as wind, ambient temperature, solar radiation, rain and
storm
iii. Mechanical loading (line tension without undermining voltage-specific ground
clearance)

5.2.11.1 Factor of Safety

Overhead electric line supports, in conjunction with stays and struts if provided, shall
withstand the longitudinal, transverse and vertical loads due to fittings, conductors and
wind loadings under the most adverse temperature conditions and with the factors of
safety herein under specified-
(a) Live and earth conductors, based on the ultimate tensile strength of the
material. 2.5
(b) Mid-span joints and termination based on the ultimate tensile strength of the
conductor (comparative safety factor between the ultimate tensile strength of
the mid-span joint and the ultimate tensile strength of the conductor)
……………………………………… 0.95
(c) Complete insulator units based upon the electro-mechanical strength of the
material (comparative safety factor between the ultimate tensile strength of
the insulator string and the ultimate tensile strength of the conductor)
……………………………………… 0.5
(d) Stay wires and auxiliary materials based on ultimate tensile strength. 2.0
(e) Insulator metal fitting based upon elastic limit..………………………… 2.5
(f) Lattice steel supports (or other compound structures) based on the crimping
load of members in compression, the elastic limit of members in tension and
the shear or bearing deformation at joints. 2.0
(g) Steel tubular poles based on the ultimate breaking strength in handling of the
material ……………………………………… 2.0
(h) Impregnated wood poles in accordance with Nigerian Standard No. 43 based
on 90% of the strength corresponding to the ultimate extreme fibres stress or
for poles supported with stays 90% of the crippling strength. 3.5
(i) Impregnated wood poles in accordance with Nigerian Standard No. 43 and
supported with stays based on 90% of crippling strength ………… 3.5
(j) All untreated poles based on 90% of the strength corresponding to the
extreme fibre stress. 7.0
(k) All untreated poles supported with stays based on 90% of crippling strength
…………………………………………... 7.0
(l) All types of concrete poles based on the strength corresponding to failure.
2.5
(m) Foundation for supports against overturning lateral shearing, toe
compression and uprooting under maximum simultaneous working loads
based on soil bearing strength. 2.5
(n) Under a single broken electric line or earth wire condition the factors of safety
for supports and foundations shall not be less than-

Page 127 of 282 
 i. Support: 50% of the factors of safety given in Regulations 53 (f) to 53 (1);
ii. Foundations: 50% of the factors of safety given in paragraph (m) of this
regulation.

a. The following minimum factor of safety shall apply;

i. For metal supports, 1.5
ii. For mechanically processed concrete supports, 2.0
iii. For hand-moulded concrete supports, 2.5
iv. For wood supports, 3.0.

The minimum factor of safety shall be based on such load as would cause failure of the
support to perform its function (assuming that the foundation and other components of the
structure are intact).

The aforesaid load shall be;

i. Equivalent to the yield point stress or the modulus of rupture, as the case may be,
for supports subject to bending and vertical loads,
ii. The crippling load for supports using struts.
Provided that in the case of latticed steel or other compound structures, factors of safety
shall not be less than 1.5 under such broken wire conditions.
b. The minimum factor of safety for stay-wires, guard-wires or bearer wires shall be 2.5
based on the ultimate tensile strength of the wire.
c. The minimum factor of safety for conductors shall be 2, based on their ultimate tensile
strength. In addition, the conductors’ tension at 32oC, without external load, shall not
exceed the following percentages of the ultimate tensile strength of the conductor: -
Initial unloaded tension: 35 per cent
Final unloaded tension: 25 per cent

5.2.12 Jointing Requirements for Overhead Distribution Conductors

Joints between conductors of overhead lines shall be mechanically secure and electrically
continuous under the conditions of operation. The ultimate strength of the joint shall not be
less than 95 per cent of that of the conductor and the electrical conductivity not less than
that of the conductor. No conductor of an overhead line shall have more than two joints in a
span.

5.2.13 Dielectric Strength of Insulators of Overhead Distribution Lines

Insulators used in the distribution network shall be of high grade devoid of impurities and
have insulation/dielectric strength that shall suffer minimal adverse effect when exposed to:
 Homogenous and non-homogenous electric field
 Mechanical stress
 Chemical effects
 Conductor surface effects

Page 128 of 282 
  Other ambient effects like pressure and temperature
The Insulators shall meet the requirements of IEC 60071-2. The minimum acceptable failure
rate of the insulators shall be 0.004/year for apparatus and 20/100km/year for distribution
lines.

5.2.14 Guard Lines, Guard Nets and Protective Devices

Cradle guards, guard nets, earth bars and protective devices shall be installed where
necessary in accordance with Clauses 5.2.15 to 5.2.21 below. The cost of such installation
shall be borne by the last service provider to arrive at the point.

5.2.15 Electric Lines Crossing Waterways

a. The height of an electric line under the most adverse operating conditions, above
the highest recorded water level, over harbours, rivers and waterways, shall not
be less than that required by the appropriate authorities for physical safety
clearance PLUS a minimum electrical safety clearance of 3 metres of 1 metre
per 78 kV or phase to neutral voltage of the electric line, whichever the greater.
b. The licensee shall have at least thirty days and not more than ninety days prior
to the placing of such work serve written notice on the appropriate authorities
specifying the intended use of the works, the voltage of operation and such other
information that the authorities may require him to supply.
c. Every notice served in conformity with Clause 5.2.15.(b) shall be accompanied
by a plan of suitable scale indicating the site of the crossing, the location of all
supports, stays, struts, switches, transformers and other apparatus intended to
be used.
d. The authorities may within 21 days of the receipt of such a notice of intention
served under Clause 5.2.15(b) serve a counter notice on the licensee -–
i. Objecting to the siting of the works specifying the reason in the
counter notice; and
ii. Requiring protective features to be fitted, such features to be specified
in the counter notice.

5.2.16 Commission’s Decision as Final

Where mutual agreement is not reached the matter shall be referred to the Commission
whose decision shall be final.

5.2.17 Proximity to Railway Lines

Page 129 of 282 
The provision of Clauses 5.2.15(b) to 5.2.17 shall apply where the licensee intends to
place an electric line, other than a service line, in the proximity of, over or under a
railway line.

5.2.18 Proximity to Telecommunication Lines

a. The provision of Clause 5.2.15(b) to 5.2.17 shall apply where the licensee
intends to place an electric line, other than a service line, in the proximity of, over
or under Posts and Telegraphs line.
b. Other than in the case of a fully insulated services line all electric lines, except
with the written authority of the Commission, shall cross over Post and
Telegraphs lines with a minimum clearance, under the most adverse operating
conditions at the point of crossing of –

System Voltage between Phases Clearance

Not exceeding 400 volts - insulated 0.2 metres
Not exceeding 400 volts - un-insulated 0.6 metres
Over 400 volts but not exceeding 33,000 volts 1.8 metres
Over 33,000 volts but not exceeding 132,000 volts 2.4 metres
Over 132,000 volts but not exceeding 330,000 volts 4.0 metres
Over 330,000 volts but not exceeding 750,000 volts 7.0 metres

c. So far as may be practicable the licensee shall leave one side of each street free
for telegraph line and where the street is continuous the licensee's line shall be
kept to the same side of the street for the whole distance.
d. Except with the permission of the Posts and Telegraphs Authorities all overhead
lines shall be placed on the opposite side of the street to that on which any
telegraph lines are erected, and where the erection or operation of the electric
lines necessitates an alteration of an existing telegraph lines, and such alteration
is approved by the Posts and Telegraphs Authorities, the expense of the
alteration shall be borne by the licensee; provided that where existing telegraph
lines of the Posts and Telegraphs Authorities occupy both sides-of the street that
Authority shall bear the cost of putting all telegraph lines on the one side of the
street or if agreeable to the licensee, consent to an arrangement for the joint use
of poles on both sides of the street.
e. Where electric lines are on one side of the street and telegraph lines on the
other, and service is required to be given from either side to the other, the
licensee and the Posts and Telegraphs Authorities shall give to each other
reasonable facilities as far as possible to effect supply. Where possible electric
service lines, unless fully insulated, shall pass over telegraph lines and telegraph
service lines shall pass under electric lines.
Page 130 of 282 


5.2.19 Proximity To Airfield

The provision of Clauses 5.2.15(b) to 5.2.17 shall apply where the licensee intends to
place an electric line in the proximity of an airfield

5.2.20 Proximity to Radio, Television, or Telecommunication Aerials

The provision of Clauses 5.2.15(b) to 5.2.17 shall apply where the licensee intends to
place an electric line, other than a service line, in the proximity of a radio or television
aerial.
Cradle guards, guard nets and protective devices shall be installed in accordance with
under the provisions of Clause 5.2.14 the cost of such installation shall be borne by the last
service provider to arrive at the point.
Where guarding is required under these rules the provisions of sub rules (2) to (4) shall
apply:
i. Every guard-wire shall be connected with earth at each point at which its electrical
continuity is broken.
ii. Every guard-wire shall have an actual breaking strength of not less than 635kN or
kg and if made of iron or steel, shall be galvanised.
iii. Every guard-wire or cross-connected systems of guard-wires shall have sufficient
current-carrying capacity to ensure the rendering dead, without risk of fusing of
the guard-wire or wires till the contact of any live wire has been removed.

5.1.1 Route Surveys

Pole line surveys – A survey shall produce a plan and profile of the surveyed route. The
plan shall show the route the line will follow and the significant topography adjacent to the
route and the profile shall show the ground elevation along the line and the top elevations of
the poles. These elevations shall be set in accordance with minimum allowable clearances
specified in Clause 5.2.3 of these Regulations.

Poles for distribution lines shall be placed on the side of the streets that is most free of other
lines and trees. A distance of 45 m shall be maintained between adjacent poles up to a
maximum of 50 m where it becomes difficult to maintain the statutory distance between
poles. A long roads, poles shall be placed at a minimum distance of 1.5 m from the inside
edge of the kerbs or 1.5 m from the edge of the road surface where kerbs do not exist. On
open roadways or highways, poles should be set at 0.45 m from the outside of fences.

5.1.2 Engineering Designs

All engineering designs shall be carried out, certified and approved by qualified COREN
Registered Engineer(s).

Page 131 of 282 
Engineering designs of overhead distribution lines shall also take into consideration the
following;
 Compliance with Statutory Regulations
 Safety of equipment, employees and the general public
 Economic utilization of materials
 Conformity with international best practices that meet the need of users with
minimum environmental impact
 To conform to acceptable standards, both from an engineering point of view and
aesthetics.

5.1.2.5 Design of overhead distribution lines shall also allow for;

 Weight of conductor and fittings
 Conductor tension:-
 Terminal load
- Deviation loads
- Differential conductor loads in adjacent spans
- Vertical loads
- Stay loads
- Environmental Loads (eg. Wind and dust) on Structures and Conductors

5.1.2.6 Conductor clearance: - to ground, to roads etc

- To railway lines
- Over flood country
- To buildings
Over Other lines

5.1.2.7 Topography of Terrains and Avoidance of obstructions

- Airfields
- Roads
- Railway lines
- Telecom lines
- Stays
- Special exclusion areas
-

Materials and accessories for overhead line construction shall be designed to meet all the
electrical and mechanical loads likely to be experienced in service as far as reasonably
practicable.

Selection of Insulators
The following factors shall be considered in the selection of the appropriate insulation of
overhead lines:
 50 Hz performance
 Impulse capabilities
 Switching capabilities
Page 132 of 282 
For design purposes, the average minimum and maximum ambient temperatures shall be
20°C and 45°C respectively.

Unless otherwise authorized by the Commission in writing, the following working conditions
shall be assumed for design purposes-

(a) Minimum ambient temperature of overhead line conductors ……………. 20oC

(b) Maximum temperature of overhead line conductors ……………………. 100oC
(c) Average ambient temperature of overhead line conductors …………… 45oC
(d) For all design purposes the reference temperature shall be the minimum
temperature of 20oC

Stay Insulators
The stay insulators shall be mounted not less than 2.7 m vertically above ground and have
a wet power frequency flashover voltage not less than one and a half times the highest
voltage conductor supported by the pole.

Conductor Sag
The sag for overhead distribution lines, which is the vertical distance between the point
where the line is joined to the support structure and the lowest point on the line, shall be
parabolic in shape.

Clearances must also be observed when stringing a line. The normal clearances for
overhead lines are as shown in the table below.

Voltage Level Clearance to ground

Less than 66 kV 6.1 m
66 kV to 110 kV 6.4 m
110 kV to 165 kV 6.7 m
Greater than 165 kV 7.0 m

Cross - arms
Cross arms shall be fiber, treated opepe wood or steel constructed. The mechanical loads
to which cross arms may be subjected shall take into consideration t the conditions likely to
be experienced in service so as to minimize the probability of failure.

Design Load Consideration on cross arms

Cross arm design for single supports shall be treated as two cantilevers fixed at the support.
The cross arm shall be capable of withstanding the following;
• Bending moment due to span weight of the conductor.
• Bending moment due to transverse conductor loads - wind and deviation loads
acting at top of insulator pin.

Page 133 of 282 
 • Bending moment due to direct horizontal pull of conductors (termination or strain and
stress structures only).
• Maintenance loads resulting from additional conductor lowering or anchoring
activities.
• The self weight of the cross arm

In addition, the following conditions shall also be satisfied

• Kingbolts shall also be checked for allowable bearing loads.

Cross arm brace bolts shall be checked for allowable bearing loads at an angle. Cross arms
shall also be selected to give the required separation on the support and at mid-span.

5.1.3 Civil Works

5.1.3.5 Temporary Access Roads

Where it is impossible to route the distribution overhead line through existing access roads
and highways, temporary access road shall be created to facilitate line survey and
construction. Licensee shall comply with relevant applicable way leave regulations in force.

5.1.3.6 Pole/Tower Foundations

Pole/tower foundations shall take into consideration the local soil properties and
requirements as a decisive factor in ensuring high continuity of service, long life of
equipment and low maintenance costs.

The foundation shall be so constructed taking into account the reaction of the soil at all
times of the year in which they are planted for the load they are to carry so as to withstand
the transverse, horizontal and vertical loads without exceeding the material strength limits
set out in the factor of safety requirements.

Pole foundation depth shall comply with the standards set in the table below;

S/N Pole Length in (m) Pole Depth (m)

Page 134 of 282 
 1 6.10 1.22
2 7.32 1.52
3 8.54 1.52
4 10.06 1.84
5 10.98 1.84
6 12.20 1.98
7 13.72 1.98
8 15.25 2.13
9 16.77 2.13
10 18.36 2.29
11 18.82 2.29
12 19.85 2.44

Poles planted along sandy, swampy and clay soils shall in addition, have concrete bases
with a depth of 0.8 m below ground level and 0.6 m above ground level.

Towers shall be applicable in distribution overhead lines construction under special

conditions, which may be bordering on the terrain and topography of the surveyed route.
The foundations of the poles and towers shall be constructed, based on the results of
geotechnical investigation tests conducted along the defined routes.

5.1.3.7 Support Structures for Distribution Lines.

a. Every support carrying electric lines shall be made of wood, steel or reinforced concrete
or any combination of any of such materials or any other approved materials and in the
case in which wood or steel is used in the construction of the support, such wood or
steel or any other approved materials shall be, so far as is reasonably practicable,
protected against decay, corrosion or other deterioration.

b. Every support shall be so constructed and placed as to withstand the transverse,

horizontal and vertical loads calculated while taking into consideration, the appropriate
wind pressure along the height of the support structure above ground level. In
accordance with regulation 48 without exceeding the material's strength limits as set out
in regulation 53.

c. In no case shall the strength of a support in a direction parallel to the overhead line be
less than one quarter of the strength in a direction transverse to the said line.

d. All overhead electric lines shall be attached to suitable insulators carried on cross-arms
or brackets of suitable materials and cross-section, and they shall be so attached to the
insulators, or guarded, that they cannot fall away from the supports in case they become
detached from the insulator, but will fall on the cross-arm or insulator support.

e. All lines at angles shall be attached to the insulator so that the insulator, and not the
binding wire, takes the strain.

Page 135 of 282 
f. The minimum diameter of wooden supports shall be in accordance with the relevant
Nigerian Standards.

5.1.3.8 Load Bearing Capacity for Support Structures of Distribution Lines and Safety Factor
The transverse load on any support carrying an electric line shall be calculated in
accordance with its average height above ground level throughout its span, and the wind
pressure on the leeside of lattice steel or other compound structures shall be deemed to be
one half of the pressure on the leeward side. The vertical loads on supports shall comprise
the weight of the supports themselves and any insulators and fittings attached thereto,
together with the loads imposed by the electric lines and their fittings.

Factors of safety
Overhead electric line supports, in conjunction with stays and struts if provided, shall
withstand the longitudinal, transverse and vertical loads due to fittings, conductors and wind
loadings under the most adverse temperature conditions and with the factors of safety
herein under specified

(a) A. live and earth conductors, based on the 2.5

ultimate tensile strength of the material
(b) B. mid-span joints and termination based on 0.95
the ultimate tensile strength of the conductor
(comparative safety factor between the ultimate tensile
strength of the mid-span joint and the ultimate tensile
strength of the conductor)
(c) C. complete insulator units based upon the 0.5
electro-mechanical strength of the material
(comparative safety factor between the ultimate tensile
strength of the insulator string and the ultimate tensile
strength of the conductor)
(d) D. stay wires and auxiliary materials based on 2.0
ultimate tensile strength
(e) E. insulator metal fitting based upon elastic 2.5
limit
(f) F. lattice steel supports (or other compound 2.0
structures) based on the crimping load of members in
compression, the elastic limit of members in tension
and the shear or bearing deformation at joints
(g) G. steel tubular poles based on the ultimate 2.0
breaking strength in handling of the material
(h) impregnated wood poles in accordance with 3.5
Nigerian Standard No. 43 based on 90% of the strength
corresponding to the ultimate extreme fibres stress or
for poles supported with stays 90% of the crippling
strength
(i) impregnated wood poles in accordance with 3.5
Nigerian Standard No. 43 and supported with stays
based on 90% of crippling strength
(j) all untreated poles based on 90% of the 7.0
strength corresponding to the extreme fibre stress
(k) all untreated poles supported with stays based 7.0
on 90% of crippling strength
(l) H all types of concrete poles based on the 2.5

Page 136 of 282 
 strength corresponding to failure
(m) I foundation for supports against overturning 2.5
lateral shearing, toe compression and uprooting under
maximum simultaneous working loads based on soil
bearing strength
(n) J under a single broken electric line or earth i. Support: 50% of the factors of safety
wire condition the factors of safety for supports and given in under items F TO H above
foundations shall not be less than ii. Foundations: 50% of the factors of
safety given in item I above..

5.1.3.9 Reinforcement for Support Structures of Distribution Network by Guy Assembly

Overhead line supports at locations where the loads exceed the capacity of the
poles/foundations shall be stayed so that the stay wire, rod, bed, log/screw anchor etc take
the pull due to the conductors.

a. Stay wires connected to wooden supports carrying electric lines of all voltages, and also
stay wires connected to concrete supports carrying electric lines at 400 volts or less
shall be insulated to prevent danger from leakage. For this purpose, an insulator of the
same or greater rating as the insulator supporting the electric lines, shall be inserted in
the stay wire not less than 3.0 m vertically above ground and below the level of the
electric line.

b. Stay wires connected to steel supports or any other supports made of an electrically
conducting material shall be insulated.

c. Where a stay wire crosses over a road or street a minimum distance of 5.8 meters to
ground level shall be maintained.

d. All stay wires shall be of galvanized steel and stranded.

e. Stay insulators shall have a mechanical strength equal to or greater than that of the stay
in which it is installed.

f. Where a stay wire is installed in a public place or in any other location in which it may
constitute a hazard, it shall be:–

i. Effectively protected against mechanical damage by the installation of a concrete

surround; or
ii. Covered with a protective guarding consisting of metal battens at 50 mm wide, or
a metal pipe at least 50 mm in diameter, securely fastened around the stay wire
and extending from ground level to a point not less than 2.0 m vertically above
ground level. The concrete surrounds and the protective guarding shall be
painted white.

5.3 Basic Clearances for Installation on Distribution Lines

The basic clearance for the installation on distribution line shall be as provided below:

5.3.1 Height of Overhead Distribution Conductors

Page 137 of 282 
5.3.1.1 Electric Line Clearance to Ground

(1) The height above ground of any electric line under the most adverse operating
conditions shall not, except with the written authority of the Commission, be less than the
height appropriate to the system voltage and situations tabulated below-

Ground clearance in metres

Over streets and roads

Along streets and roads In positions inaccessible
System voltage between and public open spaces
and other places to vehicular traffic not
phases(V) and other places of
accessible to traffic(m) streets or roads(m)
vehicular traffic (m)
400 5.8 5.8 5.8
3,300 6.1 6.1 6.1
6,600 6.1 6.1 6.1
11,000 6.1 6.1 6.1
33,000 6.1 6.1 6.1
66,000 6.1 6.1 6.1
132,000 6.1 6.1 6.1
330,000 6.1 6.1 6.1
750,000 6.1 6.1 6.1

(2) Fully insulated service lines operating at a voltage not exceeding 400 volts may be
terminated on buildings at a height of not less than 2.7 metres from ground level provided
that the street clearance at any point of its span is not less than 6.1 metres.

5.3.1.2 Approval in Specific Instances

Notwithstanding the foregoing, where the specified clearances are not so attainable, the
Commission may, in specific instances, authorize the use of reduced clearances subject to
such additional safety precautions in the form of warning notices, warning lights or crash
barriers, as the Commission may deem necessary.

5.3.1.3 Parallel Spacing Of Circuits On Separate Supports

The minimum distance between the nearest conductors of circuits erected on separate
supports such that they run along parallel routes shall not be less than that required to
enable the safe maintenance of either circuit to be carried out without de-energizing the
circuit that is not being maintained, and the horizontal separation shall be greater than the
height of the highest support.

5.3.1.4 Mid‐span Crossing Of Electric Lines

Where electric circuits cross at mid-span positions the following conditions shall apply-
a. the circuit of the higher voltage shall always cross over the circuit of the lower
voltage;
b. no circuit shall cross at an angle of less than 30 degrees; and
Page 138 of 282 
 c. the minimum clearance between the nearest conductors of different circuits at the
point of crossing, including "aerial" earth wire, shall not be less than that tabulated
below plus the maximum design sag of the conductor of the lower circuit at the point
of crossing;

Lower Circuit (Voltage between Upper Circuit (Voltage between phases)

phases)
Earth wire 415 V 11,000 V 33,000 V 132,000 V 330,000 V
(cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm)
Earth wire 30 20 30 120 120 240
400V 20 120 120 120 180 270
11,000V 30 –– 120 –– 180 270
33,000V 30 –– –– –– 180 270
132,000V 120 –– –– –– 230 360
330,000V 230 –– –– –– –– 480
750,000V –– –– –– –– –– ––

d. Where the circuit of the higher voltage is fully insulated, the minimum clearance
calculated in accordance with the provision of above Table may be reduced by 50%.

6 Clearance of Electric Lines To Buildings

A line may be erected over or adjacent to a building provided that:-
(a) the radial distance in metres from the point of attachment of the suspension insulator
(or conductor if attached to a fixed insulator) of the lower conductor, to any part of
the building is not less than-
conductor sag at maximum design temperature plus length of suspension
insulator string plus “A”, where “A” is a constant dependent on the voltage
between phases of the conductors of the line:-
400volts to 11,000 volts ……………………… 2.4 m
33,000 volts …………………………………… 3.0 m
132,000 volts ................................................ 4.0 m
330,000 volts ................................................ 6.0 m
Over 330,000 volts ........................................ 8.0 m
(b) where the conductors of the circuit are fully insulated, the constant "A" may be
reduced by 50%.

7 Alternative provisions
(1)Where the conditions, provided for under the clearance of electric lines to buildings
above cannot be met, the line shall be erected so that the minimum horizontal distance in
metre of the nearest conductor in still air is not less than-
(Conductor sag at maximum design temperature plus length of suspension insulator
string) plus “B”, where "B" is a constant dependent on the voltage between phases
of the conductors of the line-
415 volts - 11,000 volts .............................. 2.4 m
33,000 volts ................................................. 3.0 m
132,000 volts ……………………………… . 4.0 m
330,000 volts …………………………………6.0 m
Page 139 of 282 
 Over 330,000 volts ....................................... 9.0 m
(2) Where the conductors of the circuit are fully insulated, the constant "B" may be
reduced by 50%.
(3) In the case of specially designed fully insulated aerial cables, clearance to buildings
may be reduced at the discretion of the Commission.
(4) No building or other structure shall be erected under or adjacent to an electric line
without adhering to the provisions of these Regulations.

5.4 Service Drop Lines

Overhead Service Drop Lines

5.4.1.1 Service Lines Entering into Customer’s Premises

Any service line of the licensee which is taken into the premises of a customer at a point
below the level of the ground shall be taken into the premises in such manner as to,
prevent as far as reasonably possible, any influx of gas at the point of entry.

5.4.1.2 Identification of Conductors of Service Lines

The separate conductors of service lines shall be permanently marked by coloration, or
in accordance with the provision of these Regulations for Electrical Installation, labelled
as close as practicable to the supply terminal so as to indicate in a distinctive manner,
the polarity of the conductors or the neutral and live phase conductors as the case may
be.

5.4.1.3 Protection of Consumer’s Installation against Excess Energy

For protection against excess energy, a suitable fusible cut-out or automatic circuit
breaker of adequate rupturing capacity completely enclosed in a suitable locked or
sealed receptacle of solid fire resisting construction shall be inserted by the licensee in
every service line as close as practicable to the supply terminals and in a position which,
in the opinion of the licensee is suitable for the purpose.
Provided that no such fusible cut-out or automatic circuit breaker shall be inserted in any
conductor, which is permanently connected with earth.
Provided also that where a supply of energy is given at high voltages, provision shall be
made whereby the consumer is enabled to cut off all voltage from the supply terminals
without risk of danger.

5.4.1.4 Licensee’s Lines on Consumer’s Premises

a. The licensee shall be responsible for all electric lines and apparatus placed by them
on the premises of a consumer and either belonging to the licensee or under their
control (whether forming the whole or part of the consumers installation or not) being
installed and maintained in a safe condition and suitable for their respective
purposes and being so fixed and protected as to prevent so far as is reasonably
practicable, leakage to any adjacent metal.
b. The standard of construction and installation adopted by the licensee in complying
with Clause 5.4.1.4a of this regulation in so far as it relates to the whole or any part

Page 140 of 282 
 of a consumers installations shall not be lower than which the licensee would be
prepared to accept under these Section 7.
c. The obligation imposed by Clause 5.4.1.4a of this regulation in regard to the
maintenance of any electric lines and apparatus as aforesaid situated on the
consumers side of the supply terminals and forming the whole or part of a consumer
installation shall be subject to the terms of any agreement entered into between the
licensee and the consumer with respect to the letting on terms or hire-purchase of
the said whole or part of the consumers installation.
d. Nothing in this regulation shall relieve the owner or occupier of any premises, being
a consumer within the meaning of these regulations. From any obligation imposed
on him/her by the provisions of clauses 5.2.1.4(a) to 5.2.1.4(c)

5.4.1.5 Inspection and testing of consumer’s installation prior to connection; licensee

to appoint installation inspectors
a. Licensee shall appoint in writing, one or more competent persons to inspect
consumers installations.
b. The licensee shall not permanently connect a consumers installation supplied at low
or medium voltage with their electric lines unless and until the said installation has
been inspected and duly tested as aforesaid to determine compliance with the
provisions for these Regulations for Electrical Installations.
c. The results of every test and inspection made in conformity with clause 15.1.1.9(2)
shall be recorded in writing and authenticated by the signature of the person
appointed in conformity with clause (1) above.
d. The provisions of this regulation shall not apply to consumers installation coming
within the provisions of the Minerals and Mining Act (Cap. 226), or the National Film
and Video Censors Board Act (Cap N40), or where the installation to be supplied is
made by another undertaking, instead the licensee shall ensure that the installation
comply with the appropriate wiring regulations if any or that the installation has been
approved by an inspector duly appointed to administer the appropriate wiring
regulations applicable to the particular installation, before commencing to give a
supply.

5.4.1.6 General Conditions as to Supply to Consumers

a. The licensee shall not be compelled to commence or subject to the provisions, of
these regulations continue to give supply of energy to any consumer unless they
are reasonably satisfied in respect of the consumer’s installation.
b. That all conductors (including flexible conductors) and apparatus (including
portable apparatus) are sufficient in size and capacity for the purposes for which
the supply of energy is to be used and are constructed, installed and protected
so as to prevent danger so far as is reasonably practicable; and that all single-
pole switches are inserted in live conductors only.
c. That every distinct circuit is protected against excess energy by means of a
suitable fusible cut-out or automatic circuit breaker of adequate rupturing
capacity suitably located and of such construction as to prevent danger from
overheating, arcing or the scattering of hot metal when it comes into operation
and such as permit the renewal of the fusible metal without danger
Page 141 of 282 
 d. That every electric motor is controlled by an efficient switch or switches for
starting and stopping and that the said switch or switches is or are so placed as
to be readily accessible to and easily operated by the person in charge of the
motor.
e. Provided that installation shall be deemed to fulfill the requirements of this
regulation if it complies with the provisions of the regulation for electrical
installation or where applicable regulations governing electrical installations
made under the provisions of-
(a) the National Film and Video Censors Board Act [Cap. N40]); or
(b) the Minerals and Mining Act [Cap. 226];
(c) any other Act.
5.4.1.7 Supply At Low Voltage From More Than One Pair Of Conductors Of System At
Medium Voltage
(1) The licensee shall not commence a supply of energy at low voltage to any consumer
from more than one pair of conductor of a three-wire or multi-phase system at medium
voltage unless-
(a) the total rating in kilowatts of the apparatus (including electric lamps) connected or
intended to be connected to the consumer’s wiring exceeds 10 kilowatts; and
(b) the giving of the supply at low voltage from more than one pair of conductor of a
system as aforesaid is necessary to avoid variation in excess of the limits allowed by
regulation 162(2) in the voltage declared to that consumer or to any other consumer
supplied from the same distributing main.
(2) The licensee shall not in any case be compelled to commence, or subject to the
provisions of regulation 146 to continue to give a supply of energy at low voltage to any
consumer from more than one pair or conductors of a system as aforesaid unless they
are reasonably satisfied in respect of the consumer’s installation-
(a) that the supply terminal are arranged in separate parts in such a manner that so far
as is reasonably practicable there shall be no danger of shock at medium voltage;
(b) that the consumers wiring connected to the separate pairs of supply terminals is kept
separate and distinct, or complies with the conditions applicable to a supply at
medium voltage prescribed by regulation 144;
(c) that in the case of any room containing the different pairs of conductors all socket
outlets are connected to one and the same pair of conductors.
(3) Provided that any consumer’s installation which complies with the provisions of the
regulations for electrical installations shall be deemed to fulfill the requirements of
regulations 142(2).

5.4.1.8 Supply at Medium Voltage

(1) The licensee shall not be compelled to commence or subject to the provisions of
regulation 146, to continue to give a supply of energy at medium voltage to any
consumer unless they are reasonably satisfied in respect of the consumer’s installation-
(a) that all metalwork enclosing supporting or associated with the consumers
installation, other than that designed to serve as a conductor is where necessary, to
prevent danger connected with earth;
(b) that the consumer’s wiring is either completely enclosed in metal which is electrically
continuous and adequately protected against mechanical damage or, alternatively, is
so constructed, installed and protected as to prevent danger so far as is reasonably
practicable.
Page 142 of 282 
(c) that the supply of energy to each motor or separate piece of apparatus is controlled
by an efficient cut-out switch placed in such a position as to be readily accessible to
and easily operated by the person in charge of the said motor or apparatus and so
connected in circuit that by its means all voltage can cut-off from the motor or
apparatus itself and from any regulating switch, resistance or other device
associated therewith.
(2) Provided that an installation shall be deemed to fulfill the requirements of this
regulation if it complies with the provisions of the regulations for electrical installation or
where applicable regulations governing electrical installation made under the provisions
of-
(a) The National Film and Video Censors Board Act [Cap. N40]); or
(b) The Minerals and Mining Act [Cap. M12];
(c) Any other Act.

5.4.1.9 Supply for Luminous Tube Sign On Outside Of Premises

(1) The licensee shall not knowingly commence or subject to the provisions of these
Regulations, continue to give a supply of energy to any consumer who proposes to
transform or is transforming the energy to a higher voltage for the purposes of luminous
tube sign or the like on the outside of any premises unless either they are satisfied with
respect to consumers installation that-
(a) efficient cut-off switch on the lower voltage side of the transforming apparatus
are provided both inside and outside any premises on which the said sign is
placed and in such position as to be readily accessible and easily operated
without danger in any emergency and so connected in circuit that by their means
all high voltage can be cut off from the sign itself and from any regulating switch
resistance or other device associated therewith;
(b) No metal work designed to be electrically charged at high voltage will normally
be exposed so that it can be touched.
(c) all conductor for use at high voltage (other than overhead lines and service
wires) connecting the parts in a luminous tube sign or the like are completely
enclosed in metal which is electrically continuous and where necessary to
prevent danger adequately protected against mechanical damage, and that the
said conductors are so arranged as to give a clear space of not less than 100mm
between the outside of their metallic covering or and the outside covering of any
other electric line not forming part of the consumers installation or any part;
(d) all metal work enclosing supporting or associated with the consumers
installation, other than that designed to serve as a conductor, is where necessary
to prevent danger connected with earth;
(e) all winding at high voltage of apparatus within reach from any position in which a
person may require to be efficiently protected so as to prevent danger;
(f) in respect of the transforming apparatus, suitable provision is made to guard
against danger by reason of the circuit at lower voltage becoming accidentally
charged above normal voltage by leakage from or contact with the circuit at
higher voltage;
(g) unless the conditions of supply are such that the whole of the conductors and
apparatus may be made dead at the same time for the purpose of cleaning or for
other work thereon, they are so arranged that they may be dead in sections, and
that such sections are so electrically isolated from all adjacent metal which is live
that work on any section made dead may be carried on by an authorized person
without danger;

Page 143 of 282 
 (h) adequate means are provided for preventing any unauthorized person from
coming into contact with any part of the consumer’s installation which is
designed to be electrically charged at high voltage and that an appropriate
danger notice is displayed at points of access thereto; or
(2) Where the consumers, in writing that the installation has been installed and will be
maintained in compliance with the provisions of the XXX the installation shall be
deemed to fulfill the requirements of this regulation save in so far as these Regulations
specifies any requirements not contained in the Section XX.
(3) Provided that where it can be shown that in the event of an accident involving death
or injury to any person or persons, the customer had failed to install or maintain the
installation in compliance with any written guarantee shall be liable to prosecution under
the provisions of these Regulations.

5.4.1.10 Disconnection of Supply in Certain Circumstances

a. Where a supply of energy is being afforded to a consumer and the licensee after
making such examination as the circumstances permit have reasonable ground for
supposing that a leakage likely to cause fire hazard or endanger life exists at some
parts of the installation or that the said installation or any part thereof fails to fulfill
any requirements of regulations 142 to 146 inclusive, the following provisions shall
(subject as provided in paragraph (2) of this Section) have effect:-
i. in any case where the licensee is prima facie satisfied that immediate action
is justified as a work of emergency in the interest of the public safety or in
order to avoid undue interference with the efficient supply of energy to other
customer they may as a work of emergency forthwith discontinue the supply
of energy to the customers installation and shall give immediate notice in
writing of the discontinuance to the customer, specifying the matter
complained of.
ii. In any other case, the licensee may by notice in writing require the customer
within reasonable time after the service of the notice to permit an inspecting
engineer to inspect and test the said installation at any time between the
hours of 8:00a.m and 4:00p.m. If the customer does not give all due facilities
for inspection and testing, or if as the result of any such inspection and
testing, the inspection engineer makes a report confirming the existence of a
leakage from the customers installation or report that the said installation or
any part thereof fails to fulfill any requirements regulations 142 to 146
inclusive, the licensee may forthwith by notice in writing, specify the matter
complained of, and if the customer fails to show to the reasonable
satisfaction of the licensee within such reasonable period as may be
specified in that behalf in the notice that the said matter has been remedied,
the licensee may on the expiration of the said period but subject as
hereinafter provided discontinue the supply of energy to the customers
installation, giving immediate notice in writing of such discontinuance to the
customers.
iii. any difference which may arise between a consumer and the licensee in
regard to any matter complained of or as to the period specified for
remedying the same in any notice as aforesaid shall be settled in manner
provided for by regulation 148.
iv. in the exercise of the powers conferred by paragraph (1) (b) of this Section,
the licensee shall not discontinue the supply of energy pending the
settlement of any differences referred to in paragraph (1) (c) of this Section,
Page 144 of 282 
 and shall in no case discontinue the supply of energy to the whole of the
customer’s installation, where it is practicable to disconnect that portion in
respect of which any matter is complained of.
v. Provided that nothing in this Section shall prevent the licensee from
exercising the powers conferred by paragraph (1) (d) of this Section in the
event of the development of a condition of emergency as therein provided;
vi. where in pursuance of this regulation the licensee has discontinued the
supply of energy to the customers installation or any part thereof, the
licensee shall not recommence the supply of energy until they are reasonably
satisfied in respect of the customer’s installation that all requirements of
regulations 142 to 146 inclusive have been fulfilled or until it has been
determined or decided in the manner provided for by regulation 148 that
licensee is not entitled under regulation 142 to 146 inclusive to decline to
recommence the supply and thereupon the supply of the energy shall be
recommenced by the licensee.
b. The foregoing provisions of this regulation shall extend so far as applicable and with
the necessary adaptations to any electric lines and apparatus situated on the
consumers side of the supply terminals and belonging to the licensee or under their
control within the meaning of regulation 140 and where the supply of energy has
been discontinued in pursuance of the said provisions , the licensee shall subject to
the respect to the letting on terms of hire or hire- purchase of any such electric lines
and apparatus, forthwith remedy the defect in the said electric lines and apparatus
and recommence the supply of energy.

5.4.1.11 Notices by Licensee to Consumers Where Connection is Declined or it

is Intended to Disconnect Supply
a. In any case where the licensee in pursuance of this part of these Regulations
decline to connect a consumer’s installation or any part thereof with their electrical
lines or to commence or continue to give a supply of energy thereto or decline to
recommence the supply of energy after the same has been discontinued, they shall
serve on the consumer a notice in writing stating their reasons for so declining.
b. Any difference which may arise between a customer and the licensee either with
reference to any notice under paragraph (1) of this Section or under regulation 147
or with reference to any customer’s installation to which the provisions of regulations
140(1) and 141 (2) apply, shall be determined by an inspector nominated by the
Commission on the application of the customer or his authorized agent or of the
licensee, as the case may be. The Commission shall prescribe the fee to be paid to
such inspector and the inspector shall determine which of the parties shall bear the
costs of (including the prescribed fee) or any portion of such costs.
c. Provided that in the case of any customer installation (or any part thereof) which was
connected with the electrical lines of the licensee and supplied with energy prior to
the prescribed data it shall not be competent for an inspector nominated under this
regulation to determine that the licensee were or are entitled under regulations x to x
inclusive to refuse a supply of energy thereof if the inspector is satisfied that:-
i. the said installation has continued to function satisfactorily up to the material
time;
ii. the installation is to be or is being continued in use only within the limits of
the maximum power for which it was originally intended; and
Page 145 of 282 
 iii. there are no grounds for supposing that the installation will fail to continue to
function satisfactorily for a further reasonable period without risk of danger
d. If the licensee or the customer or his authorized agent is dissatisfied with the
determination of the inspector, s/he may appeal to the Commission and thereupon
the Commission shall enquire into and decide upon the matter of the appeal and the
Commission decision shall be final and binding on all parties.
e. This regulation and regulation 146 shall be endorsed on every notice given by the
licensee to a customer under the provisions of either of the said regulations, or
alternatively a copy of each of the said regulation shall accompany the notice.

5.4.1.12 Exterior Wall Lines at Consumer Facilities

Service drop lines shall be extended to customer’s premises through either of the following:

a. Direct connection or termination at the customer premises using a complete D-Iron

bracket or wall piece insulator firmly anchored with hardcore concrete mix. Minimum
service cable cross sectional area shall be 16mm2 PVC insulated cable for single-phase
supply.

b. Underground connections from the nearest service pole to the customer meter position.
Customers with load profile up to 10kW shall be serviced on three phase 4-wire with
cable of minimum cross sectional area of 10mm2 x 4core or 16mm2 aluminium PVC
insulated cable.

5.4.1.13 Temporary Service Drop Lines

Request for temporary service drop lines shall abide by the requirements outlined below;

a. Prospective customer shall apply to the licensee for temporary electricity supply using
prescribed format.

b. The licensee or his representative shall inspect or examine the possibility of providing
the electrical power as requested.

c. The licensee shall advice the customer of requirements for provision of temporary
electric supply if found that electric power supply can be extended.

d. Installation shall be examined and certificate submitted by licensed electrical wiring

contractor indicating all electrical works have been done in accordance with extant
regulations.

e. Electrical service connections including metering shall be arranged by the licensee if all
the requirements have been met.

f. If the electrical load requirements cannot be met, the customer shall be informed in
writing. On receipt of the decline of connection, the contractor/customer shall make
alternative arrangements for supply of electrical power to his installation.

g. If the electrical load requirement can be met, the licensee shall approve request as per
application.

Page 146 of 282 
h. The customer shall draw from the network the energy required as per request up to a
total load indicated in the application.

i. The electrical power to the customer shall be in the form of single phase or three-phase
alternating current at a nominal frequency of 50Hz.

j. The customer shall pay the cost towards electrical installation and security deposit as
demanded by the licensee.

k. The customer shall pay for the cost of electrical energy as agreed upon by both parties.

l. If customer fails to pay for the energy consumed within the time as stipulated by the
licensee, it shall be lawful for the distribution company to cut off the supply of power after
giving 15 days notice.

m. The quantity of electrical energy supplied by the licensee to the customer shall be
ascertained by means of a meter or meters to be provided by the licensee.

n. The said meter or meters, shall at all reasonable time be open to the licensee or his
authorized representatives and shall be properly sealed on behalf of both parties and
shall not be interfered with by either party except in the presence of the other party or his
representatives duly authorized on that behalf.

o. The customer shall not make any alteration on the machinery or equipment either by
way of addition or substitutions or transfer which is liable to increase the obligation of the
licensee to supply electrical energy in excess of the agreed demand and or which may
affect the supply system of the licensee to its detriment.

p. In any event, the customer shall notify the licensee of the intended alterations, additions,
substitutions or transfer and obtain the prior approval of the licensee in writing before
execution of any such action.

q. The power factor of the plant and apparatus owned and operated by the customer at
individual points of supply shall not ordinarily be less than 0.90. If it tends to drop below
0.9, it shall be improved by the installation of static capacitors, failing which; the supply
shall be disconnected with a 10 working days notice.

r. Electrical supply under this agreement is guaranteed to the customer subject to

availability of adequate power from the national grid and in case of non-availability of
power supply from the national grid, no alternate source of power shall be made
available to the customer.

s. The licensee and customer shall agree that it shall be competent for either party to
terminate this agreement by issue of 10 working days notice sent by registered post.

t. Safe operation and maintenance of internal wiring, electrical fittings and installations will
be the responsibility of the customer in such conditions as to be free from danger as per
provisions stipulated in this regulation

Page 147 of 282 
u. Power supply shall be used only for the purpose asked for and not for any other
purpose. If the supply is used for any other purpose, or extended to a third party, the
licensee will disconnect the supply after due notice except in circumstances covered by
Section 6 of Connection and Disconnection Procedure Regulations of NERC.

v. The licensee does not in any way hold itself responsible for any accident, damage or
injury that may result from or through the presence of electrical connection in the above
place.

Page 148 of 282 
5.5 Underground Distribution

General Requirements
Underground distribution lines shall consist of networks constructed with cables and
associated equipment according to prescribed standards. All cables, whether for A.C. or
D.C. and for all voltages, shall be insulated as required and manufactured in accordance
with appropriate Nigerian Industrial Standard Specifications. Where steel armouring is
employed, it shall be effectively earthed and bonded at all joint boxes so as to be electrically
continuous.

Standard cable sizes and characteristics for underground distribution lines are as contained
in NIS IEC 60502.

Cables shall be of hard drawn stranded copper. Bare aluminium cables shall not be used for
underground distribution network.

Properties of Underground Distribution Cables

Classification of cables
Cables shall be classified according to the operating voltages as follows
 Low Voltage Cables Rated up to 2,000 volts
 Medium Voltage Cables Rated 2,001 through 46,000 volts
 High Voltage Cables Rated 69,000 volts to 500,000 volts
 Extra High Voltage Cables

Voltage rating
Distribution cables to be used in the underground distribution network shall be rated based
on phase-to-phase voltage values.

Cable Insulation Resistance

Underground cables shall possess adequate insulation resistance level to permit minimum
leakage current within the operating temperature that will guarantee safety in operation. The
impulse and dielectric strength of cables on medium voltage lines shall be capable to
withstand 75kV and 170kV on 11kV and 33kV voltage levels.

Materials
Cables for use on medium and low voltage circuits shall be copper conductor impregnated
paper insulated belted 4-core, lead sheathed cables complying with NIS IEC 60055-2, to be
checked 4-core cables shall be steel tape or stranded armoured, PVC insulated cables
complying with NIS IEC 60502 to be checked shall also be used. Cross-linked polyethylene
(XLPE) cables shall also be accepted in medium voltage underground distribution lines.
The sizes of cables shall be as shown below:

Page 149 of 282 
 Number of Cores Nominal Conductor Size and Material
2
4 35mm copper for customer’s services only
2
4 70mm copper for mains and uprisers
2
4 150mm copper for mains and uprisers
Single 185mm2 copper from Transformer to Feeder Pillar (LV Cable)
2
“ 300mm copper Transformer to Feeder Pillar (LV Cable)
2
“ 500mm copper Transformer to Feeder Pillar (LV cable)
2
3 120 – 185mm (Medium voltage)
2
1 240 – 500mm (Medium voltage)

Jointing Requirements for Underground Distribution Cables

General Requirements for Cable Joints and Terminations
The following general requirements shall be satisfied when making joints and terminations:
All heat shrink components shall be kept free of contamination during jointing.
Cable ends being worked on shall be kept free of any damage or contamination during the
jointing process.
Cable cores shall not be bent tighter than the manufacturers’ specified minimum internal
bending radii either during the jointing process or after they have been set in position.

All components used for jointing and terminations (including cable components), which will
come into contact with either masking tape or adhesive sealants, shall be thoroughly
cleaned and degreased prior to the application of these sealing agents. Cleaning shall only
be done using lint-free cloth.
Heat shrink tubings shall be positioned correctly, and properly and evenly shrunk, free of
voids and shall not be damaged due to overheating. Heat shrink components with adhesive
sealant coatings shall provide effective sealing against moisture ingress when installed.
The specified overlapping distances between various heat shrink tubings and cable
components shall always be adhered to.
Completed joints and terminations shall be allowed to either cool down or set before they
are subjected to any further mechanical load.
The three active cable cores shall be coloured red, yellow and blue. The neutral core shall
be coloured black.
The completed joint if directly buried, shall be surrounded in soft bedding material up to a
depth of 100 mm above the joint.

Cable Terminations and Joints

Three-core cables:

Page 150 of 282 
 The minimum internal bending radius of the cable, electrical clearances in cable end boxes
and the practical aspects of cable laying shall dictate termination of 3-core cables.

Trifurcation, three core terminations and three-to-one joint methods of termination shall
apply to appropriate cable sizes to meet the requirements of internal bending radius and
safe clearances at the end boxes.

The lugs shall be of the compression type and shall have sealed palms and barrels (except
for the cable entry end). Compression lugs shall be installed in strict compliance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations of crimps. Lugs shall be long barrel type and suitably
sealed for outdoor use.

Installation of Underground Distribution Cables

Cables shall be laid in well dug out twin wall corrugated ducts and identified with route
markers made visible and securely placed as not to cause obstruction in any form.

Excavation of Trenches
(1) The cables shall be laid at a depth of not less than 1 metre below surface level and in
cases where two or more power cables are laid in the same trench, a minimum distance of
300mm shall be maintained between the cables.
(2) To prevent the cables being damaged by stones the cables shall be laid in a bed of sifted
soil or sand and to prevent mechanical damage the cables shall be protected by inter-locked
tiles sufficiently wide to give a minimum of 50 mm on each side of the cable and laid
approximately 150 mm above the cables.
(3) The cable route shall be indicated at surface level with cable markers at suitable
intervals, particularly at positions where the cable changes direction stating the voltage
levels.

Depth of Cable Laying

The depth of laying and trench dimensions shall be as specified below. Any variation from
the specified depth shall be approved by NERC. When cables are laid under or along a
railway and within a zone of 1.83m (6ft) measured from the nearest rail, a depth of 1.25m
(4ft) to the top of the cables shall be maintained unless otherwise specified.

LV and MV Combined MV/11KV

Voltage In Across Along In Across Along
Footpaths Carriageways Carriageways Footpaths Carriageways Carriageways
Dept of 1’ 6” 2’ 0” 3’ 0” 2’ 0” 2’ 6” 3’ 0
Trench 460mm 610mm 910mm 610mm 760mm 910mm
Width of 1’ 0” 1’ 0” 1’ 6” 1’ 3” 1’ 0” 1’ 6”
Trench 300mm 300mm 460mm 380mm 300mm 460mm
Depth of 1’ 3” 1’ 9” 2’ 3”
Slab 380mm 530mm 690mm

Method of Cable Laying

The arrangements of the cable or cables, and all methods of laying over the whole route
shall be as specified. The methods of laying shall be as follows:
 Laid direct in the ground
 Drawn into pipes and ducts

Page 151 of 282 
Route Identification of Underground Distribution Cables
5.5.4.1 Cable routes
Underground cable routes shall be planned bearing in mind the type of use, or foreseeable
use, to which the land is or may be put into use.
Cable routes shall be along the footpaths and across roads.
Routes shall not be planned along carriageway unless other alternative routes are not
reasonably practicable.

Where a cable route crossing a private land is unavoidable then a permanent easement
shall be obtained.

5.5.4.2 Routes to avoid

Cable route along areas of land with natural features and having legal protection due to their
environmental character or sensitivity shall be avoided. Such designations include reserves,
special areas of conservation and scheduled ancient monuments.

5.5.4.3 CABLE ARRANGEMENTS

5.5.4.3.1 Laid Direct in Footpaths
When medium voltage or low voltage cables are laid in footpaths, they shall be laid direct in
the trenches. The trenches shall be of width 300 mm and depth 600 mm for both one circuit
and two circuits. Trenches designed to accommodate two circuits and two spares shall be of
width 380 mm and depth 760 mm.

5.5.4.3.2 Laid Along Carriageways

Cable laid along carriageways, medium and low voltage cables shall be laid direct in
trenches of dimensions 460 mm wide and 910 mm deep.

Combined Cable Laying Arrangements for Different Voltage Levels

Where it is found necessary to lay medium voltage cables in the same trench, the
construction shall be carried out as detailed below:

Laid-In Footpaths
If one medium voltage and one high voltage circuit are to be accommodated, the high
voltage cable shall be laid 230 mm deeper than the medium voltage cable, topped with 80
mm of backfilled and covered with the cable slab. The maximum depth of the trench shall be
600 mm and its width shall be 380 mm. The cable cover shall overlap the high voltage and
any associated pilot cable by at least 40 mm on either side. If one medium voltage and two
high voltage cables are to be laid in the same trench, the two high voltage cables shall be
laid at the bottom of the trench and the medium voltage cable laid midway between them at
a height of 230 mm above them on a level with the cable protective covers. The width of the
trench shall be 530 mm and its overall depth 600 mm.

Page 152 of 282 
Laid-In Ducts
When medium and high voltage cables are to be laid in ducts in the same trench, the
arrangement shall be as described below and one of the spare ducts shall be used for the
medium voltage cable.

Depth Width
One Circuit 600 mm 300 mm
One Circuit plus one spare or two Circuits 600 mm 600 mm
Two Circuits plus two spares 760 mm 600 mm

Laid Along Carriageways

Along carriageways, both medium and high voltage cables shall be laid to a depth of 910
mm. The high voltage cable shall be covered with its protective cover. The trench width
shall be 460 mm.

Ducts
Cable ducts shall be non-metallic and comply with IEC 61084:1-2. The size of ducts
required for different type of cables is shown in the following table:

Description Nominal Duct Sizes (mm)

All HV Feeder Cables 150
HV Transformer Cables > 150
2
35 mm
HV Transformer Cable < 100
35 mm2
All LV Main Cables 100
All Streetlight Cables 50

Underground Distribution Cables Adjacent to and or Crossing with Other Objects

5.6.4.1 Railway Crossings by Underground Cables
All proposals in respect of railway crossings shall be submitted by the Licensee in
writing within 30 days and not later than 90 days to the relevant authority specifying
the intended use of the works. All cables shall be drawn into non-metallic pipes,
such as earthwire, fibre, etc which shall be laid at a minimum depth of 1.25 m below
rail level measured to the top of the highest pipe, and shall be surrounded by not
less than 250 mm of concrete. The pipes shall extend at least 300 mm beyond the
sleeper ends and be bushed to prevent chafing and ingress of stones.

5.6.4.2 Road crossings by Underground Cables

Where cables have to cross under roads, they shall be drawn into non-metallic pipes
such as fibre. These pipes shall be laid at a minimum depth of 1.0 m below surface
of the road measured to the top of the highest pipe and cable tiles shall be laid in a
bed of sifted soil or sand and to prevent mechanical damage. Interlocked tiles
sufficiently wide to give a minimum of 50.0 mm on each side of the cable and lead
approximately 150 mm above the cable shall protect the cables. The end of the
pipes shall be packed with a suitable bushing to avoid chafing and the ingress of
stones.

Page 153 of 282 
 5.6.4.3 Proximity to Water and Petrol Pipes
Cables shall not be laid at a distance of less than 1.0 m from pipes carrying water or
petrol.

5.6 Special Distribution Lines

The following regulations shall apply for special distribution lines.

5.6.1 Over Water and Under Water Distribution Cables

5.6.1.1 Electric Lines Crossing Waterways

(1)The height of an electric line under, the most adverse conditions, above the
highest recorded water level, over harbours, rivers and waterways, shall not be less
than that required by the appropriate authorities for physical safety clearance, plus a
minimum electrical safety clearance of 3.0 m or 1.0 m per 78 kV or phase to neutral
voltage of the electric line, whichever is the greater.
(2) The Licensee shall, at least within thirty (30) days and not more than ninety (90)
days prior to the placing of such work, serve written notice on the appropriate
authorities specifying the intended use of the works, the voltage of operation and
such other information that the authorities may require him to supply.
(3) Every notice served in conformity with Clause 2 above shall be accompanied by
a plan of suitable scale indicating the site of the crossing, the location of all supports,
stays, struts, switches, transformers and other apparatus intended to be used.
(4) The authorities may within 21 days of the receipt of such a notice of intention
served under Clause 2 above serve a counter notice on the Licensee -–
(a) objecting to the siting of the works specifying the reason in the counter notice;
and
(b) requiring protective features to be fitted on such features to be specified in the
counter notice.

5.6.2 Distribution Lines over Bridges and Other Structures

Risk Assessment shall be carried out taking into account the frequency and type of
activites at risk. The crossing of distribution lines over bridges shall preferably be at
right angles but not less than 30o to minimize the length of exposure of the
distribution line to a minimum. Towers shall be used where this can mitigate the risk
of crossing.

5.6.3 Distribution Lines with Aerial-Bundled Cables

Aerial Bundled Cables (ABC) shall be accepted for overhead power distribution
lines. It shall be XLPE Insulated Aluminium Conductor laid on high tensile stranded
galvanized steel with a bare messenger wire.
The operating temperature range shall fall within 5ºC to 90ºC and permissible sag of
1.5% of the span at the lowest ambient temperature. Mid span joint is not
permissible in high tension line construction and outdoor type termination is
acceptable while ensuring continuity of the semi-conductor screen at all joints where
applicable.
Page 154 of 282 
5.6.3.1 Medium Voltage (MV) Aerial Bundled Cables
(a) General Requirements for MV Aerial Bundled Cables (ABC)
High Voltage Aerial Bundled Cables shall be XLPE insulated with a maximum
operating voltage of 12 kV designed for use in overhead distribution lines. The cable
shall comprise three single-core cables twisted around a bare Aluminium alloy
messenger wire, which shall carry the weight of the cable.

(b) Cable Conductors

The cable conductors shall be of round, stranded and compacted Aluminium of
nominal cross sectional area of 35 mm² / 70 mm² / 95 mm² /120 mm².

(c) Insulation
The insulation shall be of extruded cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE), Dry Gas cured
of nominal insulation thickness of 3.6 mm.

(d) Messenger (Neutral Conductor)

The bare messenger wire shall be of 70 mm² / 80 mm²/ 100 mm² (nominal area)
Aluminium alloy.

There shall be no joints in any wire of the stranded messenger conductor except
those made in the base rod or wires before final drawing.

5.6.3.2 Low Voltage Aerial Bundled Cables

General Requirements for LV Aerial Bundled Cables (ABC)

Low voltage Aerial Bundled Cables (ABC) shall be polyethylene insulated Aluminium
cables twisted over a central bare Aluminium alloy messenger wire for use on L.T.
overhead lines. The rated voltage of the cables shall be 1000 Volts.

Phase Conductors of Aerial Bundled Cables

The phase conductors and street lighting conductors where applicable shall be
made of Aluminium and shall be stranded in construction and shall be insulated with
black weather resistant polyethylene suitable for 1000 Volts insulation.

The insulated conductors shall generally conform to the NISxxx.

The phase conductors shall be provided with suitable means for quick identification.

The tensile strength of the Aluminium wires used in the conductors shall not be less
than 90 N/sq.mm.

The standard sizes shall include 16 mm2, 25 mm2, 35 mm2, 50 mm2, 70 mm2, 95
mm2 and 120 mm2.
Page 155 of 282 
 Messenger (Neutral Conductor)

The bare messenger wire shall be made of Aluminium alloy composed of 7 strands
and shall be suitably compacted to have smooth round surface to avoid damage to
the polyethylene insulation of the phase conductors twisted around the messenger.

There shall be no joints in any wire of the stranded messenger conductor except
those made in the base rod of wires before final drawing. The standard sizes shall
include 25 mm2, 35 mm2, 50 mm2 and 70 mm2.

Page 156 of 282 
Chapter 6: Distribution Substations
6.1 Civil Works
The Design of the civil works for Distribution Substations shall be as specified in Clause 4.1
of these regulations.

6.2 Basic Distribution Substation Components

6.2.1 Distribution Transformers
A Distribution Transformer has the final voltage transformation in electric power
distribution system stepping down medium voltages to low voltages.

Distribution Transformer can either be of single-phase type or three-phase type.

Three phase Distribution Transformer shall have a vector group Dyn11.

Transformers used in Distribution Substation shall conform to the specifications of

IEC 60076 All Parts.

6.2.1.1 Transformer Protection Devices

The protection devices for distribution transformers shall be able to allow for the
normal range of operating current due to energization, transient current, lightning
and heavy temporary loading. Protection devices shall also be adequate to protect
the transformer during extended period of heavy overload thereby protecting the
system from a failed transformer.

a. Transformer Primary Protective Devices

Fuses for the protection of distribution transformers shall be installed in accordance

with manufacturer’s specifications.

b. Transformer Secondary Protective Devices

As specified in Clause 6.2.2.1

6.2.2 Connection Cables

The following regulations shall apply for the safe operation of transformer cables.

6.2.2.1 Medium Voltage Cables

Medium Voltage Cables are cables that are capable of being operated at nominal
voltage range of 1,000V to 33,000V.

The insulation withstand voltage of high tension cables shall not be less than twice
the nominal voltage rating of the cable as specified in IEC 60502-2.

6.2.2.2 Low Voltage Cables

Low Voltage Cables are cables that are capable of being operated at nominal
voltage of less than 1,000V.

Page 157 of 282 
 All Low Voltage cables shall be in compliance with Clauses XXX. The low voltage
cables for 400/230 V level are to consist, according to requirement of single, two and
four-core low voltage power cables.

The standard phase colour shall be Red (L1 or R), Yellow (L2 or Y), Blue (L3 or B)
(RYB), unless otherwise specified in IEC 60173.

The insulation withstand voltage of low tension cables shall not be less than twice
the nominal voltage rating of the cable as specified in IEC 60502-1.

6.3 LV Distribution (Feeder Pillar) Panels

6.3.1 Structural and Mechanical Specifications
Distribution Feeder Pillars can be designed / manufactured as a four way, six way or
eight way power distribution application.

Rear mounted phase bus bar, double door construction, weather proof coating,
rubber seal gasket must have neutral and neutral earth bus bars.

Feeder Pillars shall be installed on a plinth of not less than 600 mm from the ground
furnished with tamper proof lock and appropriate cable clamp.

6.3.2 Electrical Insulations

The electrical insulation of Low Voltage Feeder Pillar shall be capable of
withstanding a voltage not less than two times its nominal voltage.

6.3.3 Metering
Low Voltage Distribution Feeder Pillars shall be metered for the purpose of
measuring the parameters of the distribution network at each substation in
accordance with the Nigerian Metering Code.

The following instruments shall be installed for the measuring of LV feeder pillar
parameters;

a. Ammeter:
At least one ammeter shall be installed on a feeder pillar incomer bus bar.
b. Voltmeter:
Voltmeter shall be installed on a feeder pillar to show line-to-line and line-to-
neutral voltages.
c. Energy Meter:
Energy Meter for low voltage distribution feeder pillar panels shall be installed in
accordance with the requirements of the Nigerian Metering Code.

6.4 Compact Distribution Substation

Compact Distribution Substation shall be of indoor, outdoor or underground substation type
with compartment for medium voltage switchgear, transformer and low voltage distribution
Page 158 of 282 
 board complete with necessary connection accessories in accordance with the
requirements of IEC 62271-202.

6.5 Pole Mounted Distribution Substation

The requirements for distribution transformer specified in clause 6.2.1 shall apply.

Pole mounted transformers for overhead Distribution Substation shall be installed at a

minimum height of 3.0 m from the base of the pole. The materials to be used shall be of
lightweight, outdoor compatible, with integrated high and low voltage bushings and
complete with corrosion, protection on all steel parts for improved public safety.

The nominal operating voltage for pole mounted transformer substation shall lie between
the medium voltage range and low voltage. 

Page 159 of 282 
Chapter 7: User’s Sites Electrical Installations

7.1 General Provisions

This Regulation applies to all user’s sites installations connected to any electrical power
supply under the authority of a license granted under the Act (whether granted before or
after the coming into force of this Regulation), and to all user’s sites irrespective of their
source of supply shall be in the following configurations and voltages:

a. Single phase 2 wire supply at 230 Volts

b. Three Phase 4-wire supply at 400 Volts

7.2 Indoor Installation

The indoor installation for any user’s site shall meet the following general criteria:

i. Maximum safety to life and property;

ii. Efficient utilization of electrical energy;
iii. Minimum investment cost; and
iv. Environmental concerns

The Standards set out hereunder are aimed at achieving these criteria and shall require
sound and accurate information of the user’s site. The approving authority shall ensure strict
compliance with the applicable Standards.

7.2.1 Electrical Design

Every user’s site electrical installation shall be designed, certified and approved by COREN
registered electrical engineers. All such electrical designs shall, however, meet the
applicable Standards stated herein, and where no provisions have been made in these
Standards, the IEC standards shall apply.

7.2.2 Restriction of Indoor Lines Voltage

The line-to-earth voltage of an electric facility in a User Site shall be as stated in Part II,
Section 4.3.1 of the Distribution Code (Version 1). Or less according to the safety measures
mentioned in the following items:

7.2.2.1
In the case of TT earthing type (See Figure 7.2.2a), Earthing work Class D of Table 5.3.2b
shall be given to any single-phase low-voltage equipment irrespective of the user’s site.

Page 160 of 282 
 Figure 7.2.2a: TT System

Table 7.2.2.1

7.2.2.2
The indoor wiring shall contain protective earthing conductors beforehand to ensure the
earthing of electric equipment.

7.2.3 Indoor Wiring Cables

The indoor wiring cables shall be chosen to meet each user’s site specifications by relying
on Standards codified under 7.2.3.1 to 7.2.3.28 and where any user’s site specific
requirements are not met by the Standards contained herein, the relevant IEC Standards
shall apply provided such IEC standards do not conflict with any national standards.

Page 161 of 282 
7.2.3.1 Materials and Types of Cables

7.2.3.1.1
All cable conductors for internal wiring other than the outer conductors of earthed concentric
systems shall be of annealed copper, and shall conform to NIS IEC 60228.

7.2.3.1.2
Every non-flexible cable for use as fixed wiring operating at low and medium voltages shall
comply with the relevant NIS and shall be selected from one of the following types:

a. Non-armoured PVC insulated cables; NIS IEC 60227-3

b. Armoured PVC insulated cables; NIS IEC 60502-1
c. Split-concentric copper-conductor PVC insulated cables; NIS IEC 61089
d. Rubber insulated cables; NIS IEC 60245-1
e. Impregnated-paper-insulated, lead-sheathed or aluminum sheathed cables; NIS IEC
60055-2
f. Mineral-insulated metal-sheathed cables; NIS IEC 60702-1
g. XLPE cables; NIS IEC 60502-1 and
h. Any other non-flexible cable that complies with applicable NIS IEC standards.

In non-flexible cables of every type, conductors of cross-sectional area 10 mm2 or

less shall be of copper or copper-clad aluminum. Any of the types of cable sheathed
with PVC or lead, or having a Heat Resistant Fire Retardant (HRFR) sheath, if
intended for aerial suspension, may incorporate a catenary wire.

7.2.3.1.3
Bus bars and bus-bar connections on switchboards shall comply with NIS IEC 60439-2. The
requirement does not apply to a bus-bar trunking system.

7.2.3.1.4
Every conductor for use as an overhead line within a User’s site shall comply with the
relevant NIS and shall be selected from one of the following types:

a. Hard-drawn copper or cadmium-copper conductors; NIS IEC 61089

b. Hard-drawn aluminium and steel-cored aluminium conductors; NIS IEC 60889
c. Aluminium-alloy conductors; NIS IEC 61089
d. Insulated aluminium conductors for overhead power lines; NIS IEC 60227-1 and
e. Any other conductor that complies with applicable IEC standards.

7.2.3.1.5
The insulation of every flexible cable and flexible cord shall comply with the relevant NIS
and shall be selected from one of the following types:

a. Insulated flexible cords; NIS IEC 60227-5

b. Rubber insulated flexible cables; NIS IEC 60245-1
c. PVC insulated flexible cables (non-Armoured); NIS IEC 60227-3
d. Braided traveling cable for lifts; NIS IEC 60245-5 and
e. Rubber-insulated flexible trailing cables for quarries and miscellaneous mines NIS

Page 162 of 282 
 IEC 60245-1. Such rubber insulated flexible cables and flexible cords, may
incorporate flexible armour of galvanized steel or phosphor bronze, or a screen of
tinned copper-wire braid.
f. Any other flexible cable with insulation complying with applicable IEC standards.

Provided this regulation does not apply to a flexible cord forming part of a portable
appliance or light fitting where the appliance or light fitting as a whole is a special flexible
cable and flexible cord for combined power and telecommunication wiring.

7.2.3.1.6
All cables, including flexible cables and flexible cords, for use at extra-low voltage shall
comply with the applicable NIS.

7.2.3.2 Types of Insulation

7.2.3.2.1
The type of insulation and protective covering if any, of every cable for fixed wiring shall be
selected so as to allow compliance with the requirements of this Section as as a precaution
against mechanical damage or damage by heat, fire or explosion, damp and corrosion.

7.2.3.2.2
Cables insulated and/or sheathed with general-purpose PVC shall not be installed in
refrigerated spaces or other situations where the temperature is considered consistently
below 0oC.

7.2.3.2.3
Every flexible cable and flexible cord shall be selected from one of the following types:

a. Braided circular cable;

b. Un-kinkable cable;
c. Circular sheathed cable;
d. Flat-twin sheathed cable;
e. Braided circular twin and three-core, cable insulated with fiberglass.

Provided that these types shall be used only in dry situations for light fitting or for other
applications where the cord is not subject to abrasion or undue flexing.

7.2.3.2.4
Flexible cables and flexible cords, where they are exposed to risk of mechanical damage,
shall as a minimum be of a type sheathed with rubber or PVC and where necessary shall
also be armoured.

7.2.3.2.5
Flexible cables and flexible cords, which in normal use are exposed, to risk of contact with
water shall be of a type sheathed with rubber or PVC.

7.2.3.2.6

Page 163 of 282 
 Where flexible cables or flexible cords are exposed to risk of contact with oil or petrol, or
where the cable that will not support combustion is required, cables or cords having a PVC,
HRFR or oil resisting and flame retardant sheath shall be used as appropriate.

7.2.3.3 Voltage Rating

The voltage rating of every cable shall not be less than the declared or the nominal voltage
of the circuit.

7.2.3.4 Conductor Sizes

7.2.3.4.1
The size of every bare conductor or cable conductor shall be such that its current rating as
stated in Table 15-33 after the application of any factors appropriate to the type of cable, the
conditions of installation, and the class of excess-current protection provided it is not less
than the maximum sustained current which will normally flow through it. This standard does
not apply to certain conductors on switchboards.

TABLE 15

Sing‐circuit current ratings and associate volt drops for single core p.v.c insulated cables
Non‐armoured, with or without sheath
(Copper, conductors)
1.0mm2 to 35 mm2

The rating tabulated applies where cable is provided with coarse excess‐current protection (see item 2 (b) of the preface) for close excess‐current
protection, see rating factor below.

Conductor Bunched and enclosed Clipped direct to a surface or a cable

In conduit of trucking** Tray, bunched and unenclosed

2cables, single 3 or 4 cables 2 cables, single. 3 or 4 cables,

Phase a.c. or d.c Three‐ phase a.c Phase a.c or d.c Three‐phase a.c

Normal No. And dis

(mm) of wires
Cross‐sectional
(Seminal)
Area Current Volt‐drop Current Volt drop Current Volt‐drop Volt‐drop

Rating Per ampere Rating Per ampere Rating Per ampere Current Per ampere

Perm meters Perm meters Rating Perm meters


2
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Page 164 of 282 
 mm2 1 A mV A mV A mV A mV

1.0 1/1.13 11 40 9 35 13 40 12 35

1.5 1/1.38 13 27 11 23 27 23

7/0.50 30 26 16 30 15 2.6

2.5 1/1.78

7/0.67 18 16 14 23 16 20 14
16
4 7/0.85 24 10 88 30 10 27 8.8
22
6 7/1.04 31 68 5.9 38 6.8 34 5.9
28
10 7/1.35 42 40 3.5 51 4.0 46 3.5
39
16 7/1.70 56 26 2.2 63 2.6 61 2.2
50
25 7/2.14 73 16 1.4 89 1.6 80 1.4
66
35 7/2.53 90 12 1.0 109 1.2 98 1.0
80

Total volt drop between the consumer’s and any other point in the installation must not exceed 2 .5% of the nominal voltage. The rating in columns 3 and 5 relate to
cables in metal non‐ metallic conduct and trucking. For cables in underground pipes and ducts see item 4 (iv) of the preface the tables.

RATING FACTORS
FOR CLASS OF EXCESS‐CURRENT PROTECTION
1.33 may multiply the rating tabulated where there close excess current protection can be assured

FOR AMBIENT TEMPERATURE

Ambient Temperature 25oC 35oC 40oC 45oC 50oC 55oC 60oC 65oC

Rating factors for cables having coarse

Excess‐current protection 102 0.97 0.94 0.91 0.88 0.77 0.63 0.44

Rating factor for cables having close

excess‐current protection 106 0.94 0.87 0.79 0.71 0.61 0.5 0.35

FOR GROUPS

For group circuits unenclosed, the single circuit rating apply provided that
(1) The horizontal clearance between circuit is
(a) not less than 6 items the coverall diameter of an individual cable, and
(b) not less than the overall width of an individual circuit
‐except that the horizontal clearance need not in any case exceed 150 mm, and
(2) The vertical clearance between circuit is not less than 150mm, and
(3) if the number of circuit exceeds 4, they are installed in a horizontal phone.

In the other cases, unless a more precise evaluation current rating has been made based on experimental work or calculated data, the following factors are
applicable

No. of circuits (pairs of cables single‐phase a.c. or d.c

3 cables per circuit or 4 where one is
The neutral 3‐phase a. c. 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 14 16** 18** 20**
Ration factor 0.80 0.69 0.62 0.59 0.55 0.51 0.48 0.43 0.41 0.39 0.33 0.36


** Not applicable to 3‐phase.
P .V.C non‐ armoured single‐core (50mm2 to 630 mm2)
(COPPER)

Page 165 of 282 
7.2.3.4.2
No cable having a conductor of nominal cross sectional area less than 1.5 mm2 and flexible
cord having a conductor of nominal cross sectional area less than 0.75 mm2 shall be used
in User Site Installations.

7.2.3.4.3
Mains service cable shall be stranded, and have a current carrying capacity of not less than
the maximum demand for the installation. In no case shall the cable be smaller than 6mm2.

7.2.3.5 Load Assessment

7.2.3.5.1
If load assessment is not readily available for a user’s site, it shall be assessed according to
the following user‘s site classifications:

a. Urban areas comprising:-

i. Low Density Residential Areas: 50-85VA /m2;
ii. High Density Residential Areas: 20-30 VA/m2;
iii. Residential High Rise Buildings: 60-75VA /m2;
iv. Commercial High Rise Buildings: 70-80VA /m2;
v. Housing Estates: 50-70VA /m2;
vi. Parks/Amusements 50-70VA /m2
vii. Urban Slum 10-15VA/m2
b. Semi-Urban Areas:-
i. Residential Areas: 30-50VA /m2;
ii. Local Government Headquarters 25-50VA /m2
iii. Hospitals 30-70VA /m2
iv. Small and Medium Enterprises 30-50VA /m2
c. Rural Areas:-
i. Lighting/Essential Appliances 30-50VA /m2
ii. Clinics 30-50VA /m2
iii. Boreholes 0.75-3.5kVA
iv. Small Business Enterprises 25-35VA/m2
d. Industrial Complexes:-
i. Large Industries 50-200MVA
ii. Medium industries 1.0-50MVA
iii. Small Industries 0.1-1MVA
e. Commercial Loads
i. Large shopping complex loads 0.1-1MVA
ii. Media (Print and Electronic) 0.25-1.5MVA
iii. Hotels (large,medium and small) 0.05-2.5MVA
iv. Entertainment Centres 5-100kVA
f. Municipal Loads
i. Streetlights & Traffic Lights 30-100VA/installation
ii. Waterworks 0.5-20MVA
iii. Educational Institutions 30-100VA/m2
iv. Boreholes 250-2000VA/borehole
Page 166 of 282 
 v. Offices 45-150VA/m2
g. Agricultural Loads
i. Irrigation 1-10kVA/pump motor
ii. Agricultural Processing 5-800kVA
iii. Storage Facilities (Silos) 50-1000kVA
iv. Cold Storage facilities 100-200VA/m2
h. Large Infrastructures
i. Domestic Airports 0.5-2.0MVA
ii. International Airports 10-50MVA
iii. Seaports 30-75MVA

The above stated procedural guidelines for load assessment shall be subject to appropriate
review  to capture penetration of future energy efficient lighting system, appliances and
heavy industrial equipment and to the extent permitted by superior judgment of the design
engineer.

7.2.3.5.2
The load assessment of a building area in a user’s site shall be for all the floors as per plan
or as actually constructed, whichever is higher.

7.2.3.5.3
Where electrical energy is used for more than one purpose in a user’s site, the maximum
load demand shall be appropriately computed from the various loads assessed and
applicable diversity factor as decided upon by the design engineer using Table 7.2.3.

TABLE 7.2.3 
Allowance for diversity 
Estimation of the maximum current, which will normally flow in an installation. For use in 
calculating the size of cables and switchgear except for final sub‐circuits. 
Purpose of final sub‐circuits fed from  Types of installation 
the wiring to which diversity applies  Individual  Block of  Hotel, boarding  Shops, etc e.g. 
domestic  residential flats  houses, lodging  offices and 
installation    houses, etc  business 
including  premises, other 
Individual flats of  than 
a block  Factories 
1.  Lighting  66% 50% 75%  90%
2.  Heating and power appliances  100% fl up to 10  100% fl of the  100% fl of the  100% fl of the 
(but see 3‐8 below)  amperes  largest  largest appliance  largest appliance 
appliance 
    +50% of any load  +50% fl of 2nd +80% fl of 2nd  +75% fl of 
in excess of 10  largest  largest appliance  remaining 
amperes  appliance  appliance 
    appliance +33% fl of 3rd +60% fl of   
largest  remaining 
appliance   appliances 
      +20% of   

Page 167 of 282 
 remaining 
appliance 
3.  Cooking appliances permanently  10 amperes 100% fl of  100% fl of largest  100% fl of largest 
connected  largest  appliance  appliance 
appliance 
    30% fl of  +50% fl of 2nd +80% fl of 2nd  +80% fl of 2nd 
connected  largest  largest appliance  largest appliance 
cooking  appliance 
appliances in 
excess of 10 
amperes 
    +5 ampere if  +33% fl of 3rd +80% fl of 2nd  +80% fl of 2nd 
socket‐outlet  largest  largest appliance  largest appliance 
incorporated in  appliance 
unit 
      +25% fl of 4th  
largest 
appliance 
      +20% of   
remaining 
appliances 
4.  Motors other than Kft motors  100% fl of the  100% fl of the 
which are subject to special  NO DIVERSITY ALLOWED  largest motor  largest motor 
conditions 
      +50% fl of  80% fl of 2nd
remaining  largest motors 
motors 
5.  Water heaters (instantaneous  100% fl of the largest appliance To be assessed by a competent 
type)  person 
    To be assessed by a competent 
150% fl of 2nd largest appliance 
person 
    To be assessed by a competent 
+25% of remaining appliances 
person 
6.  Water heaters (thermostatically   
NO DIVERSITY ALLOWED ** 
controlled) 
7.  Socket‐outlets and stationery  100% largest  100% largest  100% largest fuse  100% largest 
appliances in accordance with  fuse or circuit‐ fuse or circuit‐ or circuit‐breaker  fuse or circuit‐
Table  breaker rating of  breaker rating of  rating of  breaker rating of 
individual circuits individual  individual circuits  individual circuits 
circuits 
    +40% sum of  +40% sum of  +50% sum of fuse  +40% sum of 
fuse or circuit‐ fuse or circuit‐ or circuit‐breaker  fuse or circuit‐
breaker rating of  breaker rating of  rating of other  breaker rating of 
other circuits  other circuits  circuits  other circuits 
8.  Socket‐outlet and stationery  100% fl of largest  100% fl of largest  100% fl of largest  100% fl of largest 
appliances other than those  point  point  point  point 
listed above 

Page 168 of 282 
    40% fl of other  40% fl of other  75% fl of points  75% fl of other 
points  points  in main rooms  points 
(dining room, 
etc)  
      40% fl of   
remaining points 
 
*For  the  purpose  of  this  Table,  an  instantaneous  water‐heater  is  deemed  to  be  water‐heater  of  any  loading, 
which heats water only while the tap, is turned on and therefore uses electricity intermittently. 
**It is important to ensure that the distribution boards are of sufficient rating to take the total load connected to 
them without the application of any diversity. 
 

7.2.3.5.4
Other special loads of a user site that meet the approval of the supply authority shall be
appropriately assessed in accordance with relevant Standards.

7.2.3.5.5
It shall be the responsibility of the design engineer to provide each user’s site load limiter of
suitable capacity in accordance with the actual assessed maximum demand of users’ sites.
The load limiter shall only be accessible to authorized persons and under no circumstance
shall modifications be made to the approved user’s site installation without prior approval
given by the local electricity distribution company.

7.2.3.5.6
After electrical installation work has been duly certified and approved at the user’s site, any
modification that may involve addition or alteration to the existing installation, beyond
replacement of lamps (preferably by energy efficient lamps), weather sensitive efficient
appliances, fuses, switches and other replaceable component parts of the installations
which in no way increase the installation capacity, shall not be carried out in the user’s site
unless:

a. Such modification is approved by the local electricity distribution company and

b. Duly carried out by a COREN Registered Engineering Personnel.

7.2.3.6 Specification for Earth Continuity Conductors and Allowable Voltage Drop

7.2.3.6.1
Every conductor used as earth continuity conductors shall have cross-sectional area of not
less than the cross-sectional area of the largest live conductor but in any case not less than
1.5mm2.

7.2.3.6.2
Cables connected in parallel shall be of the same type, size and length, to ensure proper
division of the current.

Page 169 of 282 
7.2.3.6.3
The size of every conductor approved for indoor wiring shall be such that the drop in voltage
from the consumer’s terminals to any point in the installation does not exceed 2.5 % of the
rated nominal voltage when the conductors are carrying the full load current, but
disregarding starting conditions of appliances driven by motors. This requirement shall not
apply to wiring fed from an extra-low voltage secondary of a transformer.

7.2.3.6.4
Where allowance is made for diversity, it may be taken into account in calculating voltage
drop.

7.2.3.6
The earthing-lead shall be stranded copper cable or flat copper, the latter not less than 19
mm by 3 mm. No conductor of a cross-sectional area less than 6mm2 shall be used as an
earthing lead.

7.2.3.7 Protection against Damage

7.2.3.7.1
All conductors and cables shall be adequately protected against any risk of mechanical
damage to which they may be exposed in normal conditions of service.

7.2.3.7.2
Where cables pass through holes in metalwork, precautions shall be taken to prevent
abrasion of the cables on any sharp edges.

7.2.3.7.3
Non-sheathed cables shall be protected by enclosure in conduit, duct or trunking.

7.2.3.7.4
Cables shall not be run in a lift (or hoist) shaft unless they form a part of the lift installation.
Cables of lift installations, other than traveling cables, in such a shaft shall be:

a. Armoured;
b. Mineral-insulated, metal-sheathed;
c. Of a type having a HRFR or ORFR (oil-resisting and flame-retardant); or
d. Enclosed in metal conduit, duct or trunking, high impact rigid PVC conduit, or
otherwise effectively protected against mechanical damage.

7.2.3.8 Cable Bending

The internal radius of every bend in a cable shall be not less than the appropriate value
stated in Table 7.2.3.8.

 
 
 
 
 
Page 170 of 282 
 TABLE 7.2.3.8 
Minimum internal radius of bends in cables for fixing wiring. 
Insulation  Finish  Overall diameter  Factor to be applied to 
overall diameter of cable to 
determine minimum internal 
radius of bend 
Rubber or p.v.c.(circular  Non‐armored  Not exceeding 10mm  3 
copper or circular standard    Exceeding  10mm  but  not   
aluminum conductors)    exceeding 35mm…  4 
  Exceeding 25mm……….  6 
Armored   Any ………………………….  6 
p.v.c.(solid aluminum or  Armored or non‐armored  Any …………………………  8 
shaped copper conductors) 
Impregnated paper  Lead or corrugated  Any ………………………….  12 
  aluminium sheath with or 
  without armour 
  Smooth aluminium sheath  Not exceeding 30mm  12 
  with or without armour  Exceeding  30mm  but  not   
     50mm……………….  15 
  Copper or aluminium sheath  Exceeding 50mm……….  18 
Mineral   with or without p.v.c  Any ………………………….  6 
covering 
*The factors are applied to the diameter over the aluminum sheath. 
 

7.2.3.9 Cable Supports

Every cable installed in or on a building shall be supported by one of the methods described
from clause 7.2.3.9.1 to 7.2.3.9.12. Supports shall be so arranged that there is no
appropriate mechanical strain on any cable termination as follows:

7.2.3.9.1
For non-sheathed cable, installation in conduit without further fixing of the cables, provided
that precautions are taken against undue compression of the installation at the top of any
vertical runs exceeding 5 m in length.

7.2.3.9.2
For non-sheathed cables, installation in trunking without further fixing of the cables,
provided that vertical runs shall not exceed 5m in length without intermediate support.

7.2.3.9.3
For sheathed and/or armoured cables installed in accessible positions shall be supported by
clips at appropriate spacings.

7.2.3.9.4
For cables of any type, resting without fixing in horizontal runs of ducts or trunking,

7.2.3.9.5

Page 171 of 282 
For sheathed and/or armoured cables installed in horizontal runs, which are inaccessible
and unlikely, to be disturbed shall rest without fixing on part of a building provided that the
surface is dry and reasonably smooth.

7.2.3.9.6
For sheathed-and-armoured cables in vertical runs, which are inaccessible and unlikely to
be disturbed, shall be supported at the top of the run by a clip and a round support of a
radius not less than the appropriate value stated in Table 7.2.3.8.

7.2.3.9.7
For sheathed cables without armour in vertical runs which are inaccessible and unlikely to
be disturbed, support by the method described in 7.2.3.9.6 above shall apply provided that
the length of run without intermediate support shall not exceed 2m for a lead/sheathed cable
or 5m for a rubber or PVC sheathed cable.

7.2.3.9.8
For rubber or PVC sheathed cables, installation in conduit without further fixing of the cables
shall apply provided that any vertical run shall be in conduit of suitable size and shall not
exceed 5m in length.

7.2.3.9.9
For rubber or PVC sheathed cables installed as surface wiring, clips shall be spaced at
intervals not exceeding 200 mm.

7.2.3.9.10
Support by a catenary wire incorporated in the cable during manufacture shall be sufficient
provided that the spacings between supports shall not exceed those stated by the
manufacturer.

7.2.3.9.11
For flexible cords used as pendants, attachment to a ceiling rose or similar accessory by the
cord-grip or other method of strain relief provided in the accessory shall apply.

7.2.3.9.12
For cables of the types described in standard 7.2.3.7.4 (a) and (c) support by clips at
spacing shall not exceed 1m.

7.2.3.10 Protection against Heat

Every cable shall be so selected and installed as to be suitable for operation under such
ambient temperatures of its surroundings as are likely to occur, which shall not exceed the
appropriate value stated by the manufacturer, account being taken of any transfer of heat
from any accessory, appliance (e.g. immersion heater or other appliance) or lighting fitting
to which cable or flexible cord is connected.

7.2.3.11 Flammable and Explosive Locations

7.2.3.11.1
If it is necessary to install cables in a situation where flammable and/or explosive dust,
flammable volatile liquid or vapour or gas is likely to be present, or where explosive
Page 172 of 282 
materials are handled or stored, one or more of the following types of wiring systems shall
be used:

a. cables in solid-drawn or seam-welded conduit,

b. lead-sheathed, steel-armoured cable,
c. mineral insulated cable or copper-sheathed cable,
d. armoured PVC insulated cable having an overall extruded covering of PVC.

Provided that this type of cable shall not be directly buried in the ground, which may be
contaminated by flammable volatile liquid.

This standard does not apply to cables of intrinsically - safe circuits; nor does it apply to
adequately ventilated battery rooms or garages.

7.2.3.11.2
Where cables, conduits, ducts or trunking pass through floors, walls, partitions or ceilings,
the surrounding hole shall be made good with cement or similar fire-resisting material to the
full thickness of the floor, wall and space through which fire or smoke might spread shall not
be left around the cable, conduit, duct or trunking. In addition, where cables, conduits or
conductors are installed in channels, ducts, trunking, or shafts which pass through floors,
walls, partitions or ceilings, suitable internal fire-resisting barriers shall be provided to
prevent the spread of fire.

7.2.3.12 Damp and Corrosive Situations

7.2.3.12.1
Every cable shall be installed where it will not be exposed to rain, dripping water,
condensed water, accumulations of water or oil, or corrosive substances or shall be of a
type designed to withstand such conditions.

7.2.3.12.2
In damp situations and wherever they are exposed to the weather, all metal sheaths and
armour of cables, metal conduit, duct, or trunking, and clips and their fixings, shall be of
corrosion-resisting material or finish and shall not be placed in contact with other metals
with which they are likely to set up electrolytic action; conduit, if of steel shall be galvanized
heavy-gauge.

7.2.3.12.3
Armoured PVC insulated cables and mineral-insulated metal-sheathed cables installed in
damp situations or in concrete ducts or wherever exposed to the weather or other risk of
corrosion, shall be of a type having an overall extruded covering of PVC.

7.2.3.12.4
Aluminum-sheathed cables installed in underground pipes or in concrete ducts shall be
provided with a corrosion-resistant finish.

7.2.3.13 Segregation of Circuits

Page 173 of 282 
Where an installation comprises extra low-voltage or telecommunication or fire-alarm
circuits, as well as circuits operating at low voltage and connected directly to a mains supply
system, precautions shall be taken, to prevent electrical contact between the cables of the
various types of circuits.

7.2.3.13.1
Types of circuits described in 7.2.3.13 are divided into categories as follows:

a. Category I circuits: Circuits (other than fire alarm circuits) operating at low voltage
and supplied directly from a mains supply system.
b. Category II circuits: With the exception of fire-alarm circuits, all extra low-voltage
circuits; and telecommunication circuits (e.g. radio, telephone, sound-distribution,
burglar-alarm, CCTV, Cable TV, bell and call circuits), which are not supplied directly
from a mains supply system.
c. Category III circuits: Fire-alarm/smoke detector circuits.

7.2.3.13.2
Cables of Category I circuits shall not be drawn into the same conduit or duct as cables of
Category II circuits, unless the latter cables are insulated in accordance with the
requirements of these standards for the highest voltage present in the Category I circuits.

7.2.3.13.3
Cables of Category I circuits shall not in any circumstance be drawn into the same conduit
or duct as cables of Category III circuits.

7.2.3.13.4
Where a common channel or trunking is used to contain cables of Category I circuits, and
Category II circuits, all cables connected to Category I circuits, shall be effectively
partitioned from the cables of the Category II circuits, or alternatively the latter cables shall
be insulated in accordance with the requirements of these Standards for the highest voltage
present in the Category I circuits.

7.2.3.13.5
Where a common channel or trunking is used to contain cables of Category I and Category
III circuits, the two Categories of circuits shall be separated by continuous partitions of fire-
resisting material; provided that this requirement shall not apply where the Category III
circuits are wired in mineral-insulated metal-sheathed cable.

7.2.3.13.6
In conduit, duct, or trunking systems, where controls or outlets for Category I and Category
II circuits are mounted in or on common boxes, switch-plates or blocks, the cables and
connections and the two Categories of circuits shall be partitioned by means of rigid fixed
screens or barriers.

7.2.3.13.7
At any common outlets in a trunking system for Category I and Category III circuits, the two
categories of circuits shall be separated by continuous partitions of fire resisting material.

Page 174 of 282 
7.2.3.13.8
Where cores of Category I and Category II circuits are contained in a common multi-core
cable, flexible cable or flexible cord, the cores of the Category II circuits shall be insulated
individually or collectively as a group, in accordance with the requirements of these
Standards, for the highest voltage present in the Category I circuits, or alternatively shall be
separated from the cores of the Category I circuits by an earthed metal braid of equivalent
current-carrying capacity to that of the cores of the Category I circuits.

7.2.3.13.9
Where terminations of the two categories of circuits are mounted in or on common boxes,
switch-plates or blocks, they shall be partitioned in accordance with Clause 7.2.3.13.8 or
alternatively be mounted on separated and distinct terminal blocks adequately marked to
indicate their functions.

7.2.3.13.10
Cores of Category I and Category III circuits shall not in any circumstances be contained in
a common multi-core cable, flexible cable or cord.

7.2.3.13.11
Metal sheaths and armour of all cables operating at low voltage, and metal conduits, ducts
and trunking and bare earth-continuity conductors associated with such cables; which might
otherwise come into fortuitous contact with other fixed metalwork shall be either effectively
segregated therefrom, or effectively bonded thereto so as to prevent appreciable voltage
differences at such possible points of contact.

7.2.3.13.12
Current carrying conductors/cables shall not be installed in the same conduit or trunking as
pipes or tubes of non-electrical services e.g. air, gas, oil or water.

7.2.3.14 Identification of Conductors

Every non-flexible single-core, twin or multi-core cable for use as fixed wiring and bare
conductors shall be identifiable at its terminations and preferably throughout its length, by
the appropriate methods described in Clauses 7.2.3.14.1 to 7.2.3.14.5. These provisions do
not apply to special cables designed for heating.

7.2.3.14.1
The identification of conductors for non-flexible cables shall be as follows:

a. For rubber and PVC insulated cables, the use of core colours in accordance
with the requirements of Table 5A of the Schedule 1(Table 7.2.3.14-A) or the
application at termination of sleeves or discs of the appropriate colours
prescribed in the table.
b. For armoured PVC insulated cables as an alternative to the method
described in item (a) above, the use of numbered cores, provided that the
numbers 1, 2 and 3 shall signify live conductors, the number 0 the neutral
conductor, and the number 4 the fifth (special-purpose) core, if any.
c. For paper-insulated cables, the use of numbered cores, provided that the
numbers 1, 2 and 3 shall signify live conductors, the number 0 the neutral
conductor, and the number 4 the fifth (special-purpose) core, if any.
Page 175 of 282 
 d. For mineral-insulated cables, the application at terminations of sleeves or
discs of the appropriate colours prescribed in Table 5A Schedule 1 (Table
7.2.3.14-A).

7.2.3.14.2
Bare conductors shall be made identifiable where necessary by the application of sleeves
or discs of the appropriate colours prescribed in Table 5A Schedule 1 or by painting with
those colours.

7.2.3.14.3
Any scheme of colouring used in a consumer’s installation to identify switchboard bus bars
or poles shall comply with the requirements of Table 7.2.3.14-A so far as these are
applicable.

7.2.3.14.4
The cores of every flexible cable including a flexible cord, shall be coloured throughout in
accordance with the requirements of Table 7.2.3.14-A

7.2.3.14.5
The colour combination, green and yellow is reserved exclusively for identification of
earthing conductors and shall not be used for any other purpose. This provision does not
apply to PVC installed parallel-twin non-sheathed flexible cords.

7.2.3.14.6
Flexible cables or flexible cords having the following core colours shall not be used; green
alone; yellow alone; or any bi-colour other than the colour combination green-and-yellow
mentioned in Clause 7.2.3.14.4.

Table 7.2.3.14-A
Colour Identification of cores of non-flexible cables and bare conductors for fixed wiring

Function Colour identification of core of rubber or PVC

insulated non flexible cable or of sleeve or disc to be
applied to be conductors or cable core

Earthing Green and yellow

Live of a.c single-phase circuit Red or yellow or brown or blue

Neutral of a.c single or three-phase Black

Phase R of 3 phase a.c circuit Red

Phase y of 3-phase a.c circuit Yellow

Phase B of 3 phase a.c circuit Blue

Positive of d.c 2-wire circuit Red

Page 176 of 282 
 Negative of d.c 2-wire circuit Black

Outer (positive or negative) of d.c 2-wire circuit from Red

3-wire system
Positive of 3-wire d.c circuit Red

Middle of 3-wire d.c circuit Black

Negative of 3-wire d.c circuit Blue

Fifth (special purpose) core in 5-core armoured PVC Orange

cable

TABLE 7.2.3.14.1-B
Colour identification of cores of flexible cables and flexible cords

Number of cores Function of core Colour(s) of cores

Live Brown (a)
1 Neutral Blue
Earthing Green and Yellow
Live Brown
2 Neutral Blue (b)

Live Brown (c)

3 Neutral Blue (b)
Earthing Green and Yellow
Live Brown or Black (d) (c)
4 or 5 Neutral Blue (b)
Earthing Green and Yellow

7.2.3.15 Terminations

7.2.3.15.1
All terminations of cable conductors and bare conductors shall be mechanically sound and
electrically continuous.

7.2.3.15.2
Every connection at a cable termination shall be made by means of a terminal, soldering
socket, or compression-type socket; shall securely contain and anchor all the wires of the
conductor, and shall not impose any appreciable mechanical strain on the terminal or
socket.

7.2.3.15.3
An aluminum conductor shall not be placed in contact with a terminal of brass or other metal
having a high copper content, unless the terminal is suitably plated or other suitable
precautions are taken to prevent corrosion.

7.2.3.15.4
At every cable termination, the insulation shall be removed no further than is necessary for
compliance with Clause7.2.3.15.2.

Page 177 of 282 
7.2.3.15.5
At every cable termination, any braid, tape, sheath, or armour over the insulation shall be
cut back from the end of the insulation, as may be necessary to prevent undue leakage from
live parts of the braid, tape, sheath, or armour. This provision does not apply to mineral-
insulated cables.

7.2.3.15.6
In any situation, the exposed conductor and insulation of cables insulated with impregnated
paper shall be protected from ingress of moisture by being suitably sealed.

7.2.3.15.7
The ends of mineral-insulated metal-sheathed cables shall be protected from moisture by
being suitably sealed and the insulation shall be thoroughly dry before the sealing material
is applied. Such sealing material, and any material used to insulate the conductors where
they emerge from the insulation, shall have adequate insulating and moisture proofing
properties, and shall retain these properties through the range of temperatures to which the
cable shall be subjected.

7.2.3.15.8
Soldering fluxes, which remain acidic or corrosive at the completion of the soldering
operation, shall not be used.

7.2.3.15.9
Where a non-metallic outlet box of thermoplastic material (e.g. PVC) is used for the
suspension of, or is in contact with, a light fitting, care shall be taken to ensure that the
temperature of the box does not exceed 60oC. The mass suspended from the box shall not
exceed 3 kg.

7.2.3.15.10
The termination of cables in a situation where flammable and/or explosive dust, flammable
volatile liquid vapour or gas is likely to be present, or where explosive materials are handled
or stored, shall be avoided wherever possible. Otherwise, terminations shall be enclosed in
a flameproof fitting or alternatively, where methods are employed for avoiding the explosion
hazard other than by the use of flameproof equipment the terminations shall be enclosed in
a box suitable for such use.

7.2.3.15.11
Cable glands shall securely retain the outer sheath or armour of the cables without damage
to these, and where necessary shall incorporate adequate means of maintaining earth
continuity between the sheath or armour and the threaded fixing component of the gland.

7.2.3.16 Cable Joints

7.2.3.16.1
Where joints in cable conductors and bare conductors are necessary they shall be
mechanically sound and electrically continuous. Joints in non-flexible cables shall be

Page 178 of 282 
accessible for inspection provided that this requirement shall not apply to joints in cables
buried underground, or joints buried or enclosed in non-combustible building material so
that no danger can arise. Joints in non-flexible cables shall be made by either soldering,
brazing, welding, or mechanical clamps, or be of the compression type; provided that
mechanical clamps shall not be used for, inaccessible joints buried or enclosed in the
building structure. All mechanical clamps and compression-type sockets shall securely
retain all the wires of the conductors.

7.2.3.16.2
Every joint in a cable shall be provided with insulation not less effective than that of the
cable cores and shall be protected against moisture and against mechanical damage.
Soldering fluxes which remain acidic or corrosive at completion of soldering operation shall
not be used.

7.2.3.16.3
For joints in paper-insulated metal-sheathed cables, a wiped metal sleeve or joints box,
filled with insulating compound, shall be provided.

7.2.3.17 Metal Sheathed and Armoured Cables

7.2.3.17.1
All metal sheaths and cable armouring and associated accessories shall be earthed in
accordance with these Standards.

Where non-metal joints boxes are used with metal-sheath and, or armoured cables, the
continuity shall be maintained by a metal bonding strip or similar means having a resistance
not higher than that of an equivalent length of metal cable sheath or, (for armoured non-
metal sheathed cables), the armour of the largest cable entering the box.

7.2.3.18 Paper Insulated Cables

Paper insulated cables shall be of a non-draining type which will comply with the
requirements of NIS IEC 60055-1, where migration of the impregnating compound would
otherwise be liable to occur.

7.2.3.19 Conduit Systems

7.2.3.19.1
The conduits for each User’s site shall be completely erected before any cable is drawn in.
This requirement does not apply to prefabricated flexible conduit systems which are not
wired in-situ.

7.2.3.19.2
Conduits shall be securely fixed, and where they are liable to mechanical damage they shall
be adequately protected.

7.2.3.19.3
Inspection type conduit fittings such as inspection boxes, draw boxes, bends, elbows, and
toes, shall be so installed that they can remain accessible for such purposes as the
withdrawal of existing cables or the installing of additional cables.
Page 179 of 282 
 7.2.3.19.4
The number of single core rubber insulated, braided and compounded cable, of PVC
insulated non-sheathed cables run in one conduit shall be such as to permit of easy
drawing in. The number of cables drawn in shall not be greater than the appropriate number
given in Table 6 (Table 7.2.3.20-A) or Table 7 (Table 7.2.3.20-B) of schedule I as
applicable.

7.2.3.19.5
For types of cables having large overall diameters than those shown in the table,
appropriate reduction shall be made in the number of cables drawn in.

7.2.3.19.6
For groups of cables other than those provided in Table 6 (Table 7.2.3.20-A) and 7 (Table
7.2.3.20-B), the number and sizes of the cables installed shall be such that a space factor of
40% is not exceeded.

7.2.3.19.7
The numbers stated in the tables; and the space factor of 40% relate to conduit runs
incorporating not more than two 90o bends or radius not less than that specified for normal
bends or for runs having more bends than this or having opposing adjacent bends for runs
containing additional sets or other restrictions, appropriate reduction shall be made in the
number of cables installed.

TABLE 6 (Table 7.2.3.20-A)

Capabilities of steel Conduits

Maximum capabilities of steel conduits, for the simultaneous drawing in of single core p.v.c
cables or rubber cables

Cable Size Conduit Size and Gauge

Number Nominal
Nominal and overall
1/4
Conductor diameter of 16mm or 5/8 in 20 mm or ¾ in 25 mm or 1 in 32 mm or 1 in
2
Size mm wire Diameter
2
No/mm mm

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

P.V.C Metric Metric Metric Metric Metric Metric Metric Metric

cables Light Light Light Light Light Light Light Light

Metric
Light

Maximum number of cables

Page 180 of 282 
 1.0 1/1.13 2.9 8 7 13 12 22 19 38 35

1.5 1/1.38 3.1 7 6 12 10 19 17 33 31

1.5 7/0.50 3.3 6 5 11 10 18 16 31 28

2.5 7/1.78 3.5 5 4 9 8 15 13 26 24

2.5 7/0.67 3.8 4 4 8 7 13 11 22 20

4 7/0.85 4.3 3 3 6 5 10 9 17 16

6 7/1.04 4.9 3 2 5 4 7 7 13 12

10 7/1.35 6.2 - - 3 2 4 4 8 7

16 7/1.70 7.1 - - 2 - 3 3 6 5

25 7/1.24 9.0 - - - - 2 2 4 4

35 19/1.53 10.1 - - - - - - 3 2

50 19/1.78 12.0 - - - - - - 2 2

Rubber
cables
1.0 3.4 6 5 10 8 16 14 28 25
1/1.13
1.5 3.6 5 4 9 8 14 13 27 23
1/1.38
2.5 4.0 4 3 7 6 11 10 20 18
1/1.78
4 5.2 2 2 4 3 7 6 12 11
7/0.85
6 6.0 2 - 3 2 5 4 9 8
7/1.04
10 7.3 - - 2 - 3 3 6 5
7/1.35
16 8.4 - - - - 2 2 4 4
7/1.70
25 10.1 - - - - - - 3 2
7/2.14
35 11.7 - - - - - - 2 2
19/1.53

0
Note; The maximum numbers of cables in the table related to conduit ruins incorporating not more than two 90 bends or
the equivalent. Where runs include additional bends, sets or other restrictions, the numbers must be appropriately
reduced. This applies particularly where solid conductor cables are to be drawn

Page 181 of 282 
 TABLE 7 (Table 7.2.3.20-B) Capacities of PVC conduits

Maximum Capacities of steel conduits for the simultaneous drawing in of single core p.v.c cables or
rubber cables.

Cable Size Conduit Size and Gauge

Nominal Number and Nominal

Conductor Size diameter of wire
2 2 overall
mm No/mm

Diameter 16mm 20mm 25mm 32mm

mm
or 5/8 in or or or
1/4
¾ in 1in 1 in

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Metric A Metric A or B Metric A or B Metric A or

or B B
PVC cables

Maximum number of cables

1.0 1/1.12 2.9 7 12 20 34

1.5 1/1.38 3.1 6 11 18 30

1.5 7/0.50 3.3 6 10 16 28

2.5 7/1.78 3.5 5 8 14 20

2.5 7/0.67 3.8 4 7 12 20

4 7/0.85 4.3 3 5 9 15

6 7/1.04* 4.9 2 4 7 12

10 7/1.35 6.2 - 2 4 7

16 7/1.70 7.1 - 2 3 5

25 7/1.24 9.0 - - 2 3

35 19/1.53 10.1 - - 2 3

50 19/1.78 12.0 - - - 2

Rubber cables

1.0 1/1.13 3.4 5 9 15 25

1.5 1/1.38 3.6 5 8 13 22

2.5 1/1.78 4.0 4 6 10 18

Page 182 of 282 
4 7/0.85 5.2 2 4 6 10

6 7/1.04 6.0 - 3 4 8

10 7/1.35 7.3 - 2 3 5

16 7/1.70 8.4 - - 2 4

25 7/2.14 10.1 - - - 2

35 19/1.53 11.7 - - - 2

NOTE: The maximum number of cables in the table relate to conduit runs incorporating not more than two 90o bends
equivalent. Where runs include additional bends, sets or other restrictions, the number must be appropriately reduced.
This applies particularly where solid conductor cables are to be drawn.

7.2.3.19.8
The use of solid (non-inspection) conduit, elbows or tees shall be restricted to:

i. Locations at the ends of conduits immediately behind a light fitting outlet box or
accessory of the inspection type; or
ii. One solid elbow located at a position not more than 500mm from a readily
accessible outlet point provided that all other bends in the conduit run are not
more than the equivalent of one right angle.

7.2.3.19.9
Ends of lengths of conduits shall be so reamed and where they terminate at boxes, trunking
and accessories not fitted with spout entries, shall be so bushed, as to obviate abrasion of
cables.

7.2.3.19.10
Substantial boxes of ample capacity shall be provided at every junction involving a cable
connection in a conduit system. Where non-metallic conduits are used, and where metal
conduits are terminated, boxes may be of non-absorbent, non-flammable material other
than metal. All unused conduit entries shall be blanked off, and all removable covers firmly
secured to provide complete enclosure.

7.2.3.19.11
Conduit systems not intended to be gas-tight shall be self-ventilating, and drainage outlets
shall be provided at any points in the installation where condensed moisture might
otherwise collect.

7.2.3.20 Metal Conduit: Special Requirements

7.2.3.20.1
Metal conduits and fittings for use in wiring systems shall comply with NIS Specifications for
rigid steel conduits and fittings; for flexible steel conduits and adaptors and for aluminum or

Page 183 of 282 
zinc-base-alloy conduits and fittings as appropriate. Where steel pipes are used as
conduits, they shall comply with appropriate NIS specifications and shall have a corrosion-
resistant finish inside and outside.

7.2.3.20.2
Metal conduits systems shall be earthed. All joints shall be made mechanically and
electrically continuous by screwing or by substantial mechanical clamps, or by inserts but
plain slip or pin-grip sockets shall not be used.

7.2.3.20.3
For the purposes of these Standards, flexible steel conduits having an outer sheath of
insulation material (e.g. PVC) shall be deemed to be metal conduits.

7.2.3.20.4
Cables of a. c. circuit installed in steel conduit shall always be so bunched that the cable of
all phases and the neutral conductor (if any) are contained in the same conduit.

7.2.3.21 Non-metal Conduit: Special Requirements

7.2.3.21.1
Rigid non-metallic conductors and fittings for use there-with shall comply with relevant NIS
specifications as appropriate.

7.2.3.21.2
Non-metallic systems shall be used only where it is ensured that they are suitable for the
extremes of ambient temperatures to which they are likely to be subjected to in service, and
where used, earth continuity conductor shall be installed throughout the system.

7.2.3.21.3
The method of support for rigid PVC conduit shall allow for the longitudinal expansion and
contraction of the conduits that may occur with variation of temperature under normal
operating conditions.

7.2.3.21.4
For the purposes of these Standards, conduits comprising metal parts having an inner and
outer covering of insulating materials are deemed to be non-metallic conduits, provided that
effective precautions are taken to prevent the metal parts of the conduits at their ends from
coming into contact with any other metal parts.

7.2.3.21.5
Flexible metal conduit and fittings shall comply in all respects with NIS IEC 61386-1.
Flexible non-metallic conduit shall comply with NIS IEC 61386-1 and fittings for use
therewith shall also comply with the NIS IEC 61386-25.

7.2.3.21.6
i. Flexible metal conduit shall not be used as the sole means of providing earth-
continuity, and earth-continuity conductor complying with the requirements of NIS
specifications shall be provided for every part of a system formed by such conduit.

Page 184 of 282 
 ii. Where necessary, flexible conduit shall be adequately supported.

7.2.3.22 Pre-fabricated, Duct and Trunking Systems

7.2.3.22.1
In the prefabrication of conduit systems that are not to be wired in-situ, adequate allowance
shall be made for variations in building dimensions so that the conduits or cables are not
subjected to tension or other strain during installation. Adequate precautions shall also be
taken against damage to such systems during installation and any subsequent building
operations, especially against deformation of the conduits and damage to any exposed
cable ends.

7.2.3.22.2
Ducts of metal or insulating material, and trunking, shall be securely fixed, and where they
are liable to mechanical damage they shall be adequately protected.

7.2.3.22.3
Trunking shall be constructed of metal or non-combustible insulating material.

7.2.3.22.4
Cables of a.c. circuits installed in steel ducts or trunking shall always be so bunched that the
cables of all phases and the neutral conductor (if any) are contained in the same duct or
trunking.

7.2.3.22.5
Every entry to finished ducts or trunking shall be so placed as to prevent the ingress of
water, or be protected against such ingress. All removable covers shall be securely fixed
after wiring is completed.

7.2.3.22.6
Every outlet for cables from a duct system, every joint in such a system, and every joint
between such a system and another type of duct or conduit, shall be so formed that the
joints are mechanically sound and that the cables drawn in are not likely to suffer abrasion.

7.2.3.22.7
Every bend formed in a concrete duct (whether or not formed by channels or formers
retained in position after the concrete has set) shall be of an inner radius not less than four
times the diameter of the completed duct.

7.2.3.22.8
Ducts cast in-situ in concrete, by means of a suitable formwork laid before the concrete is
poured, into which cables are to be drawn (whether or not the former is retained in position
after the concrete has set) shall be so formed that the radial thickness of concrete or screed
surrounding the cross-section of the completed duct is not less than 15mm at every point.
Where all or any part of the completed duct is formed by the concrete or the screed rubber-
insulated, braided and compound cables, non-sheathed PVC-insulated cables are installed
in this type of duct and there is a risk that the duct may become damp, the cable shall be of
a type having overall extruded covering of PVC.
Page 185 of 282 
7.2.3.22.9
The number of cables to be installed in ducts shall as will permit easy drawing-in without
damage to the cables and shall be such that a space factor of 35% is not exceeded. This
space factor relates to runs of ducts incorporating not more than two 900 bends or the
equivalent; for runs having more bends than this, appropriate reduction shall be made in the
number of cables installed.

7.2.3.22.10
The number of cables to be installed in trunking or channels shall be such that a space
factor of 45% is not exceeded.

7.2.3.23 Flexible Cords and Cables: Special Requirements

7.2.3.23.1
Flexible cables or flexible cords shall be used for all connections to movable apparatus. For
the purposes of this provision, an electric cooker of rated input exceeding 3kW is deemed
not to be movable.

7.2.3.23.2
Where armoured flexible cables and flexible cords are used, the armouring shall not be
used as the sole means of providing earth continuity conductor, an additional earth
continuity conductor shall be provided.

7.2.3.23.3
Flexible cables and flexible cords shall not be used as fixed wiring unless contained in
earthed metal or other non-combustible and mechanically strong enclosure; provided that
this requirement shall not apply to short lengths of sheathed flexible cable or flexible cord
used for final connections to fixed apparatus or connection of control gear of fluorescent
lamps or discharge lamps. Non-sheathed flexible cables and flexible cords shall not be
drawn into conduits or ducts.

7.2.3.23.4
Exposed lengths of flexible cables or flexible cord used for final connections to fixed
apparatus shall be as short as possible and connected to the fixed wiring by one of the
following means:

a. a plug and socket-outlet;

b. a fused spur-box having suitable provision for the entry of the flexible cable or
flexible cord;

c. a switch forming the means of local control of the apparatus; or

d. a suitable joint box.

7.2.3.23.5
Where a twin flexible cord supports, or partly supports, a light fitting, the maximum mass
supported by the cord shall not exceed the appropriate value indicated below:

Page 186 of 282 
 Nominal cross-sectional area of
2 Maximum mass (kg)
conductor mm

0.75 3

1.0 5

7.2.3.23.6
No flexible extension shall be taken more than 2m across a ceiling to a droplight. An
insulated hook fixed to the ceiling shall support such flexible extensions.

7.2.3.24 Consumers Wiring Between Buildings

7.2.3.24.1
Consumer’s wiring intended for operation at low voltage and installed underground for
distribution between a building and point of utilization not attached thereto (e.g. another
building), shall be in the form of one or more of the following systems, using the types of
cable indicated in Clauses 7.2.3.25.1.1 to 7.2.3.25.1.3.

7.2.3.24.1.1
In ducts:

a. Metal-sheathed and served cable;

b. Mineral-insulated, metal-sheathed cable having an overall extruded covering of
PVC, preferably black in colour;
c. Armoured PVC insulated cable having an overall extruded covering of PVC; or
d. PVC insulated, PVC sheathed cable or rubber-insulated cable having an ORFR
and HRFR sheath.

7.2.3.24.1.2
In conduits or pipes:

a. PVC insulated, PVC sheathed cable, or rubber-insulated cable having an ORFR

or HRFR sheath in adequately protected heavy-gauge steel conduit or
galvanized steel pipe, provided that the conduit or pipe shall not be used as an
earth-continuity conductor, or
b. PVC insulated sheathed cable or rubber-insulated cable having an ORFR or
HRFR sheath in non-metallic conduit.

7.2.3.24.1.3
Laid Direct in the Ground

a. Metal-sheathed, armoured and served underground cable;

b. Armoured p.v.c. insulated cable having overall extruded covering of PVC; or
c. Metal-sheathed and served underground cable, or mineral insulated copper-
sheathed cable having an overall extruded covering of PVC with mechanical
protection by cable cover except where installed under a permanent surface.

Page 187 of 282 
7.2.3.24.2
Consumer’s wiring intended for operation at low voltage and installed on exterior surface
walls, boundary walls and the like for distribution between a building and a point of
utilization not attached thereto (e.g. another building), shall be in the form of one or more of
the following systems:

a. Heavy-gauge hot-dipped galvanized steel conduit (see Appendix 2) or steel pipe

systems complying with Clauses 7.2.3.21.1. - 7.2.3.21.4;
b. Mineral-insulated, metal-sheathed cable, preferably having an overall covering
of PVC preferably black in colour;
c. Armoured and served cables or preferably, armoured cables having an overall
covering of PVC or an ORFR or HRFR sheathed overall preferably black in
colour;
d. Lead-sheathed cables; and
e. Insulating cables having a PVC sheath preferably black in colour, or high impact
rigid PVC conduit, preferably black in colour provided such wiring shall not be
installed on fences.

7.2.3.24.3
Consumer’s overhead wiring intended for operation at low voltage and for distribution
between a building and a point of utilization not attached thereto (e.g. another building),
shall be in the form of one or more of the following systems using the types of cable or
conductor indicated. Lengths of span shall not exceed, and heights above ground shall not
be less than, the appropriate values indicated in Table 8 Schedule 1– Table 7.2.3.25

TABLE 7.2.3.24

Maximum lengths of span and minimum heights above ground for consumers’ overhead
wiring between buildings etc

Minimum Height Of Span Above Ground

In Position
Types Of System, And Maximum
Accessible To In Positions
Relevant Item Of Standard Length Of
At Road Vehicular Inaccessible
7.2.3.25.5 Span
Crossing Traffic Other To Vehicular
Than Road Traffic
Crossings
1 2 3 4 5

m m m m

Cables sheathed with PVC

or having an ORFR
and flame-retardant
or HRFR sheath, 3 3.5
without
intermediate
support (item (i))

Page 188 of 282 
 Cables sheathed with PVC
or having an ORFR 3 3
or HRFR sheath, in
heavy-gauge steel
conducts (item (ii))
PVC covered overhead line
conductors 30 5.8 (for all 5.2 (for all 3.5
insulators without types) types)
intermediate
support (item (iii))
Cables sheathed with or
having an ORFR No limit 3.5
and HRFR sheath
supported by a
centenary wire
(item (iv))
Aerial cable incorporating No limit subject
A catenary wire (item (v)) to regulation 7.3 3.5
(x)

Bare or PVC covered

Overhead lines installed in No limit 5.2
accordance with
the over head line
Regulations (item
(vi))

a. PVC insulated, PVC sheathed cable, or rubber-insulated cable having an ORFR

or HRFR sheath, preferable black in colour, without intermediate support;
provided that the terminal supports shall be so arranged that no undue strain is
placed upon the conductors or insulation of the cable, and provided that
adequate precautions are taken against any risk of chafing of the cable sheath;
b. PVC insulated, PVC sheathed cable, or rubber-insulated cable having an ORFR
and HRFR sheath, installed in heavy-gauge hot-dipped galvanized steel conduit
without intermediate support; provided that the conduit shall be earthed in
accordance with the earthing standard and shall be securely fixed at the ends of
the span. It shall not be jointed in its span;
c. PVC covered (bundled or separated) overhead line conductors of hard-drawn
copper, hard-drawn cadmium copper, hard-aluminum, steel cored aluminum,
aluminum alloy, installed on insulators without intermediate support; provided
that no part of the span shall be accessible to any person from any building or
other place without the use of a ladder or other special device;
d. Cables having a sheath of PVC or lead, or an ORFR or HRFR sheathed
preferably supported by a catenary wire;
e. Special aerial cable incorporating a catenary wire; and
f. Bare or PVC covered overhead lines having conductors of hard-drawn copper,
hard-drawn cadmium copper, hard-aluminium or steel-cored aluminium or
aluminium alloy.

Page 189 of 282 
7.2.3.25 Electric Bells, Telephone and Signaling Devices

7.2.3.25.1
Cables which are used in connection with the electric bells, telephone and signaling
devices, and other similar devices, in a building shall be kept away from or not be installed
in the same casing or conduit as the cables used for distribution of the electrical supply
throughout the building.

7.2.3.25.2
Bell and signaling circuits (except telephone circuits,) may be operated from the electric
lighting, heating, or power supply mains, provided that they are connected to the secondary
side of double-wound transformers, having a secondary voltage of twelve volts, and further
provided that:

a. Each transformer is protected on the primary side by a single-pole switch and

fuse, and one side of the secondary winding is earthed;
b. The conductors, when un-enclosed are secured individually by means of
insulated tapes, and where subject to mechanical injury they are adequately
protected;
c. Joints in the conductors are, as far as practicable, avoided, but where they are
unavoidable they shall be staggered, soldered and efficiently insulated; and
d. The conductors are insulated with vulcanized rubber/PVC save that ordinary bell-
wire may be used if the transformers are of a capacity not exceeding 50 (fifty)
Watts and so designed that on sustained short circuit their impedance is such as
to limit the current to such a value as will not burn out the transformer.

7.2.3.25.3
The control-circuit wiring and accessories in wiring systems having extra-low voltage
control shall comply with the following requirements:

a. Remote controlled switches shall have their live parts enclosed in non-
combustible and non-absorbent cases. They shall be fixed in full view in readily
accessible positions. The insulation resistance between the supply terminals and
the control terminals of the switch shall not be less than 100 Mega ohms;
b. All control wiring shall be run entirely separate from the supply wiring;
c. The voltage of the control circuit shall not exceed twenty-four (24) volts.
Transformers shall be double-wound with one side of the secondary earthed and
shall be securely mounted and accessible and be controlled by a switch and fuse
on the primary side;
d. Where subject to mechanical injury conductors shall be protected. When un-
enclosed they shall be secured with clips having rounded edges or insulated
staples. But two or more conductors shall not be secured under the same staple;
e. Between roof and ceiling, conductors may be fastened to the sides of joists or
battens-without further protection. Where buried in plaster or concrete they shall
be enclosed in an approved metallic sheathing. All joints shall be accessible, and
be efficiently soldered and insulated;
f. Push Buttons shall be of substantial mechanical strength. The conductors shall
terminate in suitable terminals and be secured by a metal thread screw. Heating/
Page 190 of 282 
 air-conditioning circuits shall not be controlled by this system unless fitted with an
indicating/temperature-sensing device.

7.2.3.26 Hazardous Locations

7.2.3.26.1
Electric wires, fittings, consuming devices, electrical storage batteries, and associated
equipment installed in hazardous locations in which explosive or highly inflammable
substances are produced, manufactured, refined, stored or packed shall be installed and
maintained to comply with the following additional requirements:

a. All electrical conductors shall be enclosed in an efficiently earthed metallic

envelope so constructed that in the event of the ignition of an inflammable or
explosive material within the metallic envelope, there will be no transmission of
flame to the atmosphere surrounding it;
b. Each consuming device shall be provided with automatic protective equipment to
cut off the electricity in the event of overload or an electrical fault developing, in
addition to means for normally cutting off all power to, or, in the immediate
vicinity of the device in the event of danger; provided that this paragraph shall
not apply to single light which forms part of a group of lights installed and
maintained in conformity with this provision;
c. All current consuming devices including lighting fixtures shall be housed in
metallic enclosures certified as flame-proof and shall meet the NIS IEC 60079
Standards for such devices and maintained in such a condition that the validity of
the flame-proof quality is not compromised;
d. The attachment of all metallic envelopes enclosing cables to consuming devices
shall be such as not to invalidate any flame-proof certificate;
e. Before effecting maintenance or repairs involving the opening of a flame-proof
enclosure, all conductors within the flame-proof enclosure to be worked on shall
be made dead and earthed; and upon completion of maintenance or repair, the
apparatus shall not be energized until all openings have been closed to restore
its flame-proof status;

7.2.3.26.2
In this standard “certified as flame-proof” means to comply with the IEC 60079-0. The
Commissioner, ESS shall be notified in writing in any particular case to approve an
alternative certification as being an adequate substitute for the requirements of this
provision.

7.2.3.26.3
In rooms containing stationary electric storage batteries of the lead-acid or alkaline types, or
where corrosive gases or liquids which are not explosive or highly inflammable are present:

a. The system of wiring employed shall be such that all electrical conductors
including earthing connections are enveloped in a corrosion-proof non-metallic
sheath;

Page 191 of 282 
 b. Where metallic enclosures are necessary used for motors, switch-gear or other
accessories, including conductors which are liable to mechanical damage, all
exposed metallic surfaces shall be effectively painted or otherwise coated to
resist corrosion;
c. All cable entries and accessories shall be such that the non-corrosion sheath of
conductors enters the terminal chamber of the equipment accessory and the
entry hole or holes are fitted with an accessory to exclude the corrosive liquid or
gas present; and
d. All unused entry holes shall be effectively sealed.

7.2.3.26.4
In freezing or cooling environments, the following shall be adhered to:

a. Distribution boards shall not be fixed in freezing or cooling chambers;

b. Switches shall not be fixed in freezing or cooling chambers;
c. No conductors other than those required for the supply and use of current
therein shall be installed in freezing chambers and cold stores;

7.2.3.26.5
In hot environment, the following shall be adhered to:

a. Cable insulated with rubber shall not be used in situations where the temperature
of the conductor would exceed 60oC for short periods, or 50oC for long periods;
b. Cable insulated with paper or fibre shall not be used in situations where the
temperature of the conductor would exceed 80oC;
c. Cables used shall comply with the appropriate temperature class as specified by
the manufacturer for the environment in which they are to be installed;
d. Where higher temperatures are likely to be experienced, the wiring shall be in
accordance with the requirements of the NIS IEC 60079.

7.2.3.26.6
All cables shall be installed in such a manner as will not damage or weaken the building
unnecessarily and with the least possible cutting-away of any structural work.

7.2.4 Utilization and Restriction of Bare Conductors for Indoor Wiring

7.2.4.1 Utilization of Bare Conductors

7.2.4.1.1
Bare or lightly insulated conductors may be installed in building for the following purposes
only:

a. Earth continuity conductors, earthing leads;

b. The external conductors of earthed concentric wiring systems;
c. Conductors of extra-low voltage systems;
d. Protected rising-main and bus-bar systems;
Page 192 of 282 
 e. Collector wires for travelling cranes or trolleys or for similar purposes.

7.2.4.1.2
Bare or lightly insulated conductors of extra-low voltage systems shall have adequate
insulators, and further protection where necessary, to ensure that they do not cause risk of
fire.

7.2.4.1.3
Where bare conductors are used for rising-main and bus-bar systems operating at low
voltage, they shall

a. Be so installed that they are inaccessible to unauthorised persons and either be

totally enclosed in earthed metal or fixed in a channel, trunking, or shaft specially
provided for the purpose;
b. Be of adequate strength to withstand the electro-mechanical forces that may be
set up by prospective short-circuit current;
c. Be free to expand and contract, as the temperature changes, without detriment
to themselves or to any other part of the installation; and
d. Where they pass through floors, walls, partitions, or ceilings, they shall pass
through directly and be protected by enclosure in non-absorbent, non-
combustible insulating material, unless earth metal trunking is used.

7.2.4.1.4
Bare conductor wires of the type described in Clause 7.2.4.1.1(e) that are necessarily
exposed in normal service shall be efficiently protected against accidental contact by
screens or barriers or by adequate clearance. At each strain position for such wires, suitable
straining gear fitted with double insulators shall be provided.

7.2.4.2 Collector and Trolley Cables

7.2.4.2.1
Bare conductors may be used as collector or trolley wires for travelling cranes and similar
appliances and for battery connections. The conductors shall be supported upon insulators,
and so spaced that risk of accidental contact between the conductors themselves or
between conductors and walls or any other conducting structure is reduced to a minimum.

7.2.4.2.2
The circuit supplying current to such bare conductors shall, except in the case of the
regulating cells of batteries, be protected either by a suitable circuit breaker or by a suitable
switch and fuse.

7.2.4.2.3
Bare conductors extended to positions liable to lightning-discharge shall be fitted with
lightning-arrestors on each pole or phase.

Page 193 of 282 
7.2.4.2 4
Wall rosettes or brackets used as supports for span-wires shall not be fixed within 300mm
of any gas-pipe.

7.2.4.3 Restriction on the Use of Bare Conductors

Except as specified in Clauses 7.2.4.1 and 7.2.4.2 above, bare conductors shall be used
only in positions not ordinarily accessible to unauthorized persons and in such
circumstances as may be approved by NERC.

7.2.5 Electrical Conductors Used for Indoor Wiring

Conductors used for indoor wiring shall have their respective current carrying capacities not
less than the maximum current demands of the circuit in which they shall be used and be
capable of withstanding their prospective fault current and suitable for operation in the
environment at the design voltage of the installation.

7.2.5.1 Selections and Sizes of Conductor Cables

7.2.5.1.1
Factors to be considered in sizing of cables shall be:

a. Conductor material;
b. Insulating material;
c. Ambient temperature;
d. Method of installation;
e. Effect of thermal insulating material;
f. Allowable maximum voltage drop from the origin of the circuit to the load.

7.2.5.1.2
The low-voltage indoor wiring shall be annealed copper wire of cross sectional area not less
than 1.5 mm2 or other equally sized wire which may be of superior quality.

7.2.5.1.3
For Category I circuits as provided in Clause 7.2.3.13, live conductors shall have a cross-
sectional area of:

a. Not less than 1.5 mm2 for surface wiring using PVC insulated PVC sheath
copper cables;
b. Not less than 1.5 mm2 for single core PVC insulated copper cables installed in
conduit, duct, or trunking;
c. Not less than 16 mm2 for aluminium conductors;
d. Not less than 0.75 mm2 for flexible cables and flexible cords.

7.2.5.2 Protection by Electrical Insulation

7.2.5.2.1
Page 194 of 282 
Live conductors shall be completely covered with insulation which:

a. Can withstand the mechanical, electrical, thermal and chemical stresses to which
it may be subjected in service; and
b. Can only be removed by destruction.

7.2.5.2.2
Where insulation is applied during the erection of the installation, the quality of the insulation
shall be verified by tests equivalent to those specified in the applicable NIS 358 for similar
type-tested equipment.

7.2.5.2.3
Non-impregnated paper, asbestos, fabric, wood or pressed hemp shall not be used for
insulating purposes.

7.2.5.2.4
Where insulating tapes are permitted to be used in low voltage installations, they shall have
a minimum thickness of 0.21 mm.

7.2.5.3 Voltage Grading of Cables for Low Voltage Applications 

(a) PVC insulated non-sheathed cables manufactured to NIS IEC 60227

shall be 450/750V grade.
(b) PVC insulated, PVC sheathed cables up to 35 mm2 manufactured to NIS
IEC 60227 shall be 300/500V grade. For cables greater than 50 mm2
manufactured to IEC 60227, voltage grade shall be 600/1000V.
(c) PVC insulated, PVC sheathed armoured cables of any size manufactured
to NIS IEC 60502 shall be 600/1000V grade.
(d) XLPE insulated, non-sheathed or PVC sheathed cables manufactured to
NIS IEC 60502 shall be 450/750V grade and to NIS IEC 60502 shall be
600/1000V grade.
(e) XLPE insulated, PVC sheathed armoured cables manufactured to NIS
IEC 60502 shall be 600/1000V grade.

7.2.6 Allowable Current of Indoor Wirings

The allowable current of PVC-insulated conductor and XLPE-insulated conductor used for
low-voltage indoor wiring shall conform to the following conditions:

7.2.6.1 Allowable Current and Current Reduction Factor Of Insulated Conductors

The allowable current of the conductors given in Table 176-1 is the value in this table
multiplied by the allowable current correction factor (a) for ambient temperatures of 30C or
less or by the current reduction factor calculated by the formula (b) ( denotes ambient
temperature) of current reduction factor for ambient temperatures exceeding 30C
according to the insulator materials given in Table 176-2.

Table 176-1 Allowable current of indoor wiring

Conductor Allowable current (A)
Twisted conductor Single wire Annealed or Hard-drawn Aluminum

Page 195 of 282 
 2
(nominal sectional area, mm ) (diameter, mm) hard-drawn aluminum alloy wire
copper wire wire
1.0 or more and less than 1.2 16 12 12
1.2 or more and less than 1.6 19 15 14
1.6 or more and less than 2.0 27 21 19
2.0 or more and less than 2.6 35 27 25
2.6 or more and less than 3.2 48 37 35
3.2 or more and less than 4.0 62 48 45
4.0 or more and less than 5.0 81 63 58
5.0 107 83 77
0.9 or more and less than 1.25 17 13 12
1.25 or more and less than 2 19 15 14
2 or more and less than 3.5 27 21 19
3.5 or more and less than 5.5 37 29 27
5.5 or more and less than 8 49 38 35
8 or more and less than 14 61 48 44
14 or more and less than 22 88 69 63
22 or more and less than 30 115 90 83
33 or more and less than 38 139 108 100
38 or more and less than 50 162 126 117
50 or more and less than 60 190 148 137
60 or more and less than 80 217 169 156
80 or more and less than 100 257 200 185
100 or more and less than 125 298 232 215
125 or more and less than 150 344 268 248
150 or more and less than 200 395 308 284
200 or more and less than 250 469 366 338
250 or more and less than 325 556 434 400
325 or more and less than 400 650 507 468
400 or more and less than 500 745 581 536
500 or more and less than 600 842 657 606
600 or more and less than 800 930 745 690
800 or more and less than 1,080 875 820
1000
1000 1,260 1,040 980

Page 196 of 282 
 Table 176-2 Current reduction factor
Allowable current Formula (b) of current
Insulator material
correction factor (a) reduction factor

60  
PVC (excluding heat-resistant polymers) 1.00
30

90  
XLPE (limited to cross-linked polymers) 1.41
30

7.2.6.2 Allowable Current When Put in a Conduit

If the insulated conductors in Paragraph 1 are placed in a synthetic resin raceway, synthetic
resin tube, metallic raceway, metallic tube or flexible conduit for use, the allowable current
of that conductor shall be the allowable current prescribed in Paragraph 1 multiplied by the
current reduction factor (c) in Table 176-3.

Table 176-3 Current reduction factor when put in conduit

Number of electrical conductors
Current reduction factor (c)
in one conduit
3 or less 0.70
4 or less 0.63
5 or 6 0.56
7 or over and 15 or less 0.49
16 or over and 40 or less 0.43
41 or over and 60 or less 0.39
61 or over 0.34

7.2.7 Indoor Wiring Works

7.2.7.1 Work Methods and Their Applications

The work methods of low-voltage indoor wiring include the 13 types given in the following
items, i.e., synthetic resin tube work, metallic tube work, flexible conduit work, cable work,
insulator work, synthetic resin raceway work, metallic raceway work, metallic duct work, bus
duct work, floor duct work, cellular duct work, lighting duct work and flat protective layer
work, and they shall be applied according to the division of places of installation and
operation voltages as shown in Table 177-1.

Table 177-1 Application of low-voltage indoor wiring work

Operation voltage 300 V or less Greater than 300 V
Accessible Inaccessible Accessible Inaccessible
Place of Open place concealed concealed Open place concealed concealed
installa- place place place place

Page 197 of 282 
tion Other Other
Dry Other Dry Other Dry Dry Other Dry Other Dry
Kind of work place place
place places place places place place places place places place
s s
Synthetic resin tube
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
work
Metallic tube work ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Flexible conduit ○
work ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Cable work ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Insulator work ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Synthetic resin
○ ○
raceway work
Metallic raceway
○ ○
work
Metallic duct work ○ ○ ○ ○
Bus duct work ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Floor duct work ○
Cellular duct work ○
Lighting duct work ○ ○
Flat protective layer
○
work
The mark ○ indicates a place where the work concerned can be executed.

7.2.7.2 Execution Methods of Various Types of Work

The execution methods of the various types of work in 7.2.7.1 shall conform to Table 177-2.

Table 177-2 Electrical conductors, earthing work and installation methods of

low-voltage indoor wiring
Kind of Electrical
Earthing work Installation method
Work conductor
Synthetic Insulated and Connection of electrical conductors is not allowed
resin tube stranded wire in the tube
work (excluding the - Tube supporting clearance shall be 1.5 m or less
case of 3.2 mm or
less)
Metallic Insulated and Earthing work Class D Connection of electrical conductors is not allowed
tube work stranded wire shall be applied to tubes in the tube
(excluding the for 300 V or less and Tube and accessories shall be made of brass or
case of 3.2 mm or Class C for more than copper
less) 300 V (*2) Tube wall thickness shall be 1.2 mm or over for
embedment in concrete and 1 mm or over for
others
Flexible Insulated and Earthing work Class D Connection of electrical conductors is not allowed
conduit stranded wire shall be applied to tubes in the tube
work (excluding the for 300 V or less and Tube and accessories shall be made of metal
case of 3.2 mm or Class C for more than
less) 300 V (*2)
Page 198 of 282 
Cable Cable Earthing work Class D Wire supporting clearance shall be 2 m or less (if
work shall be applied to the laid down along the bottom or side of a building
metallic parts of part) and 6 m or less (if laid down vertically in
protective devices that an inaccessible place)
accommodate electrical Provide an appropriate protective device for
conductors for 300 V or electrical conductor installed in a place subject
less, and Class C for to the pressure of heavy objects or severe
more than 300 V. mechanical impact.
Insulator Insulated Exclude easy access for 300 V or less.
work conductor Exclude access for more than 300 V.
(excluding PVC- Connection of electrical conductors is 6 cm or
insulated over
conductor) (*1) Clearance from electrical conductor to building
part shall be 2.5 cm or over for 300 V or less
- and 4.5 cm or over for more than 300 V (2.5 cm
or over in a dry place).
Supporting clearance shall be 2 m or less (for wire
laid down along the top or a side of a building
part). 6 m or less, however, for voltages
exceeding 300 V and electrical conductor laid
down otherwise.
Synthetic Insulated Connection of electrical conductors is not allowed
resin conductor in the raceway
raceway (excluding PVC- -
work insulated
conductor)
Metallic Insulated Earthing work Classs D Connection of electrical conductors is not allowed
raceway conductor shall be applied to the in the tube
work (excluding PVC- raceway. Tube and accessories shall be made of brass or
insulated copper
conductor)
Metallic Insulated Earthing work Class D Connection of electrical conductors is not allowed
duct work conductor shall be applied to ducts in the duct
for 300 V or less and The sum of the sectional area of wires laid down
Class C for more than in a duct shall be 20% or less of the inner
300 V. sectional area of the duct
Duct shall be more than 5 cm in width and 1.2 mm
or over in wall thickness made of iron plate
galvanized or coated with enamel or the like
Duct supporting clearance shall be 3 m or less
Bus duct Bus duct Earthing work Class D Duct supporting clearance shall be 3 m or less if
work shall be applied to ducts attached to a building part
for 300 V or less and In a humid place, use a duct for outdoor use and
Class C for more than see that no water collects inside.
300 V (*2).
Floor duct Insulated and Earthing work Class D Connection of electrical conductors is not allowed
work stranded wire shall be applied to the in the duct (wire branching is excluded if that
(excluding the duct. branch is easily accessible.)
case of 3.2 mm or Duct shall be 2 mm or over in wall thickness made
less) of steel plate galvanized or coated with enamel
or the like
Cellular Insulated and Earthing work Class D Connection of electrical conductors is not allowed
duct work stranded wire shall be applied to the in the duct (wire branching is excluded if that
(excluding the duct. branch is easily accessible.)

Page 199 of 282 
 case of 3.2 mm or
less)
Lighting Lighting duct Earthing work Class D Duct supporting clearance shall be 2 m or less
duct work shall be applied to the Do not install a duct through a building part.
duct (excluding ducts 4 m
or less in length).
Flat Flat conductor- Earthing work Class D Used on a branch circuit protected by an
protective synthetic resin shall be applied to the overcurrent circuit breaker of 30 A or less
layer work insulated upper protective layer, Line-to-earth voltage of the circuit shall be 300 V
conductor upper installed protective or less
layer, joint box, and Install a leakage circuit breaker on the power
metallic case of an supply circuit.
insertion connector.
(*1) Use bare conductor if Article 167-1-(1), (2) or (3) is complied with.

(*2) Apply earthing work Class D of Article 57-2 if 300 V is exceeded and there is no danger of a person’s
touching the duct.

7.2.8 Installation of Mains for Electrical Circuits

7.2.8.1
In installing the low-voltage indoor mains from the service entrance switch or the
switchboard in the receiving room to the branching point of a branch circuit, the following
conditions shall be complied with:

7.2.8.1.1 Installation of Main Conductors

The mains shall be installed in a place free of danger of damage and an electrical conductor
with an allowable current equal to or greater than the value given below shall be used for
the mains.

7.2.8.3 Installation of Overcurrent Circuit Breakers

On the power supply side of the mains, an overcurrent circuit breaker to protect such mains
shall be installed on each pole except the neutral wire according to the following items:

a. If motors and the like are not connected to the overcurrent circuit breakers:
An overcurrent circuit breaker having a rated current equal to or less than the
allowable current of the mains shall be installed.
b. If motors and similar household appliances that require a large starting current the
like are connected to the overcurrent circuit breakers:

An overcurrent circuit breaker having a rated current equal to or less than the value
3 times the total of rated current of the motors similar household appliances that
require a large starting current and the like to which the total of rated current of other
household appliances is added shall be installed.

However, it shall not exceed 2.5 times the allowable current of the mains.

c. Exceptions to installation of overcurrent circuit breakers

Page 200 of 282 
 Installation of an overcurrent circuit breaker may be omitted in the following cases:

i. The case where the allowable current of the mains is 55% or more (*2) of the
rated current of an overcurrent circuit breaker that protects other mains
connected to the power supply side of the mains concerned

(*2) If the length of such mains is 8 m or less, the rated current shall be
35% or more.

ii. The case of which length of mains is 3 m or less and to which no other mains
are connected on the load side

7.2.9 Installation of Branch Circuits

A low-voltage indoor circuit branching off from low-voltage indoor mains and reaching
household electric appliance shall be installed according to the following conditions:

7.2.9.1 Installation of switching devices and overcurrent circuit breakers

For a branch circuit, a switching device and overcurrent circuit breaker shall be installed on
each pole (*1) at a place within 3 m from the branching point on the mains.

If the allowable current of the electrical conductor from the branching point to the switching
device and overcurrent circuit breaker is 55% or more (*2) of the rated current of the
overcurrent circuit breaker that protects the mains connecting to that electrical conductor,
the switching device and overcurrent circuit breaker may be installed at a place beyond 3 m
from the branching point.

(*1) For the overcurrent circuit breaker, the neutral pole is to be excluded.

(*2) If the length of electrical conductor from the branching point to the switching device
and overcurrent circuit breaker is 8 m or less, it shall be 35% or more.

7.2.9.2 Installation of Branch Circuits

The branch circuits are divided into the following 3 classes according to the load types
connected to them.

7.2.9.2.1
Branch circuit supplying electricity to lamp load equipment with a rated current exceeding 50
A

A branch circuit supplying electricity to one household electric appliance, other than a
motor, with a rated current exceeding 50 A shall be installed as follows:

a. No other load than this household electric appliance shall be connected to this
branch circuit.
b. The rated current of the overcurrent circuit breaker shall not exceed the value 1.3
times the rated current of that household electric appliance (*3).

Page 201 of 282 
 (*3) If that value does not fit any standard rating of overcurrent circuit
breakers, employ the nearest larger rating.

c. The allowable current of the electrical conductor shall be equal to or greater than the
rated current of that household electric appliance and the overcurrent circuit breaker
according to (b) above.

7.2.9.2.2
Branch Circuit Supplying Electricity to an Electric Motor Alone

A branch circuit supplying electricity to an electric motor alone shall be installed as follows:

a. The rated current of the overcurrent circuit breaker shall be 2.5 times the allowable
current of the electrical conductor connecting to that overcurrent circuit breaker (*4).

(*4) If the rated current of that electrical conductor exceeds 100 A and the said rated
current value does not fit any standard rating of overcurrent circuit breakers, employ the
nearest rating larger than that value.

b. For each portion of the low-voltage indoor wiring, the allowable value of the
electrical conductor of that portion shall be equal to or greater than the value 1.25
times (*5) the total of rated current of the electric motors supplied from that portion of
the low-voltage indoor wiring.

(*5) If the total of the rated current of the electric motors concerned exceeds 50 A, the
allowable current shall be equal to or greater than 1.1 times that current.

7.2.9.2.3 Other branch circuits

For branch circuits other than those described in Items (1) and (2) above, the capacity of the
electrical conductor, receptacle, screw connector and socket connected to such branch
circuit shall be as shown in Table 175-1 according to the magnitude of the rated current of
the overcurrent circuit breaker that protects the branch circuit.

As to thickness of electrical conductor, annealed copper wire of the thickness shown in

Table 175-1 or other wire of equal or larger rated current shall be used.

Thickness of electrical
conductor in the portion
Installation Thickness of Receptacle to Screw connector
(limited to 3 m or less)
Type of low-voltage low-voltage which to or socket to which
from a screw connector,
indoor circuit indoor wiring connect to connect
socket or receptacle to
its branching point
Circuit protected by an Receptacle Socket of the screw
overcurrent circuit breaker with a rated type with a nominal
with a rated current of 15 A current of 15 A diameter of 39 mm
or less or less or less, or a socket
Diameter other than the
Circuit protected by an -
1.6 mm Receptacle screw type, or
overcurrent circuit breaker
with a rated screw connector
with a rated current of
current of 20 A with a nominal
greater than 15 A and 20 A
or less diameter of 39 mm
or less
or less

Page 202 of 282 
 Excluding a Socket for halogen
Circuit protected by an
receptacle to lamps, or a socket
overcurrent circuit breaker
which a plug for incandescent
(excluding a distributing Diameter
with a rated lamps other than
circuit breaker) with a 2 mm
current of less halogen lamps or
rated current of greater
than 20 A can for mercury lamps,
than 15 A and 20 A or less Diameter 1.6 mm
be connected with a nominal
Circuit protected by an Receptacle diameter of 39 mm,
overcurrent circuit breaker with a rated or a screw
Diameter
with a rated current of current of 20 A connector with a
2.6 mm
greater than 20 A and 30 A or over and 30 nominal diameter of
or less A or less 39 mm
Receptacle
Circuit protected by an
with a rated
overcurrent circuit breaker
Sectional current of
with a rated current of 2 Diameter 2 mm
area 8 mm greater than
greater than 30 A and 40 A
30 A and 40 A
or less
or less
Receptacle
Circuit protected by an
with a rated
overcurrent circuit breaker
Sectional current of
with a rated current of 2 Diameter 2 mm
area 14 mm greater than
greater than 40 A and 50 A
40 A and 50 A
or less
or less

7.2.13 Switching Devices at the Indoor Main Lines

7.2.13.1 General Installation

7.2.13.1.1
A switching device shall be installed on the low-voltage indoor circuit in a place near the
service entrance and it shall be easy to open and close.

7.2.13.1.2
An installation shall be provided with a main switch or circuit breaker and a means of
isolation to cut off all voltages. These two functions may be incorporated in a single device.
The main switch or circuit breaker should interrupt all live conductors (i.e. phase and neutral
conductors) and be capable of cutting off the full load current of the installation from supply.
For a 3-phase 4-wire a.c. supply, a linked switch or linked circuit breaker may be arranged
to disconnect the phase conductors only and in such case, a link should be inserted in the
neutral conductor and securely fixed by bolts or screws.

7.2.13.1.3
For an installation serving more than one building, the installation inside separate buildings
shall be treated as a separate installation, and a separate main switch or circuit breaker and
a separate means of isolation for each building are required as in Clause 7.2.13.1.2

Page 203 of 282 
7.2.13.1.4
Every circuit or group of circuits shall be provided with a means of:

a. Isolation; and

b. Interrupting the supply on load under abnormal conditions.

7.2.13.1.5
Where a standby generator is installed, electrically and mechanically interlocked 4-pole
changeover devices should be used for interconnection between the normal and standby
sources to ensure that any neutral unbalance and fault current return to the correct source
of supply.

7.2.13.1.6
Under no circumstances shall a means of isolation or a switching device be provided in a
protective circuit.

7.2.13.1.7
A circuit breaker used to receive supply direct from the Local electricity distribution
company’s transformer. An isolator may be used in conjunction with a fixed type circuit
breaker provided that it is mechanically interlocked with the circuit breaker.

7.2.13.2 Appliances, Equipment or Luminaire

All appliances, equipment or luminaire used by consumers shall comply with the standards
and specifications prescribed by applicable NIS standards. In addition, energy efficient
lamps for lighting systems and electrical appliances shall be preferred.

7.2.13.2.2
An appliance, equipment or luminaire, other than that connected by means of a plug and
socket outlet shall be provided with a means of interrupting the supply on load.

7.2.13.2.3
For electric discharge lighting installations operating normally at an open-circuit voltage
exceeding low voltage, an effective local means for isolation of the circuit from supply (such
means being additional to the switch normally used for controlling the circuit) shall be
provided for the isolation of every self-contained luminaire, or of every circuit supplying
luminaires at a voltage exceeding low voltage.

An installation where it is necessary for a person or persons to enter or work in close

proximity with normally unguarded moving parts which may constitute a hazard shall be
provided with a means of isolation near the moving parts in addition to any emergency
switching provided.

7.2.13.3 Emergency Switching

7.2.13.3.1
Means shall be provided for emergency switching using a self latching push button such
that any part of the installation where it may be deemed necessary to control supply so as to
remove an unexpected danger, thereby keeping the installation isolated until the push
button is unlatched.
Page 204 of 282 
7.2.13.3.2
Means for emergency switching shall be provided for the purpose of cutting off the
appropriate supply to the circuit concerned as rapidly as possible in order to obviate or to
remove a dangerous condition as soon as it becomes apparent. A typical example where
means for emergency switching shall be provided is a machine driven by electrical means
which may give rise to danger.

7.2.13.3.3
Where electrically powered equipment is operated within the scope of NIS IEC 60204, the
requirements for emergency switching of that standard apply.

7.2.14 Control of Supply to User Site Installation

The following types of installations are covered by this standard:

a. Domestic/Residential
b. Commercial
c. Industrial
d. Specialized Installations (military, telecommunications, infrastructure, mobile,
construction sites, temporary installations, mining)
e. Others

7.2.14.1 Supply Control

7.2.14.1.1
Supply to every User Site installation shall be adequately controlled by Switchgear readily
accessible to the consumer which shall incorporate means of:

a. Isolation from sources of supply;

b. Excess-current protection; and
c. Earth-leakage protection.

7.2.14.1.2
All such installations shall be easily accessible to the consumer and as near as possible to:

a. The point or points of entry of the service mains in the case of a public supply;
b. The generator in the case of private plant; or
c. The inverter unit, in the case of renewable energy and fossil fuel energy sources.

7.2.14.1.3
In the case of a private plant where the building containing the generator is isolated from the
building in which the electricity is consumed, a main switch shall be installed at a point at
which the main cables enter the latter building. Where more than one building is supplied
from common mains, switches shall also be installed at each building.

7.2.14.1.4
The means of isolation required by Clause 7.2.14.1.1 shall comprise a linked switch suitable
for operation on load or a linked circuit-breaker arranged to disconnect all supply having an
excess-current release fitted in each live conductor of the supply.

Page 205 of 282 
7.2.14.2 Supply Protection

7.2.14.2.1
The means of excess-current protection required by Clause 7.2.141.1 shall comprise either
a suitably rated fuse in each live conductor of supply or circuit-breaker having an excess-
current release fitted in each live conductor of the supply.

7.2.14.2.2
Every means of excess-current protection shall be suitable for the maximum short-circuit
current attainable.

7.2.14.2.3
The characteristics and settings of excess-current protective gear, including fuses and
arrangement of the installation, shall be such that discrimination in the operation of the
excess-current protection gear is ensured.

7.2.14.2.4
Throughout a 2-wire installation connected to a source of supply having one pole connected
with earth, all fuses and single-pole control devices, e.g. switch or circuit-breakers,
thermostats and the like, shall be connected in the live conductor only. This does not
preclude the use of double-pole linked devices controlling both conductors of the supply.

7.2.14.2.5
Throughout a 2-wire installation connected to a source of a supply having neither pole
connected with earth, every switch or circuit-breaker shall be of the double-pole linked type,
and fuses (where installed) shall be fitted in both poles.

7.2.14.2.6
Every conductor in the installation shall be protected against excess current by a fuse or
circuit breaker fitted at the origin of the circuit of which the conductor forms a part. The
current rating of every fuse used for this purpose shall not exceed that of the lowest-rated
conductor in the circuit protected, account being taken of the class of excess-current
protection afforded by the fuse. Every circuit breaker used for this purpose shall operate
when the circuit protected is subjected to a sustained excess current of 1.5 times the rating
(appropriate to this form of protection) of the lowest-rated conductor in the circuit. Sizes of
fuse elements for semi-enclosed fuses are given in Table 1 Schedule 1.

7.2.14.3 Cut-Out Fuses

7.2.14.3.1
For low and medium voltage cut-out shall comply with Clause 7.2.14.1.1

7.2.14.3.2
The cut out fuse shall be provided with a suitable incombustible and insulating carrier for the
fuse of such shape as to protect a person handing it from shock and burns; and contacts
shall be provided on the carrier to which the ends of the fuse can be readily attached.

Page 206 of 282 
7.2.14.3.3
The cut out fuse base shall be provided with fixed circuit contacts of such shape as to retain
the carrier in position in the presence of vibration.

7.2.14.3.4
The bus bars, fixed contacts, removable contacts, and fuses shall be so shielded as to
protect a person against contact with live metal parts when the fuse-carrier is being inserted
or removed.

7.2.14.4 Consumers Switchboard

7.2.14.4.1
Switchboards shall be constructed wholly of durable, non-ignitable, non-absorbent materials
in accordance with NIS IEC 60439, and all insulation shall be of permanently high strength
of not less than 100MΩ.

7.2.14.4.2
All switchboards with metallic frames shall be provided with suitable terminals, to which the
earthing lead shall be attached.

7.2.14.4.3
The various exposed live parts of switchboards shall be so arranged by suitable spacing or
shielding with non-ignitable insulating materials that an arc cannot be maintained between
any such parts or between such parts and earth. For voltage not exceeding 250 volts the
minimum clearance between the live metal parts of fuses of opposite polarity or phase, or
between any live metal and any earthed metal shall be 50 mm. Fuses which on blowing
expel the gas parallel to the axis of the fuse, and which are of opposite polarity or phase,
may be mounted one above the other if an insulating shield is fixed between them.

7.2.14.4.4
The arrangements of all parts shall be such that the connections to all instruments and
apparatus can be readily traced.

7.2.14.4.5
All parts, including connections, shall be readily accessible; and no fuse, circuit-breaker, or
switch other than an isolating switch shall be fixed on the back of the switchboard panel if it
is necessary to operate the same from behind.

7.2.14.4.6
All nuts or parts carrying over 25A shall be effectively locked so that they cannot become
loose.

7.2.14.4.7
All bus bars and connections on switchboards shall be in accordance with relevant NIS IEC
61439-1.

Page 207 of 282 
 7.2.14.4.8
Where a scheme of colouring is employed to distinguish switchboard busbars and
connections to individual poles or phases, such scheme of colouring shall be in accordance
with relevant NIS.

7.2.14.4.9
The arrangement of bus bars carrying alternating currents shall be in accordance with
relevant NIS IEC 60947.

7.2.14.4.10
Conductors must be symmetrically placed and spaced apart, and so arranged that the
course of every conductor may be readily traced.

7.2.14.4.11
All circuits, instruments, and important apparatus shall be clearly and indelibly labelled for
identification.

7.2.14.4.12
Switches shall be so arranged that their blades or moving parts are disconnected from the
supply in the off position. They shall be so mounted that the top of the handle is at a height
not exceeding 2.3m above floor level.

7.2.14.4.13
In every case in which the switches and fuses are fitted on the same pole or phase these
switches shall preferably be so arranged that the fuses are disconnected from the supply
when their respective switches are in the “off” position.

7.2.14.4.14
Where meters, service fuses or other apparatus belonging to the Local electricity distribution
company are to be mounted on a switchboard, loops shall be left in the leads of sufficient
length to allow the ends of the conductors to be properly connected by the Local electricity
distribution company.

7.2.14.4.15
Each distribution board shall have fitted in or on its case or cover, or in an adjacent
conspicuous position, an indication of the circuit protected by each fuse or circuit-breaker
contained therein and of the appropriate current rating for the circuit so protected.

7.2.14.4.17
Where service meters are not mounted on the main switchboard they shall be mounted on a
substantial base.

7.2.14.4.18
Where instrument transformers are used, and are easily accessible, all live metal parts shall
be effectively insulated.

Page 208 of 282 
7.2.14.5 Final Sub-Circuits

7.2.14.5.1
The number of points which may be supplied by a final sub-circuit of rating not exceeding 15
amperes is limited by their aggregate demand as determined from Table 2 ; there shall be
no other allowance for diversity in the final sub-circuit and the current rating of the cable
must not be exceeded.

TABLE 2

Assumed current demand of points and other apparatus

Points or other Apparatus Current demand to be assumed

(a) 15-amps socket-outlet 15 amperes
(b) 13-amps socket-outlet
13 amperes
(c) 5-amps socket-outlet
5 amperes
(d) Lighting-outlet
Current equivalent to the connected load, with a
minimum of 100 watts per lamp-holder.
(e) Electric clock, electric shaver supply unit, shaver
socket outlet, bell transformer, and current-using May be neglected
apparatus of a rating not greater than 15 volt-amperes.

(f) All other stationary appliances

Nominal current.

Note 1: In the interest of good planning it is undesirable that whole of the fixed lighting of an installation should
be supplied from one final sub-circuit.

Note 2: In the interest of providing the consumer with an adequate installation it is recommended that use should
be made of ring final sub-circuits where applicable.

7.2.14.5.2
All socket outlets in any one room shall be connected to the same phase (or pole of a 3 wire
system).

7.2.14.5.3
Not more than one phase supply shall be brought into a multi-gang switch box.

7.2.14.5.4
Where an installation comprises more than one final sub-circuit, each shall be connected to
a separate way in a distribution board.

7.2.14.5.5
The wiring of each final sub-circuit shall be electrically separated from that of every other
final sub-circuit. To facilitate disconnection of each sub-circuit for testing, the neutral
conductors shall be connected at the distribution board in the same order as that in which
the live conductors are connected to the fuses or circuit-breakers.

Page 209 of 282 
7.2.14.5.6
A final sub-circuit having a rating exceeding 15 amperes shall not supply more than one
point. For the purpose of this Clause, the following items may each be regarded as one
point –

a. A cooker control unit incorporating socket outlet;

b. A light fitting track system provided that individual light fittings are suitably
protected against excess current;
c. A packaged air-conditioner unit
d. Submersible pump

7.2.14.5.7
To determine the rating of a final sub-circuit supplying stationary cookers in domestic
premises, the current demand of each cooker shall be assessed to be not less than 30A.
The minimum size of cable should be 6 mm2.

7.2.14.5.8
Every stationary cooking appliance in domestic premises shall be controlled by a switch
separate from the appliance and installed within 2m of the appliance.

7.2.14.6 Diversity for Consumer Final Sub-Circuit

7.2.14.6.1
Diversity shall not be allowed for when calculating the size of circuit conductors and
switchgear and circuits other than final sub-circuits, to the extent specifically permitted by
IEC standards for cooking appliances.

7.2.14.6.2
Diversity may be allowed for when calculating the size of circuit conductors and switchgears
and circuits other than final sub-circuits provided this is justified by known or anticipated
conditions.

Note: Allowance for diversity is a matter calling for special knowledge and experience. The
application of diversity shall be decided by the engineer responsible for designing each
particular installation.

7.2.14.7 Ring and Radial Circuits

7.2.14.7.1
In domestic installations either radial or ring final sub-circuit conforming with Table 3 may be
installed to serve socket outlets complying with the relevant NIS Specification and
Stationary appliances of rating not exceeding 13A provided that the general requirements of
this Standard and in case of ring sub-circuits, the special requirements of Clauses
7.2.14.7.5 to 7.2.14.7.11 are met.

Page 210 of 282 
7.2.14.7.2
Each socket outlet of a twin or multiple socket outlet units shall be counted as one socket
for the purposes of Clause 7.2.14.7.1 and Table 3.

7.2.14.7.3
A stationary appliance connected permanently (i.e. not through a plug and socket outlet) to
a radial or ring final sub-circuit conforming with Clause 7.2.14.7.1 shall be locally protected
by a fuse of rating not exceeding 13A and controlled by a switch or protected by a circuit-
breaker of rating not exceeding 15A.

7.2.14.7.4
The conductor sizes tabulated in Table 3 are minimum values and shall be increased if
necessary where circuits are installed in groups or in conditions of high ambient
temperature, taking account of the class of excess-current protection provided. In such
circumstances it must be ensured that –

a. for radial final sub-circuits, the current rating of the conductors is not less than that of
the fuse or circuit-breaker protecting the final sub-circuit, and

b. for ring final sub-circuits, the current rating of the conductors forming the ring is not
less than 0.67 times the rating of the fuse or circuit breaker protecting the final sub-
circuit.

7.2.14.7.5
Each circuit conductor of a ring final sub-circuit shall be run in the form of a ring,
commencing from a way in a distribution board (or its equivalent), looping into the terminals
of socket outlets and joint boxes (if any) connected in the ring and returning to same way of
the distribution board.

Fig 7.2.14: Arrangement of conductors in ring circuit connection

Page 211 of 282 
7.2.14.7.6
Except where a ring final sub-circuit is run throughout in metallic conduit, ducts or trunking,
or in metal-sheathed cable, the earth-continuity conductor shall also be run in form of a ring
having both ends connected to earth at the distribution board (or its equivalent).

7.2.14.7.7
Each ring final sub-circuit conductor shall be looped into every socket-outlet or joint box
which forms parts of the ring and shall either remain unbroken throughout its length or,
alternatively, if the conductor is cut, its electrical continuity shall be ensured by joints.

7.2.14.7.8
For ring final sub-circuits complying with Clauses 7.2.3.44.1 to 7.2.3.44.4 the total number
of spurs shall not exceed the total number of socket-outlets and stationary appliances-
connected directly in the ring.

7.2.14.7.9
For ring final sub-circuits complying with Clauses 7.2.14.7.1 to 7.2.14.7.4, the total number
of spurs shall be connected through fused spur boxes. The rating of the fuse shall not
exceed that of the cable forming the spur and in any event shall not exceed 13A. The total
current demand of points served by a fused spur shall not exceed 13A.

7.2.14.7.10
For ring final sub-circuits complying with Clauses 7.2.14.7.1 to 7.2.14.7.4 non-fused spurs
shall be connected to the ring at the terminals of socket-outlets or at joint boxes or at the
origin of the ring in the distribution board. Non-fused spurs shall have a current rating not
less than that of the conductors forming the ring. Not more than two socket-outlets, or one
twin socket-outlet, or one stationary appliance, shall be fed from each non-fused spur.

7.2.14.7.11
In domestic premises, a ring final sub-circuit may serve an unlimited number of points but
shall not serve more than one room. Where two or more ring final sub-circuits are installed,
the socket-outlets and stationary appliance to be served shall be reasonably distributed
among the separate ring final sub-circuits.

7.2.14.7.12
For industrial, commercial and other non-domestic installations radial and ring final sub-
circuits otherwise conforming to the requirements of Clauses 7.2.14.7.1 to 7.2.14.7.10 may
be installed where, owing to diversity, the maximum demand of apparatus to be connected
is estimated not to exceed the corresponding fuse or circuit-breaker ratings set out in Table
3.

7.2.14.7.13
Provision shall be made so that every portable appliance and portable light fitting can be fed
from an adjacent, conveniently accessible socket outlet.

Note 1: For industrial and commercial premises, it may be desirable to provide pilot lamps
to indicate when portable non-luminous heating appliances such as smoothing irons and
soldering irons, are in operation.

Page 212 of 282 
 Note 2: For hand-held appliances which are likely to be used out-door or in damp situations,
attention is drawn to the added safety which can be obtained by the use of a double-wound
transformer having a reduced secondary voltage or alternatively by the use of monitored
earth-continuity circuits.

TABLE 3 
Radial and ring final sub‐circuits 
Description and special  Minimum copper  Minimum  Minimum copper  Rating of fuse  Maximum number of 
condition if any  conductor size or  copper clad  conductor size of  or circuit  socket –outlets and 
  rubber or p.v.c.  aluminum  mineral insulated  breaker  stationary appliance of 
  insulated cable  conductor size  cable used  protecting  rating not exceeding 
  used throughout.  of p.v.c.  throughout    final sub‐ 13 amperes. 
  insulated cable  (alternative to  circuits. 
  used  Col.2) 
  throughout   
 
 

1  2  3  4  5  6 
mm2  mm2  mm2  A   
(a)  Radial final sub circuit      Provided that no fixed 
serving one room only          water‐heating 
  of less than 30m2 floor      appliance shall be 
area which is not a          connected to any of 
  kitchen………………..      these points. 
   
Radial final sub circuit,  2.5  4   
 
serving rooms other    2 
   
than in (a) above………..  2.5   
  4 
Ring final sub circuit,     
   
with spurs if  4.0  6 
  1.5  20 
any………………….      See regulation 31 (8) – 
(b)  6 
2.5      (12) 
  1.5  20 
 
4 
     
2.5  30 
 
(c)     
1.5  30 

      Appliance of 15VA rating or less may be ignored. 

7.2.14.8 Control of Socket Outlets and Appliances

7.2.14.8.1
All sockets used in low voltage circuit shall comply with the requirements of NIS IEC60884.

Page 213 of 282 
7.2.14.8.2
Where the supply is direct current, each socket-outlet shall be controlled by a switch
immediately adjacent thereto or combined therewith. Where the supply is alternating current
and the plug is readily withdrawable, such a switch need not be provided.

7.2.14.8.3
An appliance or light fitting connection to an installation other than by means of a plug and
socket outlet shall be controlled by a switch or switches which shall be arranged to
disconnect all live supply conductors. For an appliance fitted with heating elements which
can be touched or into which more than one phase of the supply is introduced, the switch
shall be a linked switch arranged to break all the circuit conductors.

7.2.14.8.4
The switch required by Clause 7.2.14.8.3 shall be separate from the appliance or light
fittings in a readily accessible position subject to the provisions of Clauses 7.2.14.8.5,
7.2.14.8.6 and 7.2.14.8.7 where applicable.

7.2.14.8.5
The switch required by Clause 7.2.14.8.3 may be mounted on the appliance or light fittings
provided the connections are so arranged that the appliance or light fittings can be
dismantled for maintenance without exposing any parts which remain live. Where live
cables/parts are exposed, they shall be as short as possible, separated from any other
conductors or cables by screens of earthed metal or suitable barriers of insulating material
and so installed that they are not adversely affected by any heat from the appliance or light
fittings.

7.2.14.8.6
Where clause 7.3.3.16 requires a switch to be situated so as to be normally inaccessible to
a person who is using a bath or shower, it is admissible for the switch to be placed in a
suitable position outside and immediately adjacent to the normal access door of the room,
or to be of the type operated by an insulating cord.

7.2.14.8.7
The switch or switches providing control of comprehensive space cooling, or light
installations, comprising more than one appliance or light fitting may be installed in a
separate room.

7.2.14.9 Electric Motor Circuits

a. Every electric motor shall be provided with means for starting and stopping, the latter
so placed as to be easily operated by the person in charge of the motor.
b. Every electric motor shall be provided with the control apparatus specified in the
following:
i. Means to prevent automatic restarting after a stoppage due to a drop in
voltage or failure of supply.
ii. Where more than one method of manually stopping a motor is provided and
danger might be caused by the unexpected restarting of the motor, or of a
machine being driven by the motor, means to prevent restarting until every
Page 214 of 282 
 stopping device has been reset.
iii.Means of isolation suitably placed and so connected that all voltages may
thereby be cut off from the motor and all apparatus including any automatic
circuit breaker, used therewith. If this means of isolation is remote from a
motor, an additional means of isolation adjacent to the motor shall be
installed, or alternatively, provisions shall be made for the primary means of
isolation to be locked in the “off” position.
c. Every electric motor having a rating exceeding 0.37kW shall be provided with control
apparatus incorporating a suitable device affording protection against excess current
in the motor or in the cables between the device and the motor. The local electricity
distribution company shall be consulted regarding the installation of motors of rating
exceeding 50kW, capable of drawing heavy starting current.

7.2.14.9.4
a. As a general guide, all motors shall be provided with control gears so that their
starting currents at user's site installations do not exceed the limits given in the
following table:

Type of supply Motor Rating Limit of starting current

Single Phase Up to and including 0.75kW five times full load current

Single/three phase Above 0.75kW and up to and Three times full load current
including 5.6kW

three phase Above 5.6kW and up to and including Twice full load current
12kW

three phase Above 12 kW One and a half times full load

current.

b. Cables carrying the starting, accelerating and load current of a motor shall be of
rating at least equal to the full-load current rating of the motor when rated in
accordance with the relevant NIS requirements.
A final sub-circuit supplying a motor shall be protected in accordance with the
requirements of Clause 7.2.14.2.6 unless Clause 7.2.14.9.7 applies.

c. Where a starter is provided which affords protection against excess current in a

motor and in the cables between the starter and the motor, the rating of the fuse or
circuit-breaker protecting the final sub-circuit which supplies the motor may be up to
twice that of the cable between the fuse or circuit-breaker and the starter.

d. The sizes of the cables for motor circuits for slip ring or commutator induction motors
shall be suitable for the starting and loading conditions. Insulated conductors
installed shall be such that no stress can be applied by the conductors to any
terminal to which they may be connected.

Page 215 of 282 
e. Fittings shall be so designed and fixed that neither dust not moisture can readily
accumulate on live parts.

f. Where a hanging fitting exceeds 5kg in weight it shall be supported by a metal chain,
tube, or rod, or by several flexible cords in such a manner that the maximum weight
to which any cord is subjected shall not be greater than that specified in Clause
7.2.3.23.5

g. Open-type fittings shall be furnished with inflammable shades unless such shades
are kept free from contact with the lamps by suitable guards or supports.

h. Enclosed type fittings shall be provided with a removable glass receptacle arranged
to enclose the lamp completely, and of such size or construction as to prevent undue
heating of the lamp; and if the position of the fitting be such that the glass receptacle
is liable to mechanical damage, the glass shall be protected by a suitable wire
guard.

i. Fittings whether fixed or portable, shall, whenever exposed to rain, drip or externally
condensed moisture, be of the weatherproof type.

j. Fittings for lamp shall be designed to provide for adequate dissipation of heat from
such lamps.

k. Enclosed fittings shall be used at the following places:

i. In places where inflammable or explosive dust or gas is liable to be present

or where inflammable goods are stored, and they shall be of strong
construction, having airtight external globes of thick glass provided with
substantial guards.
ii. In positions in which the lamp is either near to or can swing into contact with
readily combustible materials.

l. The handle of every hand-lamp (not being a hand-lamp made entirely of metal
specified in the last preceding standard) shall be made of treated hard-wood, or of
some suitable non-ignitable composite insulating material capable of withstanding all
round usage in service.

m. Where portable fittings, appliances, or accessories are likely to be used, the voltage
between any two points in one room or compartment shall not exceed 250 V unless:

i. The fittings, appliances or accessories between which there may be a higher

voltage are so situated that they cannot be brought within 2 meters of each

Page 216 of 282 
 other; or the metal frames and sheathing of all such portable appliances and
accessories are earthed.
ii. Flexible conductors of portable fittings or apparatus shall be connected
through appropriately sized wall plugs.
iii. Portable fittings shall be mounted on a base-block or a suitably fixed hook.
iv. Accessories other than fuses shall be mounted on a base-block unless they
are completely enclosed in metallic casing, and where the surface on which it
is mounted is liable to become damp the base-block shall be rendered
impervious to moisture.

7.2.14.10 Ceiling Roses

a. A ceiling rose shall not be installed in any circuit operating a voltage normally
exceeding 250 volts.
b. A ceiling rose shall be connected to the fixed wiring in such a manner that none
of its terminals remains alive when the associated switch is off unless that
terminal cannot be touched when the ceiling rose is dismantled to the extent
necessary for the replacement of the associated flexible cord.
c. A ceiling rose shall not be used for the attachment of more than one outgoing
flexible cord, unless it is specially designed for multiple pendants.
d. Non-flexible cable shall not be used for connection from the ceiling rose to any
fitting or appliance.
e. The earthing terminal of every ceiling rose shall be connected to the earth-
continuity conductor of the final sub-circuit.

7.2.14.12 Lamp-Holders
a. Lamp-holders for lamps shall normally be used only in circuits operating at a
voltage not exceeding 250 volts.
b. Every lamp-holder for a bayonet-cap lamp in any damp situation or in any
situation in which it can readily be touched by a person in contact with or
standing on earthed metal shall be–
i. Earthed, or
ii. Constructed of, or shrouded in, insulating material and for moulded
insulated bayonet, fitted with a protective shield.
c. Where bayonet or Edison screw lamp-holders are connected to a source of
supply having an earthed neutral conductor, the outer or screwed contact shall
be connected to that conductor. Where such lamp-holders are used in circuits
having neither pole connected with earth, or in any damp situation in which they
can readily be touched by a person in contact with or standing on earthed metal,
they shall be provided with a protective shield of insulating material or shall be
placed or safe guarded, so that neither the lamp cap nor the outer or screwed
contact of the lamp-holder can be inadvertently touched when the lamp cap is
engaged with that contact.
d. Where arc lamps are used in positions where danger might otherwise arise, they
shall be protected either by a metal reflector rigidly fixed beneath the arc or by a
globe or lantern. Wherever noxious fumes are likely to be emitted from such a
Page 217 of 282 
 lamp, suitable ventilation shall be provided.

7.2.14.13 Application of Transformers

a. Where a step-up transformer forms part of a consumer’s installation, a linked
switch shall be provided for isolating the transformer from all circuit conductors of
the supply.
b. An auto-transformer having an output in the extra-low-voltage range shall not be
used to supply–
i. Any socket-outlet, or
ii. Any portable appliance, unless the auto-transformer is contained therein,
or
iii. Earthed concentric wiring, or
c. A step-up autotransformer shall not be connected to an installation obtaining its
supply from a system in which none of the poles of the supply is connected to
earth.
d. The common terminal of every autotransformer winding shall be connected to
the neutral conductor.

7.2.14.14 Capacitor
a. Every capacitor, unless incorporated for the sole purpose of radio interference
suppression or directly connected across a motor winding, shall be provided with
a means, such as a high-resistance leak, for its prompt automatic discharge
immediately the supply is disconnected. This requirement shall not apply to small
capacitors where no risk of shock can arise.
b. For Every user site supplied from L.T. and having connected load that includes
induction motor(s) of 2.23 kW rating and above shall install low tension shunt
capacitors of appropriate capacity across the terminals of such motors to
improve average power factor to 0.85. Such capacitor(s) shall be maintained in
working condition. The local electricity distribution company deserves the right to
disconnect the user site if this clause is infringed upon to ensure compliance only
after which supply shall be restored.

7.2.14.15 Plugs, Socket-Outlets and Adaptors

a. Every plug and socket-outlet as described in Table 9 shall comply with the
applicable requirements of NIS IEC60884 and shall meet the provisions of (i) and
(ii) below.
i. It shall not be possible for any pin of the plug to be engaged with any live
contact of its associated socket-outlet while any other pin of the plug is
completely exposed; provided that this requirement shall not apply to
socket-out-lets and plugs for extra-low voltage circuits, and
ii. It shall not be possible for any pin of the plug to be engaged with any live
contact of any socket-outlet within the same installation other than the
type of socket-outlet for which it is designed.
b. Any circuits for which one pole is earthed at the source of supply, every socket-
Page 218 of 282 
 outlet and plug shall be of the non-reversible type, with provisions for earthing.
c. Plug and socket-outlets may be used in two-wire circuits operating at a voltage
not exceeding 250 volts for the connection of electric clocks, provided that the
plug and socket-outlets are designed specifically for that purpose and that each
plug incorporates a fuse of rating not exceeding 3A.
d. Every plug containing a fuse shall be non-reversible and so designed and
arranged that no fuse can be connected in an earthed conductor.
e. For two-pole-and-earth circuits, the connection of plugs, socket-outlets and
connectors shall be in accordance with Table 10.
f. Where outlets from a socket adaptor have a lower current rating than that of the
input, appropriate fusing shall be provided for each outlet of lower rating. Every
socket-outlet adaptor used at a voltage exceeding extra-low voltage shall be
non-reversible and shall be so designed that the output contacts are arranged in
the same phase or polarity as those of the corresponding socket-outlet. Adaptors
intended for use with electric shavers shall incorporate a fuse of rating not
exceeding 3A and shall be marked “FOR SHAVERS ONLY”
g. Weatherproof plugs and sockets shall be used whenever exposed to rain drip, or
externally condensed moisture.
h. Such accessories shall be of especially robust construction, and be provided with
efficient means to keep the sockets weatherproof when the plug is removed
there from. When a loose cover is employed for this purpose it shall be anchored
to the socket by means of a chain.
i. When the plug is inserted in its sockets, the combine fitting and its interlocking
switch (if any), shall also be weatherproof.
j. In places where petrol-driven conveyances are stored or repaired, plugs and
sockets shall be placed not less than 2 meters above the floor level unless an
interlocked plug and gas-tight switch is used.
k. Adaptors for use in lampholders shall be constructed of tough, flame retardant,
non-conducting, non-hygroscopic material other than hardwood.
l. Adaptors for use in screw holders shall be of one of the following types–
i. Combine adaptor with pull-out plug,
ii. Adaptor with a loose screw to prevent twisting of the flexible conductor.
 
TABLE 9 
Plugs and socket‐outlets for low‐voltage circuits 
Type of plug and socket‐outlet  Rating (amperes) 
Fused  plugs  and  shuttered  socket‐outlets,  2‐pole 
and earth for a.c  13a (with fuses rated at 3 and 13) 
Plugs  (fused  or  non‐fused)  and  socket‐outlets,  2‐
pole and earth  2, 5, 15, 30 
Plugs (fused or non‐fused) and socket‐outlets, 
protected type, 2‐pole with earthing contacts  5, 15, 30 
Plugs and socket‐outlets (theatre type)  15 
Plugs and socket‐outlets(industrial type)  16, 32, 63, 125 

Page 219 of 282 
 TABLE 10 
Connection of plugs, socket‐outlets and connectors 
  Corresponding conductor 
Terminal marking  For circuits having an earthed  neutral  For circuits in which neither pole of 
conductor  the supply is earthed 
L  Live conductor   
N  Neutral conductor  Live conductors 
I or E  Earth‐continuity conductor  Earth‐continuity conductor 

7.2.14.16 Cable Couplers and Connectors

Cable couplers and connectors shall be mechanically sound and electrically continuous and
grounded using either metal which can be earthed or in non-combustible insulating material.
Where the apparatus to be connected requires earthing, every cable coupler and connector
shall have adequate provision for maintaining earth continuity. In all cases, the socket shall
be connected to the source of supply.

7.2.14.17 Electric Signs

Every electric sign shall comply with the following requirements–

a. It shall be readily accessible for inspection and attention;

b. It shall be fireproof, or alternatively the wiring shall be independent, and shall be
controlled by a fuse and switch on each live conductor. When more than one switch is
required the switches shall be linked;
c. Where elaborate switching and flashing apparatus is installed, a special flame retardant
enclosure shall be provided;
d. If fixed in the open air:
i. It shall be weather-proof and lamp-holders shall be weather proof;
ii. Only non-ignitable material shall be used in its construction, except for letters
and designs, for which hardwood is permissible.
e. Where indoor lighting is designated for emergency purposes in such places as
hospitals, entertainment venues, schools, industrial premises, hotels amongst others,
such installations shall comply with IEC 60079.

7.2.15 Appliances

7.2.15.1 Heating and Cooking Appliances

a. All heating and cooking appliances for installation in domestic premises shall
comply with the applicable NIS IEC 60335 Standard.
b. The junction between elements and switches or external connecting leads shall be
effected without solder by connectors which shall be so placed that the temperature
of no part of the switch or terminal connections can rise above 80OC.
c. When an appliance is connected using a cooker control unit or a plug-socket is
fitted to its cable, it shall have a switch and a fuse on the live side, and be so

Page 220 of 282 
 mounted as to secure freedom from electrical hazard. This plug shall have a
separate contact connected to earth and any portable apparatus used from this plug
shall be earthed in accordance with the requirement of these Standards.

7.2.15.2 Protection and Control of Appliances

a. Appliances shall be protected by fuses on each live conductor
b. Appliances shall be controlled as a whole by a switch on each live conductor and
such switch shall be mounted on the wall adjacent to and within easy reach of such
appliance. If more than one switch is so used for any one appliance, all such
switches shall be linked.
c. The wiring to fixed appliances shall be in fixed conduit connected mechanically and
electrically to the metal frame of the appliance provided that flexible conduit may be
used between the wall and the appliance and is connected mechanically to the fixed
conduit and the metal frame of the appliance.
d. For the purpose of this standard a fixed appliance is one which is obviously intended
by size, weight, and construction to be secured in a fixed position.
e. Heating and cooking appliances shall not be fixed near combustible materials unless
the latter are suitably protected.

7.2.15.3 Heating Points

a. Heating points shall each be rated at not less than 1,000 Watts, and shall be
controlled by a switch of not less than 8A capacity. For appliances over 1,800 Watts,
the heating points shall, except in the case of a multi-earthed neutral system, be
controlled by a double-pole switch.
b. The minimum size of conductor for any heating point shall be 2.5 mm2
c. Switches for heating points shall be at a distance not less than 300 mm from any
switch controlling lighting.

7.2.15.4 General Requirements for Boilers and Water Heaters-

a. Electrode boilers and electrode water-heaters shall be connected to a.c. systems
only, and shall be installed in accordance with the general requirements of Clauses
7.2.15.4.2 to 7.2.15.4.5 and, according to the type of equipment connected, with the
particular requirements of Clauses 7.2.15.4.7 and 7.2.15.4.8.
b. The supply to the heater or boiler shall be controlled by a circuit-breaker which
shall–
i. be of the multiple linked type arranged to disconnect the supply from all
electrodes simultaneously,
ii. incorporate excess-current protective devices in each conductor feeding
an electrode, and
iii. be so placed that the person in charge can easily operate it, and where it
is not adjacent to the electrode boiler there shall be a means provided at
the boiler for opening the circuit breaker instantaneously.
Page 221 of 282 
 c. Adequate means, such as an isolator adjacent to the heater or boiler, or a locking
device on the circuit breaker, shall be provided to prevent the apparatus from being
energised while persons are working thereon.
d. Where the circuit-breaker is remote from the heater or boiler, indicating lamps shall
be provided adjacent to or mounted on the boiler, to indicate whether the circuit-
breaker is in the “on” or “off” position.
e. The earthing of the heater or boiler shall comply with the requirements for earthing in
Chapter 11, in addition, the shell of the heater or boiler shall be bonded to the
metallic sheath and armour, if any, of the incoming supply cable. The rating of the
earthing lead, which shall be connected to the shell of the heater or boiler, shall be
not less than that of the largest phase conductor connected to the apparatus, or,
where an earth-leakage protective device is provided, not less than the operating
current of that device, subject to a minimum conductor size of 2.5 mm2
f. Where an electrode water-heater or electrode boiler is directly connected to a supply
at a voltage exceeding low voltage, the installation shall, in addition to complying
with the general requirements of Clauses 7.2.15.4.1 to 7.2.15.4.5 include a
differential earth-leakage protective device arranged to disconnect the supply from
the electrodes on the occurrence of a sustained earth-leakage current in excess of
10% of rated current of the heater or boiler under normal conditions of operation,
except that if in any instance a higher value is essential to ensure stability of
operation of the heater or boiler, the value may be increased to a maximum of 15%.
A time delay may be incorporated in the device to prevent unnecessary operation in
the event of unbalance of short duration.

7.2.15.5 Three-Phase Boilers and Water Heaters

Where an electrode water-heater or electrode boiler is connected to a three-phase supply,
in addition to complying with the general requirements of Clauses 7.2.15.4.3 to 7.2.15.4.5,
the shell of the heater or boiler shall be connected to the neutral of the supply as well as to
the earthing lead. The current rating of the neutral conductor shall not be less than that of
the largest phase conductor connected to the apparatus.

7.2.15.6 Single-Phase Boilers and Water Heaters

a. Single phase domestic thermal storage or instantaneous water heaters not
exceeding 6 kW shall be connected to an individual final circuit and be controlled by
a double-pole switch of adequate rating. If the water heater is installed in a
bathroom, the double pole switch should be installed outside the bathroom in a
convenient position.
b. A thermal storage or instantaneous water heater exceeding 30 A or having a current
rating exceeding half of the maximum demand of an installation in any one phase,
shall have a three phase supply, except where approved by the Local electricity
distribution company.
c. Every water heater or boiler having an un-insulated heating element immersed in the
water shall comply with the requirements of Clause 7.2.15.6.3 to 7.2.15.6.5.
d. The parts of the heater or boiler intended to be connected to the incoming water
supply and to the outlet pipe for the heated water, shall be of metal so as to afford
the means of earthing required by these Standard.
e. The heater or boiler when in use shall have an insulation resistance between the
Page 222 of 282 
 element and the metal parts referred to in Clause 7.2.15.6.3 not less than 0.25 MΩ
or a residual current of less than 1mA with water flowing.
f. The heater or boiler shall incorporate an automatic device to prevent an excessive
rise in temperature.
g. All metal parts of the heater or boiler which are in contact with the water (other than
current-carrying parts) shall be firmly connected to a metal water-pipe through which
the water supply to the heater or boiler is provided, and the said water-pipe shall be
in effective electrical connection with earth by a means independent of the earth-
continuity conductor.
h. The heater or boiler shall be provided with an earthing terminal through which all
exposed metal parts of the heater or boiler are connected and this terminal shall be
connected to the earth-continuity conductor of the final sub circuit supplying the
heater or boiler.
i. The heater or boiler shall be permanently connected to the electricity supply through
a double-pole linked switch which is separate from and within easy reach of the
heater or boiler, and the wiring from the heater or boiler shall be directly connected
to that switch without the use of a plug and socket-outlet; and, where the heater or
boiler is installed in a room containing a fixed bath, the switch shall in addition be
placed outside the room.

7.2.16 Preventions of Interferences Caused By High Frequency Current, Voltage Flickers And
Dips
All electrical appliances, equipment and luminaires capable of generating high frequencies
shall be suppressed at their respective generating sources to mitigate interference with
other vulnerable devices via conduction and radiation channels. In addition, equipment
such as electric arc welding machines and arc furnaces shall be operated in accordance
with NIS IEC 60974-9 to minimize effects of voltage dips and flickers on other consumers.

7.2.16.1 Appliances Generating High Frequency Signals, Voltage Dips And Flickers
a. If the electrical appliance has the possibility of generating high frequency radio
waves or radio frequency currents that might continuously and seriously interfere
with the function of radio, television or other wireless devices, it shall be installed
according to Clauses 7.2.16.1.2 and 7.2.16.1.3 to prevent such interference.
b. For fluorescent lamps, a suitably rated capacitor shall be provided in an appropriate
place to suppress the interference in accordance with NIS IEC 60081.
c. For a small AC series motor with an operation voltage in the low-voltage range and a
rated output of 1 kW or less, one of the following shall be adhered to:
i. Capacitors 0.1 µF and 0.003 µF in capacitance values and of appropriate
voltage rating shall be inserted respectively between motor terminals and
between each motor terminal and the metallic case of the electrical
appliance or the frame of the small AC series motor or the ground.
ii. For an electrical appliance containing a small AC series motor where the
frame of the motor is insulated from the appliance’s metallic case, steel
stand and other accessible metallic parts, capacitors of 0.1 µF and
0.003 µF respectively shall be inserted between motor terminals and

Page 223 of 282 
 between each motor terminal and the motor frame or ground.
iii. A capacitor of 0.1 µF shall be inserted between each terminal of the AC
series motor and ground.
iv. Where the AC series motor is inaccessible, capacitors of 0.1 µF and
0.003 µF respectively shall be inserted between electrical conductors that
are connected to the electrical appliance at a place close to that
appliance between each electrical conductor and the metallic case of the
appliance or ground.
d. For a small AC series motor with an operating voltage in the low-voltage range and a
rated output of 1 kW or less used for electric drills, a non-inductive capacitor 0.1 µF
shall be inserted between motor terminals and through-type capacitor of 0.003 µF
with sufficient shunting effect shall be inserted between each motor terminal and the
ground.
e. For a neon lamp flasher, an appropriately designed filter shall be installed between
power terminals and at a place close to each contact to prevent a radio-frequency
current from occurring in the electrical circuit connected to the neon lamp flasher.
f. All LV installations where welding transformers are connected shall be required to
install suitable capacitor(s) so as to ensure power factor of not less than 0.85 and
reduce voltage dips and flickers to the barest minimum.
g. Electric arc welding sets having a current rating exceeding 25A single phase or 50%
of the maximum demand of an installation in any one phase shall be permanently
connected to the mains on a 3-phase supply. All exposed conductive parts of
welding sets shall be effectively connected to earth.
h. All installations where arc furnaces of high capacities are connected shall require
suitably rated Static Var Compensators (SVCs) to be sited at the points of common
coupling so as to achieve power factor greater than 0.85 and minimize voltage
fluctuations and flickering effects otherwise experienced by other consumers.
i. All appliances, luminaires and apparatus shall be designed, constructed and
appropriately located so as to avoid interference and nuisance and shall exhibit
maximum operational integrity and comply with EMC of NIS IEC61000-3-11.

7.2.17 User’s Site Protection and Over Current Circuit Breakers for Electric Motors
Every User’s site shall be adequately protected against any mal-operation of installed
appliances, equipment and failure of the wiring system. In addition, over current circuit
breakers shall be provided at the user’s site for electric motors.

7.2.17.1 User’s Site Protection

7.2.17.1.1
The following devices shall be used as protective devices against overcurrent:

a. Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCB)

b. Moulded Case Circuit Breakers (MCCB)
c. High Breaking Capacity (HBC) Fuses
d. Semi-enclosed Fuses
e. Circuit Breakers incorporating over current release or in conjunction with fuses

7.2.17.1.2
Page 224 of 282 
 a. Every electrical circuit and sub-circuit shall be protected against excess current by
fuses, circuit breakers, or other similar devices which:
i. Will operate automatically at current values which are suitably related to
the safe current, ratings of the circuit, and
ii. Are of adequate making and breaking capacity, and
iii. Are suitably located and of such construction as to prevent danger from
over-heating, arcing or the scattering of hot metal when they come into
operation and
iv. Permit ready renewal of fuse-elements without danger.
b. Where the earth-fault-leakage current from a circuit due to a fault of negligible
impedance from a live conductor to earthed metal is sufficient to operate the fuses or
circuit-breakers or other similar devices provided so as to comply with Clause
7.2.17.1.1, the current shall be protected against the persistence of earth-leakage
currents liable to cause danger by suitably rated earth-leakage circuit-breaker
(ELCB) or equivalent device.
c. No fuse, or circuit breaker other than a linked circuit breaker, shall be inserted in a
conductor connected with earth, and any linked circuit breaker inserted in a
conductor connected with earth shall be arranged to break also all the live
conductors.
d. Every single-pole switch shall be inserted in the live conductor only, and any switch
connected in the conductor connected with earth shall be a linked switch and shall
be arranged to break also all the live conductors.
e. Overload protective and fault current protective devices shall be in accordance with
the specifications of NIS IEC 60947.
f. For devices providing protection against both overload current and fault current, they
shall satisfy both the requirements of overload protective devices and fault current
protective devices.
g. The characteristics of devices for overload protection shall be coordinated so that
the energy let-through by the fault current protective device does not exceed that
which can be withstood by the overload protective device without damage.

7.2.17.2 Overcurrent Circuit Breakers for Electric Motors

7.2.17.2.1
If an electric motor is installed indoors with a rated output exceeding 0.4 kW, an appropriate
device shall be installed to automatically isolate, or alert the operator of an overcurrent that
may damage the motor.

7.2.17.2.2
The overload protective device is not required to be installed provided:

a. the electric motor is installed at such a position where the operator can normally
monitor it while it is in operation,
b. there is no danger of such an overcurrent being able to damage the motor stator
winding, due to the loading condition of the motor,
c. the electric motor is an integral component of an appliance or equipment complying
as a whole with an appropriate NIS. .

Page 225 of 282 
7.2.17.3 Installation of Overcurrent and Fault Current Protective Devices

7.2.17.3.1
Overcurrent and fault current protective devices shall be installed in places at user’s site
readily accessible for maintenance.

7.2.17.3.2
Overload protective devices shall be so installed:

a. Where a reduction occurs in the value of current carrying capacity of the conductors
of the installation.
b. At any point along the run of those conductors provided that the part of the run
between the point where the value of current carrying capacity is reduced and the
position of the protective device has no branch circuits or outlets for the connection
of current using equipment.

7.2.17.3.3
Fault current protective devices, subject to clause 7.2.17.3.1, shall be installed in such a
manner as to reduce to the barest minimum the risk of fault, fire or danger to persons.

7.2.18 Indoor Electrical Equipment and Appliances

The term “indoor electrical equipment and appliances” refers to low-voltage incandescent
lamps, fluorescent fittings, discharge lamps, household and business electric appliances
installed indoors. These shall be installed according to the following standards:

7.2.18.1.1
All lamps or household appliances shall be installed so that no live part is exposed.

7.2.18.1.2  Installation of Fluorescent and Gas Discharge Lamps

(a) Capacitors and chokes should normally be fitted inside the luminaire. Where they
are fitted separately, they should be mounted in a metal box. Precautions should be
taken to prevent the components from overheating, e.g. by the provision of adequate
ventilation.
(b) The type and size of cables should be properly selected with due regard to the
ambient temperature, the inrush current and high voltages generated during starting.
The neutral conductor in every discharge lamp circuit should have a cross-sectional
area not less than that of the phase conductor.
(c) Where fluorescent and gas discharge lamp are directly mounted on the ceiling care
should be taken to ensure that the choke does not pose a fire risk.

7.2.18.2
Low-voltage business electrical appliances shall be installed so that the live parts are not
exposed. This shall, however, not apply to electric furnaces, electric welders, electric motors
and other appliances that are used with some live part inevitably exposed andin such cases
where these are installed in a place made inaccessible for any person other than the
operator.
Page 226 of 282 
 7.2.18.3
A household or business electric appliance with live parts accessible to persons shall not be
installed indoors.

7.2.18.4
If the indoor electric appliance is to be connected to an electrical conductor, the same shall
be securely connected by means of screw fastening or similar means of fastening. In
addition, no tension shall act on the connection point.

7.3 Special Installation

7.3.1 Traffic Signals

7.3.1.1
The wiring to a traffic sign lamp shall be installed according to the following conditions:

a. The electrical conductor shall be of a PVC-insulated conductor equal or superior in

strength and thickness to an annealed copper wire 1.5 mm2 in diameter.

b. If the electrical conductor is a PVC-insulated conductor, it shall be suspended from a

metallic wire with a tensile strength of 5 kN/m2 or two or more stranded iron wires of
4 mm2 in diameter or more.

c. For the metallic wire of Item (b) for electrical conductor suspension, an insulator
shall be inserted at or near the supporting structures.

7.3.1.2
The hanger wire of a traffic sign lamp shall be installed according to the following conditions:

a. The height of the electrical conductor shall be 2.5 m or more above the ground
surface.

b. If the electrical conductor is to be installed by insulator work, the electrical conductor

shall be bundled at appropriate intervals.

7.3.1.3
On the power supply side of the control device of a traffic signal lamp, a dedicated switching
device and overcurrent circuit breaker shall be installed on each pole.

7.3.1.4
If the wiring of a traffic signal lamp circuit approaches or crosses a facility other than a
building, road, pedestrian overpass, railroad, overhead telecommunication conductor,
antenna or overhead electrical conductor, the clearance from the wiring of the traffic signal
lamp circuit to such object shall be 60 cm or more. If the wiring of the traffic sign lamp is a

Page 227 of 282 
cable, the clearance shall be 30 cm or more.

7.3.2 Public Street lamps

If an incandescent lamp, fluorescent lamp, mercury lamp or the like with a line-to-
earth voltage of 230 V or less is to be installed on a supporting structure of a power
distribution line, it shall be installed according to the following conditions:

7.3.2.1 Approval for Installation of a Public Street lamps

If a public street lamp is to be installed on a supporting structure owned by a power utility
company, approval shall be obtained from the owner.

7.3.2.2 Lighting Fittings of Public Street lamps

a. No light fitting shall be fitted with accessories for signboards or ornamental
purposes.

b. The light fitting shall be strong and durable and shall be attached to a pole firmly.

c. The light fitting shall be rated IP 66.

d. The light fitting shall have a structure that allows for easy replacement of the lamps
and other replaceable components.

e. The live conductor of the light fitting shall have a sectional area of 1.5 mm2 or more.

f. The light fitting attaching band and attaching accessory hardware shall be made of
steel plate given an anticorrosive treatment of galvanizing or stainless steel, which
allows for easy attachment and detachment.

7.3.2.3 Installation of Apparatus

a. The attaching height of the apparatus shall be 4 m or more from the ground surface
to the lowest part of the light fitting. The horizontal jutting distance shall be within 1
m from the point of attachment of the apparatus to the pole.

b. The Luminaries for road and street lighting system shall be in accordance with IEC
60598-2-3

7.3.2.4 Installation of Daylight Sensors

Automatic daylight sensor not built in the lighting control panel shall be installed at a place
where it is not influenced by ambient light.

7.3.3 Swimming Pools and Fountains Installation

These requirements apply to the basins of swimming pools, fountains, paddling
pools and their surrounding zones where, in normal use, the risk of electric shock is

Page 228 of 282 
 increased by a reduction in body resistance and contact of the body with earth
potential. Swimming pools and fountains installations shall comply with the
requirements of NIS IEC 60364-7-702.

Note: Additional requirements may be necessary for swimming pools for medical
purposes.

7.3.4
Special locations (which include public places, parks, garden, sporting areas,
illumination of monuments and flood lights) shall be installed in accordance with IEC
60364-7-714.

7.3.5
Electrical installation in ships shall be in accordance with IEC 60092-306.

7.3.6
Bath and shower electrical installation shall be in accordance with IEC60364-7-701.

7.3.7
Construction and demolition site installations shall be in accordance with IEC60364-
7-704.

7.3.8
Agricultural and Horticultural premises installation shall be in accordance with
IEC60364-7-705.

7.3.9
Households and similar electrical appliances particular requirement for commercial
dispensing appliances and vending machines shall be in accordance with IEC
60335-2-75.

7.3.10
The installations at Marinas and similar locations shall meet the requirements of NIS
IEC 60364-7-709.

Page 229 of 282 
Chapter 8: Protection, Control and Metering
 

8.1 Protection Systems Installations

Protective Relaying System: Adequately sectionalized and graded protective relaying system
shall be provided for transmission lines, transformers and bus bars so as to automatically isolate
the faulty equipment as per preset duty and, thus, minimize the damage to the equipment in the
event of faults and abnormal conditions. All main protection relays shall be of numerical type and
communication protocol shall be as per IEC-61850.

8.1.1 Transmission Systems Protection

The transmission system protection scheme shall be designed to be:
a. Reliable
b. Sensitive
c. Selective and
d. Dependable
The transmission system protection shall cover
8.1.1.1 Line and Feeder Protection: 330 and 132kV line protection
Each line feeder shall be protected with the following protective devices:
a. Main and back up distance protection at each end of each line. The main
protection relay shall be from a different manufacturer and of a different
model from the back-up protection
b. Main and back-up line differential protection with a relay located at each end
linked by means of a digital channel. The relay of the main protection shall be
from a different manufacturer and of a different model from the back-up
protection relays
The line protection circuit shall allow for total fault clearing time ranging from 5-6
cycles including the circuit breaker operating time. The protection circuit shall be
designed for single or three phase trip with single or three poles reclosure
considering the following:
a. Reclosure is allowed for phase to ground fault
b. Reclosing delay shall be between 0.75-2sec
c. When the breakers are tripped, the reclosure shall be sequenced such that
the circuit breaker (from one end) closes on a dead line and then the remote
end circuit breaker by synchronism check
8.1.1.2 Overvoltage Protection
The overvoltage protection shall monitor the voltage of each phase with three trips
settings between 110-150% overvoltage with time delay between 1.0 and 0.125sec
correspondingly. The overvoltage protection circuit shall produce three phases local
and transfer trip.
Digital channel links of 64kbits/sec maximum capacity shall be available for any
communication between line ends relays. PLC channels shall also be available as
back-up transmission path.

8.1.1.3 Power Transformer and Shunt Reactor Protection

Page 230 of 282 
 Power transformer protection shall compose of:
a. A three phase bias restraint differential relay,
b. Three phase and neutral overcurrent relay with instantaneous and inverse
time characteristics,
c. Transformer mechanical devices such as gas relay, over-temperature relay,
oil level relay, tap changer failure relay.
Differential protection shall cover all windings and overcurrent protection shall be
used for all windings and neutral.

8.1.1.4 Breaker Failure Protection

The operation of line breaker failure protection is described as follows:
a. When the circuit breaker is subject to protective tripping, a time delay relay
starts while an instantaneous element supervises the current passing
through the circuit breaker
b. If the Overcurrent Element is not reset at the time the delay elapses, a trip
signal is sent to the adjacent protection zone trip relay directly or by
teleprotection.

8.1.1.5 Shunt capacitor Bank Protection

The main feeder Overcurrent Protection and the fuses of the individual capacitor unit
shall provide the shunt capacitor protection. This is complemented by neutral
overcurrent relay (tuned to fundamental frequency) that will give an alarm when too
much unbalance of the bank occurs. This happens when various capacitor bank unit
fuses have blown out and need replacement.
All capacitor banks installed on 132kV and above shall be provided with the
following protection:
a. Instantaneous and time lag phase overcurrent relay,
b. Instantaneous and time lag neutral earth fault relay,
c. Under and overvoltage relays,
d. Lightning and surge protection.

8.1.1.6 Busbar Protection

The two main buses (breaker and a half) shall be protected by means of differential
protection relays connected to CT located on the feeder side of the associated
breakers. Normally, feeder protection covers the buses located downstream on the
feeders. However, when the feeder disconnect switch is open and the ring bus is
closed, the corresponding feeder bus section comprised between the two circuit
breakers has to be protected by a separate bus differential relay. This relay shall be
provided in each of the feeder protection panels.

8.1.1.7 Synchronism Check

In order to prevent closure of a 330/132kV circuit breaker out of synchronism a
circuit breaker closure shall be conditioned by a synchronism check relay using
LLDB (Live Line Dead Bus) and LBDL (Live Bus Dead Line) schemes. Each line
feeder circuit breaker and autotransformer circuit breaker shall be supervised by an
individual synchronism check relay.

 
Page 231 of 282 
 8.1.1.8 Wide Area Protection
Wide area protection may be implemented to ensure the security, reliability and stability
of the grid system.
The owner of a network shall determine when it becomes reasonably necessary to
implement Wide Area Protection and propose an implementation plan in writing to
NERC.

8.2 Power Systems Metering Installations

a. The Energy Metering System as specified in NERC Metering Code read with its
amendment(s) dealing with installation and operation of meters including interface
Grid meters shall be installed and used for tariff metering for Bulk Interutility power
flows at the trading Point - Point of Common Coupling (PCC) - between TCN, Discos
and Gencos. The metering system shall be installed on each circuit as a self
contained device for recording and measurement of active energy and reactive
energy and other system parameters as detailed below:

i. Mega Watt Hour Meter (MWh),

ii. Mega Volt Ampere Meter (MVA),
iii. Mega Watt Meter (MW)
iv. Mega VAr Meter (MVAr)
v. Power Factor meter (pf)
vi. Kilo Volt meter (kV)
vii. Ammeters (A)
viii. Frequency Meters
ix. Fault Locators

8.3 Digital Events Recorders

Digital recorders shall be installed in every 330kV substation. The devices above shall be
numerical, compatible with mass data storage system and shall be synchronous.
Measurement shall be taken synchronously and shall be time stamped. In the Control
Room, there shall be continuous display of three-phase voltage and current values. The log
records shall be archived for a minimum of 90 (ninety) days (Using data concentrators). The
fault recorders shall also have digital interphase for remote acquisition.

8.4 SCADA Systems Installations

SCADA Requirements - IEC 61850

All SCADA/EMS software shall comply with the industry-accepted software standards
produced by national and international organizations, such as ANSI, ISO, IEC, and IEEE
and shall be CIM (Common Information Model) compliant.

The use of proprietary system services software shall be prohibited.

The requirement of hardware shall be optimized for servers/processors where one or more
applications can be combined or distributed in any combination with adequate redundancy.
Page 232 of 282 
8.4.1 SCADA Control Room
SCADA Control Room shall be constructed in accordance with NIS IEC 61850
standard.

8.4.2 Remote Terminal Unit (RTUs)

Remote Terminal Units (RTUs) and Phasor Measurement Units (PMU) at Load
Dispatch Centre shall comply with NIS IEC 61850.

8.4.3 Communications
Communication between Intelligent Electronic Devices (IED) shall be in accordance
with NIS IEC 61850 and Communication between Substation Automation System
(SAS) and power plant devices shall comply with IEC 608-70-104.

8.4.4 Geographic Information Systems (GIS)

The use of Geographic Information System (GIS) shall be employed by electric
utilities, for the purpose of keeping accurate location inventory of physical assets
and for complex system analysis as they relate to faults, network optimization and
load forecasting for normal service.

Page 233 of 282 
Chapter 9: Classification of Equipment and Types of Tests

Equipment used in the distribution network shall be classified as outdoor or indoor equipment.
Indoor equipment shall consist of equipment used in distribution network installed within a building
or an enclosure free or shielded from direct sunlight.
Examples include but not restricted to;
 Transformer control panels,
 Line/feeder control panels,
 Battery banks,
 Chargers and Tripping units,
 Communication gadgets among others.

Outdoor equipment shall consist of equipment used in distribution network installed outside a
building or any enclosure and not protected from direct sunlight or other weather effects.
Examples include but not restricted to;
 Transformers,
 Circuit breakers,
 Power isolators, among others.

Types of Tests

The condition and service reliability of equipment used in distribution network shall at all times be
kept in the most efficient and safe operating condition while undergoing periodic basic and
necessary tests.

Basic tests to be carried out on distribution equipment shall include but not limited to the following;

Power transformer routine tests:

 Induced voltage test,
 voltage ratio measurement and check of polarities and connections,
 no-load current and no-load loss measurement,
 winding resistance measurement,
 short-circuit impedance and load loss measurement,
 partial discharge measurement,
 Dielectric tests – Separate-source voltage withstand test,
 Insulation resistance test,
 Stability Test.

Distribution Transformers routine tests:

 Measurement of voltage ratios,
 Vector group tests,
 Measurement of high voltage and low voltage winding resistances,
 Dielectric test of high voltage and low voltage winding(s),
 Induced overvoltage tests,
 Measurement of no-load losses and no-load current,
 Measurement of load losses and impedance voltage with off-circuit tap changer in the
nominal position,
 Measurement of the resistances of the insulating system between high voltage, low voltage
and tank (earth),

Page 234 of 282 
  Single phase excitation tests,
 Insulation resistance test.

These tests shall comply strictly with the provisions of IEC 60726.

Basic tests for switchgears (Circuit breakers and panels):

Switchgears routine tests
The following tests shall apply but is not limited to:

 Wiring and function tests,

 Contact resistance tests,
 Low voltage circuit insulation test of panels,
 High voltage power frequency test,
 High voltage insulation test.

9.1 Power and Distribution Transformers

Standard power transformer capacities shall be 2.5 MVA, 5 MVA, 7.5 MVA, 10 MVA, 15
MVA and up to 30 MVA suitable for 33000/11000 V and distribution transformers shall be 25
KVA, 50 KVA, 100 KVA, 200 KVA, 300 KVA, 500 KVA, 1000 KVA, 1500 KVA and 2500
KVA suitable for 33 kV or 11 kV operation with 400 V at secondary at a nominal frequency
of 50 Hz.

All transformers must comply with the provisions of IEC 60076-1 to IEC 60076-10 including
other international standards on distribution and power transformers. The transformers shall
be constructed to achieve lower no-load losses, noise levels and high operating efficiency
without posing risk(s) to lives and property.

The transformers shall operate at a minimum operating efficiency of 95%.

Materials:
The transformer core shall be cold-rolled grain-oriented magnetic silicon steel or amorphous
metal. Winding material shall be copper. Materials other than copper shall be used with
approval duly obtained from Nigerian Electricity Regulatory Commission (NERC).

Transformer Terminal Designations for all Transformers:

Capital Letters designate a primary or high-voltage terminal.
Viewed from the source of supply into the substation transformer, the primary terminals are
marked “R, Y, B” or “A, B, C” from left to right. The R or A bushing is always at the upper
left. The sequence on the high voltage side shall be “R, Y, B” or “A, B, C”.
Small letters designate a secondary or low-side terminal.
The sequence on low voltage side shall be (Example: “r, y, b” or “a, b, c” and “n”).

Page 235 of 282 
 Suppression of Harmonics
The transformer shall be designed as to suppress or eliminate the harmonics voltages and
current, especially in the 3rd, 5th and 7th order harmonics, eliminate waveform distortions that
reduce electromagnetic and electrostatic interfaces in communication circuits and higher
frequency disturbances.
Filters shall be installed against harmonics in the networks.

Environmental Impact
Impact of transformer operation on the following hazardous and loss conditions shall be at
the barest minimum:
 Noise pollution.
 Land pollution, due to escaping oil in case of leaks.
 The use of PCBs (polychlorinated biphenyls) in cooling liquids.
 Energy losses in transformers.
 Visual pollution to the environment caused by the siting of transformers and
substations without due consideration to the impact on the landscape.
 Safety of people and environment

9.1.2 Continuity Test

Every winding continuity test shall be carried out on all transformers using appropriate
method and equipment to detect and confirm open circuit fault in the winding and
terminals.

9.1.3 Vector Group

To confirm the nameplate specification on every transformer, Vector group verification test
shall be carried out in accordance with relevant NIS IEC 60076-1.

9.1.4 Ratio Test

A ratio test shall be carried out on power transformers to confirm the rated voltage ratio of
the transformers.

This process shall be repeated for all tap position to further confirm the nameplate
specification by the manufacturer.

9.1.5 Magnetic Balance Test

To identify interturn fault on magnetic imbalance in the core, this test shall be carried out as
routine test in accordance with NIS IEC 60076-1.

9.1.6 D.C. Winding Resistance Check

This test shall be carried out with reference to NIS IEC 60076-1, using appropriate test
method.

Test results obtained shall be compared with the manufacturers winding resistance to
ascertain level of deterioration.

Page 236 of 282 
9.1.7 Insulation Resistance Test
(1) Electric lines and apparatus of the licensee for use at high voltage shall not be
connected to a system for the purposes of the supply of energy unless the insulation of the
electric lines and apparatus has withstood either–

(a) the test prescribed in that behalf in the appropriate Nigerian Standard (NIS IEC
60076-3) or

(b) in case where no such tests have been prescribed, the continuous application
between conductors and earth during a period of not less than fifteen minutes of
alternating current either at testing voltage equal to at least one and one –quarter
times the normal working voltage to which the electric lines of apparatus will be
subject under conditions of supply, or at a testing voltage equal to the aforesaid
working voltage with the addition of 10,000 volts, whichever be the higher.

(2) Provided that for the purpose of such alternative tests–

(a) the testing voltage between the outer conductor and earth in cases where the outer
conductor of an electric line having concentric conductors is to be connected directly
with earth shall be 1,000 volts;

(b) the aforesaid working voltage between any phase of an alternating current system
and earth in cases when the neutral conductor of the said system is not to be
connected with earth shall be deemed to be the voltage between phases;

(c) the duration of the test may be reduced to one minute in the case of apparatus for
use at high voltages subject to the testing volts being increased so as to equal not
less than one and one-half times the aforesaid working voltage, or aforesaid working
voltage with the addition of 20,000 volts whichever be the less;

(d) Direct current may be used instead of alternating current subject to the testing
voltage being increased so as to exceed by at least fifty per cent the corresponding
testing voltage prescribed for alternating current.

(3) If the testing prescribed in this regulation are made prior to the said electric lines
and apparatus being placed in position for the purposes of the supply of energy, the
said electric lines and apparatus after having been placed in position and before
being connected to the system shall have withstood a further test for resistance of
insulation either by the application of the tests

(4) As prescribed in this regulation whenever reasonably practicable, or by the

application of a testing voltage of not less than 1,000 volts between conductors and
also between conductors and earth during a period of not less than one minute.

Where any electric line has been disconnected from a system for alteration or repair, such
electric line or apparatus shall not be reconnected to the system until the licensee have
applied the test prescribed in paragraph (3) of these regulation and have satisfied
themselves that the insulation of the electric line or apparatus and the phase sequence of
the system are in sound condition

Page 237 of 282 
All power transformers prior to their installation and commissioning shall be sufficiently
tested and confirmed to possess insulation resistance of not less than 5 to 10 times its rated
voltage level. And this value must be reasonably maintained as to prevent danger or
interruption of supply as far as is reasonably practicable.

9.1.8 Phasing and Polarity

Phasing of the distribution transformers shall follow the sequence R –Y – B on the primary
winding and r – y – b – n on the secondary in a transformer of Delta – Wye vector group.
The polarity shall be subtractive.

9.1.9 Continuity Tests

Continuity tests shall be performed on transformers to determine winding continuity on both
sides of the transformer and establish the good operating conditions of the transformer.

9.1.10 Vector group

The transformer winding configurations shall be Dy 11 and Dy 1.

9.1.11 Ratio Test

Transformer voltage ratio test shall be performed on transformers within accuracy range of
±0.1%

9.1.12 Magnetic Balance Tests

Magnetic balance test shall be carried out on transformers to determine inter turn faults and
magnetic imbalances required to establish functionality or otherwise of the transformer.

9.1.13 DC Winding Resistance Check

DC winding resistance check shall be performed on a transformer to determine faulty joints
or tap switch contacts necessary for ensuring that the windings are maintained in healthy
operating conditions.

9.1.14 Insulation Resistance Tests

Insulation resistance tests shall be performed on transformers to establish insulation
resistance values of transformer windings to ground in comparison to acceptable values
required for efficient and safe operations of the transformer.

9.1.15 Circulating Current Test

Circulating Current Test shall be carried out in conformity with the provisions of IEC 60076-
1-11 and IEC 60076-5.

9.1.16 Capacity Confirmation Tests

Transformer capacity shall be confirmed through capacity confirmation test within a 1%
error margin.

9.1.17 Magnetizing Current Tests and Core Losses

The transformer shall maintain very low value of magnetizing current and core loss in
accordance with IEC 60076-1-94.

9.1.18 Efficiency and Regulation Tests

The transformer shall be designed to operate at maximum efficiency with a voltage
regulation between 2 to 5%.

Page 238 of 282 
 9.1.19 Temperature Rise
The provisions of IEC 60076-1-8.3, -2 and -11 shall be strictly complied with.

9.1.20 Transformer Oil Tests

Transformer Oil Test and Furan Analysis shall be performed to ensure consistency of
quality and reliability of transformer oil.

Power transformer prior to its installation arrangement shall be made to sample the
transformer oil in its entire chamber and put to test in accordance with the specification of
this standard. The test to be conducted shall include part or all analysis detailed thus (1)
Dielectric strength test (2) Furan analysis (3) Tan delta analysis and (4) Dissolved gas
analysis test.

9.1.21 Dissolved Gas Analysis

Transformer Oil shall be tested and analyzed to determine the different dissolved gases
contained in the transformer oil as to maintain its quality and reliability in power equipment.

Dissolved gas analysis shall be carried out on all transformers periodically in accordance
with NIS/IEC 60557.

9.1.22 Transformer Auxiliaries

The provisions of IEC 60076-1 as it relates to Transformer Auxiliaries shall be strictly
complied with.

9.1.23 Oil Surge Relay

Oil surge relay shall be installed for the detection of possible contamination of transformer
oil due to oil surge.

9.1.24 Arcing Horn

All transformers from 33 kV shall be provided with arcing horn.

Transformer bushings shall be provided with arcing horn(s) to mitigate effects of flash over
due to surge and lightning.

9.2 Earth Resistance Tests

Earth resistance tests shall comply with the requirements of the Nigerian Standard Code of
Practice for Earthing (NCP 9).

Earthing resistance test shall be carried out on every installation to ensure efficient earthing

 Prior to energizing electrical lines, equipment and apparatus.

 Periodically during the life cycle of the installation.

9.2.1 Transmission and Distribution Requirements

The acceptance criteria for earthing installation on the transmission lines, equipment and
apparatus shall among other criteria have value of earth electrode resistance of less than 1
Page 239 of 282 
Ohm. All HV/EHV installation shall be controlled by an earth leakage protective device to
disconnect supply instantaneously on occurrence of an earth fault or leakage of current to
earth. It shall be capable of passing maximum earth fault current to earth. The passage of
fault current shall not result to any thermal or mechanical damage to the insulation of
connected plant and equipment, and shall ensure equi-potential gradient within the power
system. No dangerous potential gradients (step or torch) shall occur under normal or
abnormal operating condition. The earthing shall minimize electromagnetic interference
between power and control/communication equipment and ensure safety to personnel.

9.2.2 Soil Resistance Tests

To design most economically and technically sound earthing system for a high voltage
substation accurate soil resistivity test and its variation with in substation soil shall be
carried out.

Soil Resistance Test shall be performed for all installations to ensure the maintenance of an
acceptable earth resistance value in accordance with the provision of IEC XXX.

9.2.2.1 Soil Thermal Resistivity

Soil Thermal Resistivity shall be determined for cable installation systems in
accordance with IEC 1982.

9.2.3 Current Transformers

Current Transformers of suitable ratios, burden and accuracy shall be provided as integral
requirements for efficient distribution networks protection and metering.

9.2.3.1 Insulation Tests

Insulation Tests shall be carried out on a Current Transformer (CT) in order to
determine its operating conditions in achieving its intended purpose. These tests
shall be carried in strict conformity with IEC 60071 and IEC 60085.

9.2.4 Excitation Tests

Excitation Test shall be performed on Current Transformers (CTs) to confirm that the CT is
not saturated and will operate within specifications at the rated burden.

9.2.5 Primary Injection/Ratio Tests

Primary Injection / Ratio tests shall be performed on a Current Transformer to determine the
CT accuracy compared to the accuracy class.

9.2.6 Voltage Transformers

9.2.6.1 Continuity Checks

All voltage transformers shall be subjected to, but not limited to, the following for
effective performance:

- VT continuity winding tests

- Polarity

- Phase and Magnitude

Page 240 of 282 
 - Winding Resistance

- Secondary Burden amongst others.

These checks shall be performed in accordance with NIS IEC 60044-7.

9.2.6.2 Insulation Tests

Insulation resistance of a voltage transformer shall comply with the provisions of NIS
IEC 60044-2 (2000-1).

9.2.6.3 Polarity Tests

Polarity Tests shall be performed on voltage transformers to establish voltage
transformation accuracy as compared with declared nameplate data and shall
comply with the provision of IEC 60044-7.

9.2.6.4 Ratio Tests

Ratio Tests shall be performed on voltage transformers in accordance with relevant
sections of IEC 60044-7.

9.3 High and Medium Voltage Cables

9.3.1 Dielectric Tests
Dielectric Tests shall be performed on medium and high voltage cables to confirm their
insulation capability according to IEC 60502-2, IEC 60060.

9.3.2 Cable Fault Location

Faulty Cables shall be tested using on-site fault location technique to identify flash over at
weak points along the cable routes for easy localization.

9.3.3 Cable Route Tracing

Location of the position of fault on faulty cables shall be achieved through route tracing and
the exact position identified through the process of pinpointing.

9.4 Circuit Breakers

The design, selection and specification of Circuit Breakers for use in distribution substations
shall take into consideration the environmental conditions in which the circuit breaker will be
operated.

9.4.1 Standards & Specifications

Circuit breakers shall be outdoor or indoor type and could be of metal clad - gas insulated
and / or vacuum type and / or oil circuit breakers. The design, engineering, manufacture,
testing, inspection and performance of these circuit breakers shall comply with the
requirements of IEC 62271-100 & 200.

Circuit breakers for use for LV applications shall comply with the requirements of the
respective standards IEC 60947-1 & -2 and IEC 60898.

9.4.2 Scope of Tests

Page 241 of 282 
 The recommended scope of tests for indoor and outdoor circuit breakers shall be as
specified in 9.6 and 9.6.1.

9.4.3 Breaker Timing Tests

The recommended Breaking Timing Tests for indoor and outdoor circuit breakers shall be
as specified in 9.6.1.

9.4.4 Auxiliary Switches

Auxiliary switches for remote signalling and interlocking shall be provided for the safe
operation and maintenance of medium voltage circuit breakers at substations in accordance
with IEC 62271-100 & 200.

The design, selection and specification of auxiliary switches to be mounted on substation

circuit breakers for both indoor and outdoor types shall be of mechanism-operated control
and/or truck-operated contact auxiliary switches.

9.4.5 Oil Circuit Breakers

The design, selection, specification, operation and maintenance of oil circuit breakers shall
be in accordance with the requirements of 10.6.1.

9.4.6 Gas Insulated Circuit Breakers

The design, selection, specification, operation and maintenance of gas-insulated circuit
breakers shall be in accordance with the requirements of 10.6.1.

9.4.7 Vacuum Circuit Breakers

The design, selection, specification, operation and maintenance of vacuum circuit breakers
shall be in accordance with the requirements of 10.6.1.

9.4.8 Earth Resistance and Continuity Tests

Earth Resistance and Continuity Tests shall be carried out to determine the effectiveness of
the earthing system for the safe operation and maintenance of equipment installed in
substations and shall be consistent with the requirements of NCP09.

All substation equipment shall be solidly earthed and the continuity to earth of all metallic
parts shall be regularly confirmed and established in conformity with the minimum specified
values given in 12.4.

9.4.9 Final Inspection

Final inspection on all new installations and major maintenance works shall be carried out
on all equipment deployed prior to the commissioning by a team of competent COREN
registered electrical engineers with a minimum of 10 years cognate experience.

9.5 Lightning Arresters

This specification defines the minimum engineering design requirements for protection
devices to be deployed for indoor and outdoor substations against lightning strikes.

Distribution networks and associated structures shall be effectively protected against

lightning strikes. The Basic Impulse Level (BIL) of Lightning Arresters shall be less than that
of the equipment installed in the network.

Page 242 of 282 
9.5.1 Standards and Specifications
The design, selection and specification of lightning arresters for use in distribution networks
shall take into cognisance amongst other considerations the prevailing atmospheric
conditions (Isokeraunic level) of the environment in accordance with the requirements of
IEC 60099-5, 6 & 8, and IEC 62305-1, 2, 3 & 4.

9.5.2 Ratings
The ratings of lightning arresters shall be as stated in 10.7.1.

Table 1: Typical Arrester Ratings for System Voltages

Arrester Rating (KV) Arrester Rating (KV)

High
High Impedance
Impedance
Nominal System Grounded Grounded, Nominal Grounded
Grounded,
L-L Voltage Neutral Ungrounded, or System L-L Neutral
Ungrounded
(KV) Circuits Temporary Voltage (KV) Circuits
or Temporary
Ungrounded
Ungrounded
2.4 2.7 3.0 69 54 -
60 -
4.16 3.0 - - 66
4.5 4.5 - 72
115 90 -
4.8 4.5 - 96 -
5.1 5.1 108 108
- 6.0 - 120
138 108 -
6.9 6.0 - 120 -
- 7.5 - 132
- 8.5 - 144

12.47 9.0 - 161 120 -

10 - 132 -
- 12 144 144
- 15 - 168
13.2, 13.8 10 - 230 172 -
12 - 180 -
- 15 192 -
- 18 - 228
23, 24.94 18 - - 240
21 - 345 258 -
24 24 264 -
- 27 276 -
34.5 27 - 288 288
30 - 294 294
- 36 300 300
- 39 312 312
46 39 - 400 300 -
- 48 312 -
336 -
360 -

Page 243 of 282 
 

9.5.3 Tests
Annual tests shall be carried out on lightning arresters to ensure their operational
effectiveness in conducting to earth over-voltage surges that may occur during lightning
strikes in accordance with the requirements of IEC 60099-6 & 8 on testing.

9.5.4 Testing Methods

Test methods for lightning arresters shall be in accordance with the requirements of IEC
60099-8 and as may be specified by the original equipment manufacturer.

9.5.5 Acceptance Criteria

The acceptable nominal voltage for lightning arresters shall be in accordance with the
values specified in 10.7.2 (Table 1).

9.5.6 Earth Resistance and Continuity Tests

Earth Resistance and Continuity Tests shall be carried out to determine the effectiveness of
Lightning Arresters installed for the safe operation and maintenance of the network in
accordance with the values specified in 12.4.

9.5.7 Insulation Resistance

A d.c. voltage not less than twice the normal voltage of the supply (r.m.s. value of a.c.
supply) shall be applied for the measurement of insulation resistance of Lightning Arresters.

9.6 Substation D.C Supply (Batteries and Battery Charger System)

Distribution Substations shall be provided with a d.c. battery bank and battery charger
systems as an independent source of energy, separate from the primary a.c. supply source,
to ensure continuity of supply to substation control systems that require energy for their
continuous operation.

9.6.1 Standards and Specifications

The design, selection and specification of battery and battery charging system for use in
distribution substations shall be such that sufficient energy is available for normal operation
of substation protection and control system including other d.c. operated auxiliaries within
the substation.

Batteries used for substation d.c. supply shall be of vented flooded lead acid type.

The nominal d.c. operating voltage at substations shall be 110V. The d.c. supply cabling
shall be sufficiently sized to prevent voltage drop at the load end, particularly for long cable
runs.

9.6.2 Installations

9.6.2.1 Chargers & Tripping Units

Batteries shall be charged in accordance with the manufacturer’s specification.

Page 244 of 282 
 Charge controllers shall be installed to control the battery charge current to maintain float
charges.

9.6.2.2 Battery Banks

Distribution substation batteries shall be installed in a separate room provided to
house the Battery Banks and shall be placed on metal racks suitably constructed for
the purpose and on acid proof tile.

Every battery shall be so arranged that a potential difference exceeding 50V does not
exist between adjacent cells without adequate protections against electrical hazards,
and each cell shall be readily accessible from the top of the battery bank and from at
least one side.

9.6.3 Safety Measures

The room in which batteries are placed shall be effectively ventilated to prevent the
accumulation of dangerous and flammable battery fumes. Extractor fans shall be provided
at every battery room.

Persons entering the room shall be provided with personal protective equipment including
nose mask and hand gloves.

9.6.4 Testing and Maintenance

Battery bank installation shall be periodically inspected, tested and maintained to guarantee
reliability of service and safety of personnel.

9.6.5 Disposal Methods

Unserviceable batteries shall be safely disposed in a manner that will not constitute hazard
to the environment in accordance with the requirements of the National Environmental
(Sanitation and Wastes Control) Regulations.

9.7 Relays
9.7.1 Standards and Specifications
The design, selection and specification of relays for use on distribution substation
switchgear shall be of the appropriate type to monitor, protect and measure electrical
signals and input and initiate appropriate predetermined changes in the electrical circuit in
accordance with IEC 60255-1.

The types of relay to be used in distribution substations shall include but not limited to:

 Electromechanical Relays
 Electrostatic Relays
 Numerical Relays

9.7.1.1 Electromechanical Relays

Page 245 of 282 
 Electromechanical relay used on distribution substation switchgears shall comply
with the requirements of IEC 61810-1.

9.7.1.2 Electrostatic Relays

Electrostatic relays which are relays that do not have moving parts used on
distribution substation switchgears shall be installed and maintained in accordance
with the requirements of IEC 60255.

9.7.1.3 Numerical Relays

Numerical Relays are Intelligent Electronic Devices (IED) enabled relays using a
microprocessor to perform protective, control, and measurement functions. They
shall be compatible to telecommunication interfaces.

Numerical Relays installed on distribution switchgear shall conform to the

requirements of IEC 61850-3.

9.7.2 Relay Tests

Relay installed on substation switchgear shall be tested and calibrated at least twice yearly.

The test so carried out shall be in accordance with the specification of IEC 60255 and IEC
61810-7.

9.7.3 Adverse Conditions

Substation Relay selection and specification shall take into consideration the ability of the
relays to withstand adverse operating conditions such as excessive temperature rise, high
humidity and dusty environment.

9.7.4 Tests on Relay Circuits

Substation relay circuit shall be periodically tested yearly to ascertain the functionality of the
relay and associated network devices such as current transformers, voltage transformers to
ensure that their performance is still within the specified limits.

9.7.5 Primary Injection Tests

Primary Injection Test shall be carried out once in a year on all substation installed current
transformers to confirm the equipment is still within its accuracy classification.

9.7.6 Secondary Injection Tests

Secondary Injection Test shall be carried out once in a year on all substation installed relay
current transformer to determine the effectiveness of the operations of the relay at the
specified input level.

9.7.7 Pick –up Current

Secondary Injection Tests shall be carried out once in a year to determine the pick-up
current of all relays installed in a distribution substation circuit to ensure its conformity with
specifications.

9.7.8 Calibration of Relays

Injection Tests shall be carried out once in a year on all substation relays to check and
make necessary adjustments to the preset settings for the optimal performance of the
devices.

Page 246 of 282 
 Relays shall be calibrated after every setting changes or repairs.

9.7.9 Relay Application Tests

Functional Tests shall be carried out quarterly on all installed Injection Substation relay
circuits to confirm the operational readiness of the circuits to protect and monitor installed
equipment.

9.7.10 Maintenance
Maintenance shall be carried out on all installed Injection Substation relays as may become
necessary in accordance with the manufacturers recommendation.

Substation Relays found to be inoperative during tests shall be replaced with relays with the
same or compatible characteristics.

Page 247 of 282 
Chapter 10: Inspection Checks and Preventive Maintenance
10.1 Transmission Installation
All transmission installations shall be inspected after construction is completed before
energisation by NERC staff or appointed Inspectors. Confirmatory checks shall be made on
the following:

a. Conductor condition.
b. Conductor sag and clearance to ground, trees, and structures.
c. Insulator conditions.
d. Line hardware for roughness and tightness. Excess inhibitor found should be
removed from conductors to prevent corona discharges.
e. Structure vibration and alignment.
f. Guys for anchors that are pulling out, guy wire conditions, and missing guy guards.
g. Ground-wire connections and conditions.
h. Ground resistance at each structure.
i. Structure footings for washouts or damage.
j. Obstruction light operations for aircraft warning.
k. Transformers and instrument transformers
l. Circuit breakers
m. Clamps
n. Isolators
o. Re-gravelling of switchyard
p. Battery banks
q. Chargers
r. Protective panels
s. Lightning arrestors.

10.2 Distribution Installation

Operators of distribution networks shall be responsible for the development and
implementation of inspection checklist(s) required for the preventive maintenance of all
electrical equipment as specified by the original equipment manufacturer for optimal
performance of the equipment.

The preventive maintenance measures shall also take into cognizance the safety of persons
in accordance with the requirements of the Nigerian Electricity Health and Safety Code
2014.

The preventive maintenance checklist(s) shall include but not limited to the following
facilities, which are critical to system reliability:

a. Poles,
b. Overhead conductors,
c. Underground cables,
d. Transformers,

Page 248 of 282 
 e. Breakers,
f. Isolators,
g. Earthing Switch,
h. Auto Reclosure,
i. Sectionalisers,
j. Protective devices,
k. Substation premises.

A visual inspection of distribution lines and equipment shall be carried out periodically at
least once every six months to check for:

a. Broken insulators,
b. Broken/tilted poles,
c. Environmental Conditions that may adversely affect the overhead distribution
line,
d. Developing defects or abnormalities on equipment.

10.3 Consumer Installation

10.3.1 Inspection Checks of User’s Site Electrical Installations
a. On completion of any new electrical installation or major alteration in the existing
installation at the consumer premises, visual inspection shall be made to verify
that the electrical equipment as installed is correctly selected and erected in
accordance with these Standards. The visual inspection shall include a check on
the following items, where appropriate:
i. Adequacy of working space, access, and maintenance facilities,
ii. Connections of conductors,
b. Identification of cables and conductors,
c. Adequacy of the sizes of conductor in relation to current carrying capacity and
voltage drop,
d. Correct connections of all equipment with special attention to socket outlets,
lamp holders, isolators, switches, residual current devices, miniature circuit
breakers, and protective conductors,
e. All safety requirements and equipment with reference to fire barriers and
suitable seals and protection against thermal effects,
f. Methods of protection against direct contact with live parts (including
measurement of distances where appropriate), i.e. protection by insulation of live
parts, or protection by barriers or enclosures,
g. Presence of appropriate devices for isolation and switching,
h. choice and setting of protective and indicative devices,
i. Labelling of circuits, fuses, protective devices, switches, isolators and terminals,
j. Selection of equipment and protective measures appropriate to adverse
environmental conditions,
k. Provision of adequate warning signs or notices,
l. Presence of diagrams, instructions and other similar information,
m. Connection of single pole devices for protection or switching in phase conductors
only,
Page 249 of 282 
 n. Methods of fault protection,
o. Prevention of mutual detrimental influence,
p. Presence of under voltage protective devices,
q. Ensuring that appropriate erection methods and good workmanship as well as
proper materials have been used in accordance with the provisions of these
standards.

10.3.2 Testing of Low Voltage Installations

10.3.2.1 Safety Precaution

Precautionary measures should be taken during testing and the method of tests
should be such that no danger to persons or property can occur even if the circuit
being tested is defective.

10.3.2.2 Sequence of Tests

The tests are to be carried out in the sequence indicated below:

a. Continuity of protective conductors, including main and supplementary

equipotential bonding,
b. Continuity of ring final circuit conductors,
c. insulation resistance,
d. Verification of polarity,
e. earth electrode resistance,
f. effectiveness of earthing
g. earth fault loop impedance,

In the event of any test indicating failure to comply, that test and those preceding,
the results of which may have been influenced by the fault indicated, should be
repeated after the fault has been rectified.

10.3.2.3 Continuity of Protective Conductors

Every protective conductor, including all conductors and any extraneous conductive
parts used for equipotential bonding should be tested for continuity. The test should
be made by connecting together the neutral and protective conductors at the mains
position and checking between earth and neutral at every outlet by a continuity
tester, which should show a reading nearer to zero.

10.3.2.4 Continuity of Ring Final Circuit

a. The ring circuit should be tested from the distribution board. The ends of the two
cables forming the phase conductor should be separated, and a continuity test
should show a reading near zero between the two; the same tests to be made

Page 250 of 282 
 between the two cables that form the neutral conductor and between the two cables
that form the protective conductor.
b. The testing method in Clause 10.3.2.4.a above is only applicable when the ring
circuit has been inspected throughout, prior to the test, to ascertain that no
interconnection (multi-loops) exists on the ring circuit.

10.3.2.5 Insulation Resistance Tests

a. A suitable d.c. insulation tester should be used to measure insulation resistance.
Care should be taken to ensure that the insulation of the equipment under test can
withstand the test voltage without damage. A d.c voltage not less than twice the
normal voltage of the supply (r.m.s. value of a.c. supply) shall be applied for the
measurement of insulation resistance, provided that for tests on low-voltage circuits,
the test voltage need not exceed 1000/500V d.c.
b. The main switchboard and each distribution circuit should be tested separately. To
carry out this test, large installation may be divided into groups of outlets, each
containing not less than 50 outlets. The term ‘outlet’ in this case includes every point
and every switch. A socket outlet or appliance or luminaries incorporating a switch is
regarded as one outlet.
c. When measured with all fuse links in place, all switches and circuit breakers
(including, if practicable, the main switch) closed and all poles or phases of the
wiring electrically connected together, the insulation resistance to earth should not
be less than the 1.0megaohm.
d. When measured between all conductors connected to any one phase or pole of the
supply and, in turn, all conductors connected to each other phase or pole of the
supply, the insulation resistance should not be less than 1.0megaohm.
e. In carrying out the test:
i. Wherever practicable, so that parts of the wiring may be tested, all lamps
shall be removed and all current using apparatus shall be disconnected and
all local switches controlling lamps or other apparatus shall be closed.
ii. Where the removal of lamps and/or the disconnection of current using
apparatus is impracticable, the local switches controlling such lamps and/or
apparatus shall be open.
iii. All electronic devices connected in the installation should be isolated or short
circuited where appropriate so that they are not damaged by the test voltage.

Page 251 of 282 
 iv. Where the circuits contain voltage sensitive devices, the test shall measure
the insulation resistance to earth with all live conductors (including the
neutral) connected together.
f. Where apparatus is disconnected for the test and the equipment has exposed
conductive parts required to be connected to protective conductors, the insulation
resistance between the exposed conductive parts and all live parts of the equipment
should be measured separately and should have a minimum insulation resistance
not less than 1 megaohm.

10.3.2.6 Polarity Test

a. A verification of polarity shall be carried out and ensured that:
i. All fuses and single-pole control and protective devices are connected in the
live conductor only;
ii. Centre-contact bayonet and Edison-type screw lamp-holders in circuits
having an earthed neutral conductor, have their outer or screwed contacts
connected to that neutral conductor; and
iii. Wiring has been correctly connected to plugs and socket outlets and other
similar accessories.

10.3.2.7 Earth Effectiveness Test

A portable D.C. Earth resistance Tester may be used to measure earth resistance
provided it has been ensured by inspection throughout the whole length of the earth-
continuity conductor that no inductor is incorporated. In these circumstances and
subject to the requirements for earth loop impedance, it is satisfactory, where steel
conduit forms part or the whole of the earth-continuity conductor, a value of
resistance not exceeding 3.0ohm is obtained, or where the earth-continuity
conductor is composed entirely of copper, copper-alloy or aluminium, a value of
resistance not exceeding 5.0ohm is obtained.

10.3.2.8 Earth Fault Loop Impedance

a. The earth fault loop impedance should be measured by a phase- earth loop tester
with a scale calibrated in ohms.
b. Before the test begins, it is essential to establish, by inspection, that the earthing
conductor and all relevant earth connections are in place, and that the bonding
connection to electricity supplier’s earthing facilities is disconnected. Measures
should be taken, during the impedance tests especially when the earth leakage
protective devices are effectively removed for the duration of the tests, to ensure that
the installation is not being used other than by person(s) carrying out the tests.

Page 252 of 282 
10.3.2.9 Periodic inspections and tests
a. The results of a periodic inspection and test of an installation, or any part thereof,
shall be recorded on an inspection certificate and given by the contractor or by an
authorized person acting on his behalf, to the person ordering the inspection.
b. A notice of such durable material as to be likely to remain easily legible throughout
the life of the installation shall be fixed in a prominent position at or near the main
distribution board of every installation upon completion of the work. The notice shall
be inscribed in indelible characters no smaller than those here illustrated and shall
read as follows–
“IMPORTANT” –This installation should be periodically inspected and tested
and a report on its condition obtained, as prescribed in the Standard for
Electrical Installations.
Periodic inspection and tests of electrical installation shall be carried out and
recorded on an inspection certificate at intervals of not more than three
years.
(i) After having inspected and tested an installation the authorized inspector,
if satisfied that the work has been done in a workmanlike manner in
accordance with the requirements of these Standard and if the test made as
required by the foregoing provisions of this Part of these Standard have been
satisfied, shall certify in writing to the electricity/local electricity distribution
company that the installation has been duly inspected and tested and may be
safely connected with the source of supply.
Nothing in any such certificate shall relieve the owner or occupier of any
premises from the obligation to bring any installation into conformity with
these Standards if on any subsequent inspection any defects are discovered
which render such installation electrically hazardous.

Page 253 of 282 
Chapter 11: Earthing

11.1 General provisions

Earthing is the direct connection to ground of all exposed metallic parts of an electrical
appliance or installation for the purpose of limiting voltage build-up relative to ground.
Earthing provides common return path to earth of electric current through direct physical
connection to ground and it is the reference point in an electrical system from which other
voltages are measured.

The earthing of all electrical equipment at Transmission networks shall be of solid type for
the purpose of protecting personnel and equipment installed at various locations from
lightning strikes, surges, static charges and for the discharge of fault current to earth in
accordance with the requirement of IEC 60364-5-54 and the provisions of the Nigerian
Code of Practise on Earthing (NCP 09).

Earthing shall be carried out to achieve:

a. Zero potential with respect to ground

b. Discharge of lightning strikes and over voltages through rod guard, surge arresters,
shielding wires to ground
c. Ensure safety of persons by eliminating voltage gradient with respect to ground
d. Create through path to ground via the earthing switch and earthed terminals for the
purpose of discharging static charges to earth prior to maintenance and repair
works.

For every installation operating at any voltage level, the installation earthing terminal shall
be provided adjacent to the equipment terminals. Throughout every circuit of such an
installation, an earth-continuity shall be provided and connected to the equipment earthing
terminals.

11.1.1

All metal work of wiring system (other than current-carrying parts), including cable sheathes
and armour, conduits, ducts, trunking, boxes, and catenary wires, shall be connected to
appropriate earth-continuity conductors.

11.1.2

Exposed metalwork of all apparatus shall be connected to appropriate earth-continuity

conductors.

11.1.3

The earthing terminal of every socket-outlet shall be connected to the earth-continuity

conductor of the final sub-circuit. Where the earth-continuity conductor is formed by conduit,
trunking, duct, or the metal sheath and/or armour of cables, the earthing terminal of each
socket-outlet shall be connected by an appropriate conductor to an earthing terminal
Page 254 of 282 
 incorporated in the associated box or other enclosure. For the purpose of these regulations,
physical connection of adjacent sections of ducts or trunking is necessary to ensure earth-
continuity.

11.1.4

At every lighting point with metal fitting, an earthing terminal shall be provided and
connected to the earth continuity conductor of the final sub-circuit.

11.1.5

An earthing terminal connected to the earth-continuity conductor of the final sub-circuit shall
be provided at every metal lighting switch position unless this takes the form of an earthed
metal box having a means of fitting the switch-plate in reliable electrical contact with the
box.

11.6.7

Isolated metal

(1) Where isolation of metal is adopted for the prevention of dangerous earth-leakage currents, it
shall be confined to the following items-

i. Short isolated lengths of metal used for the mechanical protection of cables having a
non-metallic sheath, other than over-head spans of conduit between buildings or conduit
used for protection of cables in circuits operating at voltages exceeding low voltage in
discharge-lighting installations.
ii. Metal clips used for fixing cables,
iii. Metal lamp caps,
iv. Small metal parts such as screws or name-plates isolated by insulating material,
v. Metal chains for the suspension of lighting fittings,
vi. Metal lighting fitting using filament lamps installed above a non-conducting floor and so
mounted, or so screened in non-conducting material, that they cannot readily be
touched by a person standing on or within reach of earthed metals.
vii. Catenary wires where insulated hangers are used

11.6.8. Bonding

1. The consumer’s earthing terminal shall be bonded to the metalwork of any public gas
services and any water services on the consumer’s premises in addition to the connection to the general
mass of the earth.
2. It shall be noted that before the consumer’s earthing terminal is bonded to the metalwork of
any gas or water service, connection of the earthing terminal to an effective means of earthing shall be
completed.

Page 255 of 282 
11.6.9.

The bonding connections to any gas or water service shall be made as near as practicable to the
point of those services within the premises; provided that where there is an insulating section or
insert at that point, the connection shall be made to the metalwork on the consumer’s side of that
section or insert and, in the case of a gas service on the consumer’s side of the gas meter.

11.6.10

Copper bonding leads used in compliance with Clause 11.6.9 shall be of cross-sectional area not
less than the appropriate value shown in Table 11.1 subject to a minimum size of 6mm2. For the
purposes of this regulation, the associated circuit conductor shall be the largest conductor
connected into the input side of the consumer’s switchgear. Conductors of material other than
copper shall have a resistance not exceeding that of the prescribed copper conductor. Connections
to the pipes of other services shall be made by means of clamps.

TABLE 11.1

Maximum earth-loop impedances for earth-leakage protection by semi-enclosed fuses or cartridge

fuses rating a fusing factor exceeding 1.5 (system operating at 230-250 volts to earth)

Current rating of fuse: Impedance:

(Amperes) (Ohms)

5 16

10 8

15 5.3

20 4

30 2.7

45 1.8

60 1.35

100 0.8

11.6.11

The exposed metalwork of all apparatus which is required by these Regulations to be earthed,
which might otherwise come into accidental contact with extraneous fixed metalwork shall be either
effectually segregated therefrom, or effectually bonded thereto so as to prevent appreciable voltage
differences at such possible points of contact. Copper bonding leads shall be of cross sectional
area not less than the appropriate value shown in Table 11.1, subject to a minimum of 1.5 mm2

Page 256 of 282 
where the bonding lead is un-enclosed. Conductors of material, other than copper shall have
resistance not exceeding that of the prescribed copper conductor.

11.6.12

Bathrooms

In a room containing a fixed bath or shower cubicle, parts of a lamp-holder within a distance of 2.5
m from the bath or shower cubicle shall be constructed of, or shrouded in, insulating material.
Bayonet-type lamp-holders shall be fitted with a protective shield. As an alternative, totally enclosed
light fittings may be used.

11.6.13

Location of Switch Control

Every switch or other means of electrical control or adjustment shall be located outside the inner
walls of a fixed bathroom normally inaccessible to a person using a fixed bath or shower. This
requirement does not apply to insulating cords or cord-operated switches. No stationary appliance
having elements, which can be touched, shall be installed within reach of a person using the bath
or shower.

11.6.14

Electric Shaver Supply Unit

In a room containing a fixed bath or shower, there shall be no socket-outlets and there shall be no
provision for connecting a portable appliance except for shavers supply unit. In a room containing a
fixed bath or shower, electric shavers shall be connected only by means of shaver supply unit
where the secondary circuit supplying the output sockets shall be isolated both from the supply
mains and from earths

11.6.15.

Protection against earth leakage

The earthing of the consumer’s installation shall be effected in such a manner that no fault of
negligible impedance to earthed metal shall be so sustained as to cause danger and shall be in
accordance with the appropriate requirements of these Regulations

11.6.16

Protection by fuses or circuit breakers

Earth-leakage protection may be effected by means of fuses or, excess-current circuit breaker
provided the earth fault current so generated will operate the protective devise and so make the
faulty circuit dead exceeds–

Page 257 of 282 
 i. 3 times the current rating of any semi-enclosed fuse having a fusing factor exceeding 1.5,
used to protect the circuit (see Table 11.1). Or
ii. 2.4 times the rating of any cartridge fuse having a fusing factor not exceeding 1.5, used to
protect the circuit, or.
iii. 1.5 times the tripping current of any excess-current circuit breaker used to protect the
circuit.
11.6.17

Where the requirement of Clause 11.6.16 cannot be satisfied, earth-leakage protection shall
be provided by one or more earth-leakage circuit-breaker for all parts of an installation to which the
requirement of earthing applies, installation of the earth-leakage circuit-breakers shall satisfy the
test requirements of these provisions.

11.6.18

Current Operated Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker

A current-operated earth-leakage circuit breaker shall be used only where the product of its
operating current in amperes and the earth-loop impedance in ohms does not exceed 40. Where
such a circuit breaker is used the consumer’s earthing terminal shall be connected to a suitable
electrode.

11.6.19

Voltage Operated Earth Leakage Circuit breaker

Every voltage-operated earth-leakage circuit breaker shall be arranged to have its operating
coil connected between the consumer’s earthing terminal (which may serve the whole or part of an
installation) and an earth electrode, the connecting lead shall be insulated.

11.6.20

The earth electrode used with any voltage-operated earth-leakage circuit breaker shall be
placed outside the resistance area of any parallel earth, which may exist, for example where a
water heater is installed. If by subdivision of the earthing system, discrimination in operation
between a number of voltage-operated earth-leakage circuit breakers is to be afforded, the
resistance areas of the associated earth electrodes shall not overlap.

11.6.21

Earth Continuity Conductors

Every conductor used, as an earth-continuity conductor shall satisfy the requirements stated
below–

i. Where the conductor forms part of the same cable as the associated circuit
conductors, other than a flexible cable or flexible cord, conductor shall comply with
the relevant requirements for the cables.
ii. Where the conductor is contained in a flexible cord, it shall have a cross-sectional
area not less than that of the largest associated current-carrying conductor,
Page 258 of 282 
 iii. Every cable sheath and/or armouring used as an earth-continuity conductor shall
satisfy the relevant requirements of standards mentioned in these Regulations;
iv. Conductors of copper other than those mentioned in items (i) to (iii) above, shall
have a cross-sectional area not less than the appropriate value shown in Table 11.2,
subject to a minimum of 1.5 mm2 where the conductor is unenclosed. Conductor of
material other than copper shall have a resistance not exceeding that of the
prescribed copper conductor.
11.6.22.

Installation

The installation of every earth-continuity conductor and earthing lead shall satisfy the
requirements stated below–

i. Every earth –continuity conductor of cross-sectional area 1.5 mm2 up to and including 6
mm2, other than copper strip, shall be protected throughout by installing at least
equivalent to that provided for a single-core, non-sheathed cable of appropriate size.

ii. Where the sheath of earth-continuity conductors is removed adjacent to joints and
terminations, earth-continuity conductors of cross-sectional area up to and including 6
mm2 shall be protected by installing slaving.

iii. Bare earth-continuity conductor shall be protected, where necessary, against

mechanical damage and corrosion, particularly at terminations.

iv. Every bare earth-continuity conductor of the types other than copper strip shall be
identified at terminations as appropriate.

v. All joints in earth-continuity conductors shall be mechanically sound, electrically

continuous and protected, where necessary, against corrosion,

vi. Connections to cable sheaths and/or armouring, and to pipes, shall be soundly made by
soldered joints or by clamps. Every clamp shall be so installed as to provide reliable
connection without damage to the associated cable or pipe.

vii. Copper clad aluminum conductors shall not be used for bonding connections to water
pipes likely to be frequently subjected to condensations in normal use, or in other
situations where the terminations of the conductors are likely to be exposed to sustained
wet conditions. This requirement does not apply to terminations, which may be only
initially damp during building construction.

11.6.23 Earthing leads

Pipe such as gas or water, or members of structural metalwork, shall not by themselves constitute
an earth-continuity conductor where this is necessary.

Page 259 of 282 
11.6.24 Size of Earthing Conductors

The cross-sectional area of every copper conductor used as an earthing lead shall not be less than
that shown in Table 2 except that for connection of an earth-leakage circuit-breaker to an earth
electrode, where a cross-sectional area of 2.5 mm2 need not be exceeded. A maximum size of
copper conductor of 70 mm2 cross-sectional areas need not normally be exceeded except for the
earthing of a transformer neutral or electrode boiler. For the purpose of this regulation, the
associated circuit conductor shall be the largest conductor connected into the input side of the
consumer’s switchgear. Every conductor of material other than copper shall have a resistance not
exceeding that of the prescribed copper conductor. Copper-clad aluminum conductors shall not be
used for final connections to earth electrodes.

11.6.25

Every connection of an earthing lead to an earth electrode or other means of earthing shall be
readily accessible and soundly made by use of soldered joints or clamps: a permanent label
indelibly marked with the words “Safety Electrical Earth – DO NOT REMOVE”, in a legible type not
less than 4.75 mm high, shall be permanently fixed at the point of this connection.

11.6.26

Where protection against dangerous earth-leakage current by fuses or excess –current circuit
breakers is admissible, one of the following methods of earthing shall be employed–

i. Where the supply undertaking provides an earthing point which affords a metallic
return path to the means of earthing of the supply system, the earthing lead shall
connect the consumer’s earthing terminal to this point;

ii. Where a means of earthing has not been provided by the supply undertaking, the
consumer’s earthing terminal shall be connected by the earthing lead to an effective
earth electrode or electrodes, such as copper strip or rod, which shall be buried in
the ground at a position as near as practicable to the consumers earthing terminal
and shall satisfy the tests specified in Appendix 3.

11.6.27

The metalwork of public gas services and water services shall not be used as the sole earth
electrode of the installation.

153. If more than one plate or tubular earth electrode is employed for one earthing system they
shall be efficiently connected together.

11.6.28

Earthing of Cooking and Heating Appliances

Every fixed electric heating and cooking appliance shall for the purpose of earthing, be
provided with a suitable terminal to which the earthing lead shall be connected.

11.6.29

Page 260 of 282 
 In the case of fixed heating and cooking appliances and of motors of over 3.75 kW an
earthing lead other than the conduit shall be taken direct from the appliance or motor to the nearest
earth.

11.6.30

(1) Where the multiple-earthed neutral system is used, the earthing lead shall be taken from
the neutral bar or stud, and the conduit shall (in addition to being itself earthed) be connected to
this earthing lead.

(2) Save as provided in the last preceding paragraph the neutral wire of any system shall not be
used as an earthing lead.

11.6.31

Precautions in earthing

Pipes conveying gas, hot water, or an inflammable liquid shall not be used as an earthing system.

Prevention of danger from earth leakage current

Every item of apparatus and every live conductor shall be effectively prevented, by one of the
methods described in items (i) to (iv) below, from giving rise to danger from earth-leakage currents–

(i) Enclosure in insulation which is durable and substantially continuous, i.e., “all-insulated”
construction;

(ii) Double insulation;

(iii) Earthing of exposed metal parts in accordance with the requirements of these
regulations;

(iv) Isolation of metal in such a way that is not liable to come into contact with live parts or
with earthed-metal.

11.7 Earthing in Commercial Premises

All electric equipment that are installed for public use shall be adequately earthed or insulated to
prevent electric shock to people.

11.7.1. Earth leakage

In locations accessible to livestock/humans and in and around agricultural/
commercial buildings, the installation shall as far as is practicable be of “all-
insulated” construction.

Page 261 of 282 
11.7.2

Provision of Earthing Terminals

An earthing terminal, connected to the earth-continuity conductor, shall be provided at every outlet
point in the installation.

In situations accessible to livestock, a metal pipe or conduit shall not be used as a sole earth-
continuity conductor, though it may be used to supplement a separate earth-continuity conductor.

11.7.3

Earthing in Agricultural Locations

The earthing lead of an agricultural installation shall be adequately protected against disturbance or
damage by livestock or by mobile mechanical implements. Where the earthing lead is not enclosed
in conduit or equivalent mechanical protection, it shall be of the armoured type.

Protection against earth-leakage currents by isolation of metal-work, as provided for in items (i), (v),
and (vi) of Clause 11.6.7, is not recognized for agricultural and horticultural installations, unless the
metalwork is out of reach of livestock and is not liable to accidental contact with passing machinery,
implements or vehicles.

11.8 Earthing in Industrial Premises

1. Connection with earth Terminals
All power-house and substation switchboards shall be provided with at least two different and
independent earth connections, connected in parallel, to which all metal frames, all metal
instrument cases (unless otherwise protected) and other metal parts thereof shall be connected.
Means shall be provided to test the earth electrode resistance of these earth connections
individually.

Metalwork (other than current-carrying parts) and one point of the secondary winding shall be
connected to the appropriate earth-continuity conductor, provided that these regulations shall not
apply to–

i. A transformer in which the windings are mounted on separate limbs of an earthed core or
are separated by an earthed metallic screen; or
ii. A double-insulated transformer; or
iii. The secondary winding of a “high-reactance’ transformer serving solely to energise a tesla
coil or the heating element of an electric discharge lamp;
iv. The secondary winding of a transformer in a shaver supply unit; or
v. A transformer which is an integral part of an item of apparatus, where the apparatus as a
whole is the subject of and complies with Nigerian Industrial Standards; or
a transformer used in welding installations designed in accordance with the requirements in
Nigerian Industrial Standards and NCP 9.

Page 262 of 282 
1. Connections to earth
(1) Earthing connections and earth electrodes shall be of copper or galvanized steel.

(2) Stranded or circular earthing leads shall have a minimum copper equivalent cross-
sectional area of not less than 16 mm squared.

(3) Flat earthing leads shall have a minimum copper equivalent cross-sectional area of not less
than 50 mm squared and a minimum thickness of 3 mm.

(4) Earth electrodes shall be in the form of plates or rods of the following minimum sizes –

a. Copper plates: 300 mm x 300 mm x 3 mm thick;

b. Galvanized steel plates: 300 mm x 300 mm x 3 mm thick;
c. Copper rods: 16 mm diameter;
d. Galvanized steel rods: 25 mm diameter.
(5) Earthing leads shall he capable of carrying for a period of five seconds the full fault current
of the system to which they would be subjected.

(6)The earthing requirements in regulation 73 shall be read in conjunction with the Nigerian
Code of Practice on Earthing NCP 9.

11.9 Earthing in Construction Sites

Because of the difficulty of creating an equipotential zone in a construction site it is unlikely that the
developer will be able to make full use of a Protective Multiple Earthing facility, but the supplier may
provide a PME terminal to site offices. If the condition that it will not be used for general eathing
purposes can be satisfied. Where the supply is at high voltage the developer will have to provide an
earth connection for the neutral. In damp and rough condition of construction sites all equipment of
construction has to be robust and regularly inspected and continual attention should be paid to the
earthing arrangements and protective circuit generally.

11.10 Earthing in Mobile Sites

Permanent buildings on a caravan may be treated as if they are ordinary premises and may be
supplied and protected by generally adopted method of earthing. And in accordance with the
specification of NCP 9.

11.11 Stand‐by Generator Installation

Generating plant shall be connected to earthing by connecting the frame of the generator,
associated exposed conductive parts to a main earthing terminal. The earthing terminal or bar is
connected to an independent earth electrode and, where appropriate to other earthing facilities
associated with the installation. Further earthing requirement of earthing on generator shall be
referred to NCP 9. It is recommended that the earth resistance should not exceed 2 ohm

1. System earthing
(1) In medium voltage and low voltage alternating current systems the connection of circuit with
earth shall be made in accordance with the Nigerian Standard Code of Practice on Earthing (NCP
9) and the following requirements-

Page 263 of 282 
 a. the intermediate conductor of a medium or, low voltage three-wire single phase system, and
the neutral conductor of a medium three-phase four-wire system, shall be earthed in
multiple. That is, at the point of supply (the generating station, sub-station or transformer)
every fifth pole and the terminal poles of the distribution line. The consumer’s earth must
not be connected to the neutral conductor.
b. the resistance between any point of the intermediate or neutral conductor and earth shall
not exceed 2 ohms.
c. the neutral point of a medium voltage three-phase three-wire system shall be effectively
earthed at the point of supply.
(2) In high voltage three-phase alternating current systems, the connections of the circuit with
earth shall be made in accordance with Regulations 44 and 45.

12. Star-connected systems with earthed neutral

(1)The neutral point shall be earthed at the point of supply. - That is, the generator neutral
point or the neutral point of the transformer secondary where change of voltage occurs - and it may
be earthed at any other point, provided that no interference of any description is caused by such
earthing.

(2) In the event of an appreciable harmonic current flowing in neutral connection such as to
cause interference with communication circuits generator or transformer neutral shall not be
earthed, but a suitable earthing transformer shall he used.

(3) In unattended generating stations or sub-stations supplying overhead lines earth leakage
relays shall be provided, so that in the event of a leak earth occurring either the faulty line will be
cut out or the whole of the system supplied from this station or sub-station rendered dead.

(4) These leakage relays if connected to individual feeders or lines shall be set to operate with
a time lag not exceeding five seconds with a current exceeding ten per cent of the full load rating of
the feeder or line, or, connected between the neutral point of the generator or transformer and
earth at a current not exceeding one ampere.

(5) Where under any conditions the use of earth leakage relays may be impracticable such
relays may, with the written consent of the NERC be omitted: (it is suggested that addition devices
be considered).

(6) In continuously attended generating stations or sub-stations a visual and audible indication
may be used to supplement the automatic disconnect of supply. In each case, immediate steps
shall be taken to remove the fault and disconnect the faulty feeder or line.

13. Delta-connected systems or star-connected systems with isolated neutrals

(1) In the case of delta connected systems or star-connected system with isolated neutrals
earthing transformers or other means approved by NERC shall be provided to give an artificial,
neutral point which shall be earthed. Earthing equipment shall be of sufficient capacity to ensure
the effective operation of the protective apparatus; simple leakage protection or indication shall be
provided for these systems as specified in Regulations 44(')) and 44(9) for systems with earthed
neutrals.

Page 264 of 282 
 (2) High Voltage single-phase systems derived from Delta or Star connected systems shall be
earthed in a manner approved by NERC.

(3) Where any part of supply system other than on a consumer premises, is normally
connected with earth, no switch, fuse, or circuit-breaker shall be Inserted in the earthed conductor
or in any conductor connected there and the connection with earth, shall be efficiently maintained
except when interrupted for the purpose of periodical tests.

(4) Notwithstanding anything contained in the last preceding clause, systems including more
than one generator operating in parallel may have the neutral conductor of a three-phase star-
connected generator disconnected when necessary to prevent the circulation of local currents
provided that where all the generators are located in one power- house, at least one generator in
operation shall have its neutral point connected to earth: provided further that where the generators
are contained in more than one power-house, and the power-houses are inter-connected, a neutral
point shall be provided at each power house and earthed and all such neutral points shall be so
arranged that no earthed- circulating current will flow between the power-stations.

(5) When the return current of any individual distribution transformer does not exceed two
amperes, and the transformer supplying the lines and any distribution transformer supplied by such
lines are not less than 10 km from any telephone exchange, the earth may, with the previous
consent in writing of the Telephone Operator, be used to carry the return current of the distribution
transformers.

(6) If the insulation of any circuit of any system is faulty, immediate steps shall be taken to
make good the insulation before the current is again placed in service.

11.12 Steel Poles and Street Lighting Columns

(a) Steel Poles

Where an un-energised steel pole or structure is erected either as tower or for a purpose
arrangement shall be made to protect such structure from the effect of lightning strike by the
provision of protective earthing.

(b) Street Lighting and Street Furniture

Street furniture includes permanently site lighting columns illuminated traffic signs, billboards and
other electrically supplied equipment.

Class I Construction, in which exposed conductive parts are connected to the earthing terminal
within the equipment.

Class II Construction, in which no provision is made for connection of exposed metallic parts of
the street furniture to earth with this form of construction, care should be taken to ensure that any
protective or PEN conductor in the supply cable has an insulated termination preventing contact
with or connection to the metallic parts of the street furniture.

TABLE 11.2

Page 265 of 282 
 Minimum sizes of copper earthing leads, copper bonding leads and copper earthing continuity
conductors not forming part of the same cable as the associated circuit conductors

Nominal cross
Nominal cross Nominal cross
sectional area of Nominal cross sectional
sectional area of sectional area of
largest associated area of earthing lead
earthing lead bonding lead
copper circuit conductor
conductor conductor
conductor

1 2 3 4

2 2 2 2
mm mm mm mm

1.0 6 1.0 1.0

1.5 6 1.0 1.0

2.5 6 1.0 1.0

4 6 2.5 1.0

6 6 2.5 1.0

10 6 6 2.5

16 6 6 2.5

25 16 16 6

35 16 16 6

50 16 16 6

70 50 50 16

95 50 50 16

120 50 50 16

150 50 50 16

185 70 70 50

240 70 70 50

300 70 70 50

400 70 70 50

500 70 70 50

630 70 70 50

11.13 Tower Earthing

Page 266 of 282 
 All towers shall be effectively earthed. The footing resistance of all towers shall be
measured by the Transmission Service Provider (TSP) in dry weather after completing
tower erection; but before stringing of earth wire. Tower footing resistance shall not exceed
2.0 Ohms. In areas of high resistivity counterpoise system shall be used.
 

11.14 Equipment Earthing

The minimum earthing design requirement for equipment shall take the following into
consideration:

a. The reduction in risk to persons during the transfer of fault energy and load
imbalance conditions,
b. The protection of equipment to operate satisfactorily under normal HV, MV, LV fault
conditions,
c. Minimize the risk of voltage stresses in excess of the equipment Basic Impulse Level
(BIL),
d. Meet the basic earthing value for;

Transmission Substations ≤ 1.0 Ω

Tower footing resistance ≤ 2.0 Ω

11.4.1 Substations
Substation earthing shall be done for the purpose of connecting neutral point of
transformers, station auxiliary generators and non-current carrying metal parts, such
as structures, overhead shielding wires, tanks, frames to the earth mat so that Touch
and Step potentials within the Substation are in accordance with the relevant IEC
XXXXX.

Page 267 of 282 
Chapter 12: Generation
12.1 Site Requirements
12.1.1 Site Approval
a. The Licensee before siting and commencement of construction of Power Plant
shall first obtain prior approval of the site by the Commission and other relevant
agencies as well as consent of the host community.
b. The licensee shall have a resettlement plan in case of involuntary resettlement
and/or displacement of the host community or affected Persons where applicable
or likelihood of occurrence.

12.1.2 Documentation
Every application for site approval by a licensee shall be accompanied by the
following documentation:

a. A topographic map in 1-10,000 of the project site

b. Geotechnical Investigations report
c. Site Layout plan
d. EIA report

12.1.3 Geotechnical Investigations

a. Licensee shall submit a detailed Geo-investigation of the site detailing its
geology and geomorphology.
b. The site shall not be close to any known geological faults and the site shall have
a 50 year history of lack of seismic activity.

12.1.4 Hydrology
A Generation Licensee shall submit a detailed hydrological report to indicate that the
site will not be a subject of seasonal floods.

12.1.5 Water Permit

A water permit shall be obtained from the Federal Inland Waterways if the water is to
be abstracted from inland water bodies for water use above 1000m3 per day

12.1.6 Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA)

Before commencement of work, Licensee shall therefore submit to the Commission
an Environmental Impact Assessment Statement approved by the Federal Ministry
of Environment indicating that all environmental issues likely to arise from the
construction of the plant have been addressed and obtained.

Page 268 of 282 
12.2 Plant Design
a. General Design Considerations

Licensee (s) and/or Generation Companies shall submit to the Commission a detailed
engineering design of the power station based on applicable National and International
Engineering codes. The design will ensure that the Power plant when built is able to
generate its design capacity in a cost effective, reliable and safe manner with minimal
impact on the environment.

b. Plant Layout

Power plant arrangement will permit reasonable access for operation and maintenance
of equipment. Careful attention shall be given to the arrangement of equipment, valves,
mechanical specialties, and electrical devices so that rotors, tube bundles, inner valves,
top works, strainers, contactors, relays, and like items can be maintained or replaced
safely if and when necessary. Adequate platforms, stairs, handrails, and kickplates shall
be provided so that operators and maintenance personnel can function conveniently and
safely

12.2.1 Fuel Handling

a. Fuel Source: The type and availability to be indicated taking into account
environmental regulatory requirements that may affect fuel and fuel characteristics of
the plant.

b. Stack emissions: Electric power plant is to be designed with the type of stack gas
cleanup equipment which meets both Federal (Nigerian Environmental Standards
and Regulatory Agency – NESREA) and state emission requirements. For a solid
fuel fired boiler, this may involve an electrostatic precipitator or bag house for
particulate, and a scrubber for sulphur compounds unless fluidized bed combustion
is employed. Boiler design will be specified.

c. Waste Disposal: For electric generating stations utilizing solid fuel, both solid and
liquid wastes will be handled and disposed off in an environmentally acceptable
manner. The wastes can be categorized generally as follows:
i. Solid wastes. These include both bottom ash and fly ash from boilers.
ii. Liquid wastes. These include boiler blowdown, cooling tower blowdown, acid
and caustic water treating wastes, coal pile runoff, and various contaminated
wastes from chemical storage areas, sanitary sewage and yard areas.

d. Other Environmental Considerations:

Other environmental considerations include noise control and aesthetic treatment of
the project. The final location of the project within the site area will be decided taking
into consideration its proximity to any nearby hospitals, schools, offices and
residential areas. Also, the general architectural design will be reviewed in terms of
coordination and blending with the style of surrounding buildings.

Page 269 of 282 
 12.2.1 Technical Documentation
a. Applicants shall submit the following technical documentation to NERC for
approval for the issuance of a construction permit
i. Site Survey Plan
ii. Soil Investigations
iii. EIA
iv. Site Layout Plan
v. Listing and Specifications of major equipment
vi. Construction Plan

b. Construction schedule
i. Engineering Drawings

c. Environmental Health and Safety Plan for Construction

d. Layout of Workers camp

12.3 Construction of Power Plants

12.3.1 Responsibilities of the Licensee or Contractor
Licensee/Contractor shall:

a. Comply with all applicable sections of the National Building code as well as
Federal, State and Local Government Building and Environmental Health and
Safety Regulations and procedures.
b. Ensure that all workers are fully qualified and/or certified with respect to
mandated Environmental Health and Safety training as required by legislation
and the relevant Codes and regulations;
c. Provide Environmental Health and Safety documentation required under this
regulations to the Project Manager;
d. Provide all necessary Environmental Health and Safety equipment, including
Personal Protection Equipment, as required for safe execution of work;
e. Comply with the Environmental Health and Safety Regulations and Directives
Performance Requirements for Power Stations given by the Commission;
f. Record and report all incidents, injuries and accidents to the Environmental
Health and Safety Coordinator within 24 hours of the accident/incident;
g. Stop work if the conditions are such that work cannot be performed safely;

12.3.2 Responsibilities of the Project Manager

a. The Project Manager shall prior to the commencement of the works, review the
Environmental Health and Safety Management Plan prepared by the Contractor,
and ensure that the Contractor has prepared an appropriate site specific
Environmental Health and Safety plan.
b. The Project Manager shall ensure that the Contractor has:
c. Performed Hazard Assessment (Job Hazard Analysis) of potential hazards, and
formulated prevention and control measures to address the identified hazards;
d. The equipment to perform the works safely;
Page 270 of 282 
 e. Identified employees with the requisite knowledge and skills to perform the work
safely;
f. An understanding of the obligation to comply with the applicable Occupational
Health and Safety and Regulations, Codes and the relevant Environmental.
Health and Safety procedures;
g. A plan and schedule for Environmental Health and Safety inspections of the
contract site;
h. A plan for, and review of, ongoing recording of Environmental Health and Safety
related events and incidents;
i. A plan and review of ongoing Environmental Health and Safety performance
measurement activities; and
j. On site First Aid facilities, including but not limited to the administration of
treatment and emergency evacuation where necessary.

12.3.3 Pre‐Requisites For Commencement Of Construction

Before the commencement of construction, the Licensee shall:

a. Provide to the Commission, a written copy of their up-to-date Environmental

Health and Safety Program which shall include the following:
i. A signature by the Licensee or Applicant or by the person or persons
responsible for the management of the company;

ii. A statement of the Licensee or Applicant’s commitment to cooperate with

the Environmental Health and Safety Committee and workers in the
workplace in carrying out their collective responsibility for the
Environment, Health and Safety;

iii. A statement indicating the respective responsibilities of the Licensee or

Applicant, the contractor, supervisors, the Environmental Health and
Safety Committee and workers in carrying out their collective
responsibility for the Environment, Health and Safety;

iv. Procedure to identify the need for, and for the preparation of, written work
procedures to implement Environmental Health and Safety practices,
including practices required by the Act and other relevant regulations;

v. A plan for orientation and training of workers and supervisors in

workplace and job-specific safe work practices, plans, policies and
procedures, including for emergency response, that is necessary to
eliminate, reduce, or control hazards;

vi. Procedure and process for issuing and cancelling work permits;

vii. Provision for establishing and operating an Environmental Health and

Safety committee;

viii. A system for the recognition, evaluation, and control of hazards that
includes a means of evaluation and monitoring of the workplace to
Page 271 of 282 
 identify potential hazards and the associated risks; procedures and
schedules for regular inspections by management and committee
members; procedures for the identification, reporting, and control or
correction of hazards; and procedures for the prompt investigation of
hazardous occurrences to determine the cause for the occurrence and
the actions necessary to prevent a recurrence;

ix. A plan for the control of biological, radioactive and chemical substances
handled, used, stored, produced, or disposed of at the workplace;

x. An emergency response plan;

xi. A provision for recording and maintenance of records and statistics,

including Environmental Health and Safety Committee minutes, and
reports of Environmental Health and Safety inspections and
investigations;

xii. A provision for monitoring the implementation and effectiveness of the

program; and

xiii. A short Environmental Health and Safety induction exercise for all
visitors.

12.3.4 Pre‐Construction Site Meeting

A Pre-Construction meeting shall be conducted to review the requirements for
Environmental Health and Safety, and shall include but not be limited to the
following:

a. A review of the contract document clauses specific to Environment Health and

Safety;

b. A review of Environmental Health and Safety procedures relevant to the contract;

c. Determination of the frequency and method of site Environmental Health and

Safety inspections.

d. Determination of the duration and frequency of the Environmental Health and

Safety meetings and Environmental Health and Safety talks.

e. A weekly ‘’Toolbox Meeting” shall be conducted for all contracts. The Agenda
shall include, but not be limited to the following:

i. Identification of specific risks and hazards associated with the contract

work;

ii. Discussion of controls required to manage the risks and hazards

identified

iii. Reporting and correcting of all Environmental Health and Safety

deficiencies;

Page 272 of 282 
 iv. Reporting of Environmental Health and Safety incidents and injuries;

v. Appointment of Contract Environmental Health and Safety representative,

and

vi. Emergency procedures for the contract.

12.3.5 Environmental Health and Safety Induction

a. The Project Manager shall be responsible for organizing an Environmental
Health and Safety induction before the contractor begins work.

b. The induction process shall be based on the critical nature of the work and
shall specify the Environmental Health and Safety procedures and
guidelines.

c. The Contractor’s Induction Program shall be signed off by the Sponsor or

nominated representative of the sponsor to confirm that the Induction
Program is adequate and conforms to relevant standards on Environmental
Health and Safety.

d. The Induction program shall discuss Environmental Health and Safety Issues
which shall include but not be limited to the following subjects:

i. Contractor/Employee Induction Quick Reference Card containing

Contractor guidelines.

ii. Site entry and Access

iii. Care of the Environment

iv. Work permits and cancellation

v. Safe Working Practices

vi. Working from Heights

vii. Confined Spaces

viii. Manual handling and materials movement

ix. Hazardous substances

x. Plant and Equipment

xi. Health and Safety devices

xii. Personal protective clothing

xiii. Housekeeping

xiv. Waste disposal

Page 273 of 282 
 xv. Incident/Emergency Response

xvi. Fire protection

xvii. First Aid

xviii. Isolation of services

12.3.6 Site Health and Safety Plan

Contractors undertaking work in electric power stations are required to prepare a site
Health and Safety Plan for each contract specific to the risk that will or may be
encountered during the execution of the contract.

12.3.6.1 Issues for Site Health and Safety Plan

The following is a list, non-limiting, of issues that may apply to a contract. Where the
issue is relevant to the contract, the safe work practice to be used by the contractor
should be outlined in the Health and Safety Management Plan, along with the
documentation to demonstrate employees are trained in the procedures.

The following are possible issues:

a. Lockout/ Tagout

b. Excavation/Trenching procedures

c. Confined Space Entry

d. Forklift Driver Health and Safety

e. Hot Work Permits and Cancellation

f. Emergency Response and evacuation

g. Ladders, Platforms, Scaffolds and Lifts

h. Site Isolation

i. Fall Protection

j. Waste Disposal procedures

k. Driver Health and Safety

l. Back injury prevention

m. Site Housekeeping

n. Laboratory Health and Safety

o. Vehicle access to site

p. Electrical equipment grounding

Page 274 of 282 
 q. Emergency exit from site

r. Asbestos

s. Smoking

t. Fire protection

u. Personal Protective Equipment

v. Hearing and Sight Conservation

w. First Aid

x. Signage of Work place, equipment and tools

y. Chemical/Material handling

z. Machine guarding

12.3.7 Water Management

The use of water during construction and operation of power plants shall comply with
the provisions of the National Guidelines and Standards for Water Quality in Nigeria
(1999), which provides for the proper management of water (either marine or
interstate fresh water) to maintain its quality as prescribed hereunder (Table 12.1)

Table 12.1: Water Quality Standard for Power Generation Station

Concentration (mg/l) Cooling Once Through

Boiler Misc.
Parameter Fresh Brackish*
Feedwater Uses
Silica <50 <25 <0.21 -
Aluminium NS NS <0.01 -
Iron NS NS <0.01 <1.0
Manganese NS NS <0.01 -
Calcium <200 <420 <0.01 -
Mangnesium NS NS <0.01 -
Ammonia NS NS <0.07 -
Bicarbonate <600 <140 <0.5 -
Sulphate <680 <2700 NS -
Chloride <600 <19000 NS -
Dissolved solids <1000 <35000 <0.5 1000
Copper NS NS <0.01 -
Hardness <850 <6260 <0.07 -
Zinc NS NS <0.01 -
Alkalinity (as CaCo3) 500 <115 <1 -
pH unit 5.0-8.3 6.0-8.3 8.8-9.4 5.0-9.0
Organic material Methylene blue active
substances NS NS <0.1 <10
Carbon tetrachloride extract <NS NS NS <10
Chemical Oxygen Demand (COD) <75 <75 <1.0 -
Dissolved oxygen - - <0.007 -
Total suspended solids <500 <2500 <0.05 <5

Note:
* = Brackish water- dissolved solids more than 1000 mg/l
Page 275 of 282 
 NS = No Specification
Source: Guidelines and Standards for Environmental Protection in Nigeria, 1991

12.3.8 Emission and Effluent Limitations

The National Guidelines and Standards for Environmental Control impose among,
others restrictions, the release of toxic substances during the construction and
operation of power plants. It also stipulates requirements for monitoring of pollution
to ensure that permissible limits are not exceeded. The Statutory Guidelines provide
limits for the emissions of GHGs, pollutants and particulates.

a. Particulates

Particulate matter (PM)

Table 12.2 below specifies the National emission limits for particulates from
combustion of various fuels.

For all Power plants or units, PM emissions (all sizes) during construction shall not
exceed 500 mg/m3

Table 12.2: Emission Limits for Air Particulates from Stationary Sources

Combustion of Fuel Limits (mg/m3)

Coal 500
Oil 250
Heavy Oil 300
Natural Gas NS
NS: Not Specified

Source: Guidelines and Standards for Environmental Protection in Nigeria, 1991

b. Atmospheric Pollutants (See Table 12.3)

i. Sulphur Dioxide. Total sulphur dioxide emissions during construction shall

not exceed 830 µg/m3.

ii. Nitrogen oxides. The specific emissions of nitrogen oxides shall not exceed
500 µg/m3 during construction.

iii. Carbon Monoxide: Emissions of carbon monoxide during construction shall

not exceed 5000 µg/m3.

iv. Volatile Organic Carbon (VOC): Total emissions of VOC during construction
shall not exceed 6000 µg/m3.

Table 12.3: Emission Limits for Gaseous Pollutants

3
Parameter Emission Standard μg/m
Particulates 500
SO2 830
NOx 500

Page 276 of 282 
 CO 5000
H2S 30
VOC 6000
Source: Guidelines and Standards for Environmental Protection in Nigeria, 1991

c. Liquid Effluent

i. Effluent discharged during construction shall comply with the National

effluent discharge guideline for discharge of effluent to land and inland
water (Table 12.4)

Table 12.4: INTERIM EFFLUENT LIMITATION GUIDELINES IN NIGERIA

Parameters mg/l

Limit for discharge into Limit for Land

surface water application
Temperature Less than 40oC within o
Less than 40 C
meter of outfit
Colour (Lovibond Units) 7 -
pH 6-9 6-9
o
BOD5 at 20 C 50 500
Total suspended solids 30 -
Total dissolved solids 2000 2000
Chloride (as CI-) 600 600
Sulphate (as SO42-) 500 1000
2-
Sulphide as S 0.2 -
Cyanide (as CN-) 0.1 -
Detergents (linear alkyl sulphonate as methylene
blue active substance) 15 15
Oil and grease 10 30
3
Nitrate (as NO )NO3 20 -
3
Phosphate (a PO4 5 10
Arsenic (as As) 0.1 -
Barium (as Ba) 5 5
Tin (as Sn) 10 10
Iron (as Fe) 20 -
Manganese (as Mn) 5 -
Phenolic compounds (as phenol 0.2 -
Chlorine (free) 0.1 -
Cadmium Cd <1 -
Chromium (trivalent and hexavelant) <1 -
Copper Less than 1 -
Lead less than 1 -
Mercury 0.05 -
Nickel Less than 1 -
Selenium Less than 1 -
Silver 0.1 -
Zinc Less than 1 -
Total metals 3 -
2+)
Calcium (as Ca 200 -
2+
Magnesium(as Mg ) 200 -
Boron (as B) 5 5
Alkyl mercury compounds Not dectectable -
Polychlorinated Biphenyl 0.003 0.003

Page 277 of 282 
 d. Also, thermal power plants shall comply during construction with the guidelines
listed below.

Table 12.5: Effluent Limitations for Thermal Power Plants

Parameter Value
pH 6–9
Total Suspended Solids 50 mg/l
Oil and Grease 10 mg/l
Chromium (total) 0.5 mg/l
Total Residual Chlorine 0.2 mg/l
Copper 0.5 mg/l
Iron 1.0 mg/l
Zinc 1.0 mg/l
Polychlorinated Biphenyl ( PCB) 0.003 mg/l
Mercury 0.05 mg/l
o
Temperature Increase 3 C
Source: Pollution Prevention and Abatement Handbook, World Bank, 1998

12.3.9 Solid Wastes

During construction, solid wastes that do not leach toxic substances or other
contaminants of concern to the environment may be disposed in landfills or other
disposal sites provided that they do not impact nearby water bodies. Where toxics or
other contaminants are expected to leach out, they should be treated by, for
example, stabilization before disposal.

12.3.10 Ambient Noise

Noise during construction shall be limited to levels indicated in Table 12.6. Noise
abatement measures should achieve either the levels given below or a maximum
increase in background levels of 3 decibels (measured on the A scale) [dB(A)].
Measurements are to be taken at noise receptors located outside the project
property boundary.

Table 12.6: Maximum Permissible Noise Levels During construction

Noise Control Zone Sound Level dB ( A ) Sound Level dB ( A )

(Leq) Leq

Day Night

Residential 60 40

Commercial 75 50

Industrial 85 65

Page 278 of 282 
 Time Frame:
Day: 6.00 a.m. – 10.00 p.m.
Night: 10.00 p.m. – 6.00 a.m.
The time frame takes into consideration human activity.
Source: The National Environment (Noise Standards and control) Regulations 2003 

Table 12.7: Maximum Permissible Noise Levels for Impact Noise

Permitted Number of Impulses or
Sound Level dB (A) (Lmax)
Impacts per day

140 100

Source: The National Environment (Noise Standards and Control) Regulations 2003

The maximum permissible level for impact noise during construction is given in
Table 12.7 above.

The noise level at receptors close to a Power Plant shall not exceed the limits
indicated in Table 12.8 below at any time.

Table 12.8: Maximum Permissible Levels at nearby Receptors

Facility Noise Limits B ( A ) (Leq)
DAY NIGHT

A. Any building used as hospital, 45 35

convalescence home, home for the aged,
sanatorium and institutes of higher
learning, conference rooms, public library,
environmental or recreational sites.
B. Residential buildings 50 35

C. Mixed residential (with some commercial 55 45

and entertainment)

D. Residential + industry or small-scale 60 50

production = commerce

E. Industrial 70 60

Time Frame use duration

Day: 6.00 a.m. – 10.00 p.m.

Night: 10.00 p.m. – 6.00 a.m.

The time frame takes into consideration human activity.

Source: The National Environment (Noise Standards and control) Regulations 2003

12.3.11 Record Keeping

The following information shall be kept during construction.
Page 279 of 282 
 a. Site-specific Health and Safety Plan, and criteria used to approve the plan

b. Minutes of Health and Safety start-up meetings

c. Contract Health and Safety evaluation

d. Stop Work orders

e. Accident and injury reports

f. Site-specific workplace inspection reports

12.4 Power Evacuation

12.4.1 Voltage Levels:
The Generator shall ensure that the nominal and operational voltages sent to the
transmission System are 132kV and 330kV depending on the plant.

12.4.2 Voltage Variations:

The Generator shall maintain the output voltage sent out to the grid to be within the
voltage control ranges specified in the Grid Code, Part 3 Section 2.1 as follows
depending on the voltage of the grid at the point of connection:-

Table 12.9: Generated Voltage Levels

Voltage Level Minimum Maximum Voltage Range %
Voltage
330KV 313.5 (0.95) kV 346.5 ( 1.05) kV +/- 5%
132kV 118.8 (0.9) kV 143.0 (1.09) kV +/- 10%

12.4.3 Frequency Level:

All Generators shall operate at a nominal 50 Hertz frequency mode but shall be able
to remain in operation for system frequency deviations with reasonable deviations
from the nominal, in order to prevent unnecessary system shutdowns whenever the
system frequency varies from the nominal even for minor values.

12.4.4 Frequency Variations:

a. Generators shall ensure that the output frequency of the station is maintained
reliably and safely within the limits specified in the Grid Code Part 3, Section 2
such that under extreme system fault conditions all generating units should
disconnect at frequencies greater than or equal to 51.75Hz, and less than or
equal to 48.5Hz, via over frequency and under frequency relays respectively,
unless agreed otherwise in writing with the System Operator.
b. Generators shall allow only tolerable small amounts of harmonics such that the
Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) is limited to ≤ 20% [IEEE 519–1992(USA),
G5/4(UK) standards]

12.4.5 Technical Criteria for Plant and Apparatus at the Inter ‐ Connection Point
a. Generator Installations:

Page 280 of 282 
 Technical facilities must be installed on all Generator networks to provide the
following information to the responsible Control Centre:
i. Status indications of circuit breaker, isolator switches, and earth switches
in so far as they are required for operation of the network.
ii. Measurement of Active and Reactive power flow in both the import and
export directions, as well as voltages and frequency.
iii. Where applicable, reference values for control (activation/deactivation of
primary/ secondary control) and instantaneous Demand value of the
secondary control.
iv. Reference value of the Reactive Power in the form of the schedule or as
an instantaneous value (e.g. for voltage and Reactive Power control).
v. Critical protection information.
b. Generator Control Centre:
c. The control centre of each Generator shall provide the facilities to effectively
schedule the power interchange with the control centre of the interconnected
network.

12.4.6 Performance Requirements for Power Stations:

a. The generating units shall have, at least, the following requirements:
i. Each Generating Unit must be capable of supplying rated power output
(MW) at any point between the limits of 0.85 power factor lagging and
0.95 power factor leading, at the Generating Unit terminals at rated
voltage level in the Transmission Network.
ii. Each Generating Unit must be capable of continually supplying its
registered output within the power system frequency range of 50Hz
±0.5%. Under system stress the frequency variations within the limits of
50Hz ± 2.5% (48.75 - 51.25Hz).
iii. Under extreme system fault conditions all Generating Units should
disconnect at the following frequencies:
a) By a frequency greater than or equal to 51.75Hz (+3.5%)
b) By a frequency less than or equal to 48.5Hz (-3.0%).

iv. The active power output under steady state conditions of any Generating
Unit directly connected to the transmission network should not be
affected by voltage changes in the normal operating range. The Reactive
Power output of a Generating Unit having a synchronous alternator must,
under steady state conditions, be fully available within the voltage range
± 10% of nominal voltage at the connection point.

v. A Generating Unit having a synchronous alternator must be capable of

start up, synchronize and pick up load:
a) From cold, within 10 hours
b) From warm, within 6 hours
c) From hot, within 15 minutes.

vi. A steam – turbine or gas – turbine Generating Unit which has been
synchronized must be capable of ramping up pursuant to a Dispatch
instruction at a rate of at least 3% Gas cooling rate (GCR) per minute. A
Page 281 of 282 
 steam – turbine or gas – turbine Generating Unit must be capable of de-
loading at a rate of at least 3% Gas cooling rate (GCR) per minute.
b. Power Producers shall be responsible for protecting all their Generating Units
against damage should system frequency variations exceed 51.5Hz or go below
47.5Hz. In the event that such variations occur, the Power Producer shall
disconnect the Generating Unit for reasons of safety of personnel, apparatus,
and/or plant.

Electrical protection of the Generating Unit shall take precedence over

operational controls (e.g. voltage controllers, excitation equipment) and the
Generating Unit shall disconnect from the network should unacceptable
Operational States arise as a result of failure of the operational controls. This
shall apply in particular when spontaneous faults occur (e.g. earth faults, short
circuits).

c. All Power Stations shall meet the performance requirements as contained in Part
3 Section 4 of the Grid Code in respect of Turbine Controllers and Automatic
Voltage Regulators.

12.5 Penalties for Non Compliance.

Any person who contravenes any provision of this Regulation or Chapter commits an
offence and punishable under Section 94 of the Electric Power Sector Reform Act 2005.

Page 282 of 282